You are on page 1of 140

30GXN,R080-528 30HXA,HXC076-271 Air-Cooled and Water-Cooled Chillers with ComfortLink™ Controls

50/60 Hz Series 6

Controls Start-Up, Operation, Service, and Troubleshooting
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and equipment location (roof, elevated structures, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service mechanics should install, start up, and service this equipment. When working on this equipment, observe precautions in the literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in handling all electrical components. DO NOT attempt to unbraze factory joints when servicing this equipment. Compressor oil is flammable and there is no way to detect how much oil may be in any of the refrigerant lines. Cut lines with a tubing cutter as required when performing service. Use a pan to catch any oil that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil to add to system. DO NOT re-use compressor oil. Do NOT leave refrigerant system open to air any longer than necessary. Seal circuits being serviced and charge with dry nitrogen to prevent oil contamination when timely repairs cannot be completed.

CONTENTS
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation and service. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed. Page SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,3 MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3,4 Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Screw Compressor Board (SCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board . . . . . . . . . 3 ComfortLink Compressor Protection (CCP) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Enable/Off/Remote Connect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Board Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Control Module Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . . 3 OPERATION DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 • EXV OPERATION • ECONOMIZER OPERATION Oil Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Motor Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Back Pressure Valve (30GXN,R and 30HXA only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ComfortLink Compressor Protection (CCP) Board 7 • OUTPUTS • INPUTS Wye-Delta vs Across-the-Line (XL) Starting Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 • MINUTES LEFT FOR START • MINUTES OFF TIME • LOADING SEQUENCE • CLOSE CONTROL • LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION • CAPACITY SEQUENCE DETERMINATION • MINIMUM LOAD VALVE • CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out components, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic modules or electrical components.

To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger tubes always run fluid through heat exchangers when adding or removing refrigerant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler and condenser fluid loops to prevent the freezing of heat exchangers when the equipment is exposed to temperatures below 32 F (0° C). DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building. Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE (American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers) 15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. PC 903 Catalog No. 533-00052 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30G,H-9T Pg 1 1-04 Replaces: New Book 2 Tab 5c

CONTENTS (cont)
Page Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 • GENERAL • AIR-COOLED UNITS (30GXN,R) • WATER-COOLED UNITS (30HXC) • CONDENSERLESS UNITS (30HXA) • 09DK AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS • 09AZ AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS • OPERATION SEQUENCE • VARIABLE SPEED FAN CONTROL • ADJUSTING PID ROUTINES Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 • SWITCH • 7-DAY SCHEDULE • OCCUPANCY • CCN Cooling Setpoint Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Ice Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Cooler and Condenser (30HXC) Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 • COOLER PUMP CONTROL • CONDENSER PUMP CONTROL Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Cooler Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Oil Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Navigator Display Module Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Alarms/Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Run Hours and Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 • DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) • EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT • DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-51 Checking Display Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Unit Shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Complete Unit Stoppage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Single Circuit Stoppage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Restart Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 • POWER FAILURE EXTERNAL TO THE UNIT Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Compressor Alarm/Alert Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 EXV Troubleshooting Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 • INSPECTING/OPENING ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES • BRAZED-PLATE ECONOMIZERS SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-71 Servicing Coolers and Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 • TUBE PLUGGING • RETUBING • TIGHTENING COOLER/CONDENSER HEAD BOLTS Inspecting/Cleaning Heat Exchangers . . . . . . . . . . . 52 • COOLERS • CONDENSERS (30HX Only) Water Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Condenser Coils (30GXN,R Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 • COIL CLEANING • CLEANING E-COATED COILS Condenser Fans (30GXN,R Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Refrigerant Charging/Adding Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Oil Charging/Low Oil Recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Oil Filter Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 • REPLACING THE EXTERNAL OIL FILTER • REPLACING THE INTERNAL OIL FILTER Compressor Changeout Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 2

Page • BURNOUT CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE Moisture-Liquid Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Filter Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Liquid Line Service Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 • LOCATION • THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 • TROUBLESHOOTING • FLOW SENSOR Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 • COMPRESSOR PROTECTION • OIL SEPARATOR HEATERS (30GX) • COOLER PROTECTION Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 • PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES Control Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 • MAIN BASE BOARD (MBB), SCREW COMPRESSOR BOARD (SCB), EXPANSION VALVE BOARD (EXV), ENERGY MANAGEMENT MODULE (EMM), COMFORTLINK™ COMPRESSOR PROTECTION BOARD (CCP), AND THE NAVIGATOR • RED LED • GREEN LED • YELLOW LED Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . 69 Replacing Defective Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . 69 Winter Shutdown Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 PRE-START-UP PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 START-UP AND OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,72 Actual Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Operating Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 FIELD WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72-74 APPENDIX A (Compressor Must Trip Amps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-84 APPENDIX B (Capacity Loading Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85-89 APPENDIX C (Available Accessories). . . . . . . . . 90,91 APPENDIX D (Building Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92-94 APPENDIX E (Cooler and Condenser Pressure Drop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-100 APPENDIX F (Typical System Components) . . . . . . . . . . . 101-112 APPENDIX G (CCN Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . 113-125 APPENDIX H (30GXN,R Duplex Combinations) . . 126 APPENDIX I (Motormaster® V Operation Instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127-129 APPENDIX J (Maintenance Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 START-UP CHECKLIST (For 30GX,HX Liquid Chiller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CL-1 to CL-10

GENERAL
IMPORTANT: These units use refrigerant R-134a. Compressor oil used with R-134a is Castrol Icematic SW-220, Carrier Specification #PP47-32. This publication contains Controls Start-Up, Service, Operation and Troubleshooting data for the 30GXN,R080-528 and 30HXA,C076-271 screw chillers. Circuits are identified as circuits A and B, and compressors are identified as A1 or A2 in circuit A, and B1 or B2 in circuit B. Refer to Appendix H for Duplex unit combinations. The 30GXN,GXR,HX Series chillers feature microprocessor-based electronic controls and electronic expansion valves (EXV) in each refrigeration circuit.

The control system cycles compressor loaders and/or compressors to maintain the selected leaving fluid temperature set point. The system automatically positions the EXV to maintain the specified discharge gas superheat temperature in the circuit. The system also has capabilities to control a condenser water valve to maintain suitable discharge pressure for the 30HXC unit. Safeties are continuously monitored to prevent the unit from operating under unsafe conditions. A scheduling function can be programmed by the user to control the unit’s occupied and unoccupied schedules. The control also operates a test function and a manual control function that allows the operator to check output signals and ensure components are operable.

MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS Main Base Board (MBB) — This board contains the
majority of the control system operating software and controls the operation of the machine. It has 11 input channels and 11 output channels. The MBB continuously monitors input/output channel information received from all the modules and controls all output signals for all output channels. The processor module also controls the EXV driver module, commanding it to open or close each EXV in order to maintain the proper cooler level. Information is transmitted between the MBB; ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection (CCP) boards, the EXV driver module, the Screw Compressor Board (SCB), the Energy Management Module (EMM) and the Navigator modules through a 3-wire communications bus called the Local Equipment Network (LEN). The remote enhanced display is connected to the MBB through a 3-wire communications bus, but uses a different communication bus called the Carrier Comfort Network (CCN). The CCN bus is also used to communicate to other CCN devices when the unit is installed in a network application. Screw Compressor Board (SCB) — The SCB has 8 inputs along with 2 analog and 5 discrete outputs. The SCB module communicates the status of the inputs with the MBB and operates the oil heater (30GXN,R only), cooler heater (30GXN,R only) and oil pump outputs.

position the chiller is under its own control. Move the switch to the Off position to shut the chiller down. Move the switch to the Remote Contact position and a field-installed dry contact can be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of handling a 24-vac, 20-mA load. In the Enable and Remote Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN configuration and set point data. Emergency On/Off Switch — The Emergency On/ Off switch should only be used when it is required to shut the chiller off immediately. Power to the MBB, EMM, EXV, SCB and Navigator display is interrupted when this switch is off and all outputs from these modules will be turned off.

Board Addresses — The Main Base Board (MBB) has an Instance jumper that must be set to ‘1’. The EXV, SCB and EMM boards have 4-position DIP switches that must be set to 'On' for all boards. The CCP address has a 4-position DIP switch. Switches 3 and 4 set the address. Control Module Communication
RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs (lightemitting diodes). When operating correctly, the red status LEDs should be blinking in unison at a rate of once every 2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify the board address and that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that the Main Base Board (MBB) is supplied with the current software. If necessary, reload current software. If the problem still persists, replace the MBB. A board LED that is lit continuously or blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the board should be replaced. GREEN LED — The MBB has one green LED. The Local Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking whenever power is on. All other boards have a LEN LED that should be blinking whenever power is on. Check LEN connections for potential communication errors at the board J3 and/or J4 connectors. Communication between modules is accomplished by a 3-wire bus. These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module. The J5 connector on the MBB provides both power and communication directly to the Navigator. YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) LED will blink during times of network communication.

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board —
The EXV board has 4 inputs and 2 outputs. It receives signals from the MBB and operates the electronic expansion devices. The electronic expansion valve board also sends the MBB the status of its 4 input channels.

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface —
The 30GXN,R and 30HX chiller units can be connected to the CCN if desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed in the field. The system elements are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The positive pin of each system element communication connector must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on either side of it. This is also required for the negative and signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at TB3. Consult the CCN Contractor's Manual for further information. NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of –20 C to 60 C is required. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413 or 5463), American (A22503), Belden (8772), or Columbia (02525) meets the above mentioned requirements. It is important when connecting to a CCN communication bus that a color-coding scheme be used for the entire network to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used for the signal positive, black for the signal negative and white for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing 3

ComfortLink Compressor Protection (CCP) Board — The CCP board monitors the high-pressure
switch status, running current and motor temperature for each compressor. Each CCP board controls up to 2 compressors. The CCP board also controls the motor cooling solenoid, oil solenoid and contactor outputs. A pre-punched configuration header for each compressor determines the must trip amps setting. Each CCP board sends the MBB each compressor's motor temperature, relay status and running current as a percentage of the must trip amps value. The CCP board also communicates any alarm conditions as the feedback value. Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-installed accessory. The EMM receives 4 to 20 mA inputs for the temperature reset, cooling set point reset and demand limit functions. The EMM also receives the switch inputs for the field-installed 2-stage demand limit and ice done functions. The EMM communicates the status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to the inputs received. Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch — The Enable/ Off/Remote Contact switch is a 3-position switch used to control the chiller (see Table 1). When switched to the Enable

EXV OPERATION — High-pressure liquid refrigerant enters the valve through the side. but is only intended for temporary connection (for example: a laptop computer running Service Tool).) 3. thereby changing orifice size. and black (–) conductors. The EXV (electronic expansion valve) is a device that contains a linear actuator stepper motor. The discharge gas temperature sensor monitors the discharge gas temperature leaving each compressor and sends this information to the MBB through LEN communication with the EXV board. the refrigerant reenters the cycle at an intermediate port in the compression cycle. Next. the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). All other sizes use standard EXVs. At initial start-up. and the black wire to the (–) terminal. Turn off power to the control box. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on TB3.different colored wires. its pressure is reduced to an intermediate level.118-350 and associated modular units and 30HXA. After that. (Substitute appropriate colors for different colored cables. If the communication bus cable exits from one building and enters another. At each system element. As the stepper motor rotates. This will further subcooling the liquid in the first circuit as the refrigerant flashes to vapor. Also. white (ground). To connect the unit to the network: 1. then resets the position counter to zero. From this point. The processor does this by initializing the EXVs at start-up. since the additional power required to accomplish this is minimal. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+). Table 1 — Unit Mode from Control/Enable/Off/ Remote Contact and CCN State SWITCH POSITION ENABLE OFF REMOTE CONTACT REMOTE CONTACTS NR NR OPEN CLOSED CCN CONFIGURATION DISABLE ENABLE NR NR DISABLE ENABLE CCN STATE NR RUN STOP NR NR NR RUN STOP UNIT MODE LOCAL ON CCN ON CCN OFF LOCAL OFF LOCAL OFF LOCAL ON CCN ON CCN OFF EXV COOLER FEED SIGHT GLASS Fig. the white wire to COM terminal. motion is transferred into linear movement by the lead screw. The increase in performance is achieved by diverting a small amount of liquid through a thermostatic expansion valve to a second circuit in the brazed-plate heat exchanger. The economizer is a brazed plate heat exchanger designed to improve chiller capacity and efficiency as well as providing compressor motor cooling.R ONLY) BRAZED PLATE ECONOMIZER Fig. See Fig. MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID LEGEND CCN — Carrier Comfort Network NR — Input Not Read by Processor NOTE: If the unit is configured for a clock. This increase in subcooling provides additional capacity. Each compressor has a discharge gas temperature sensor mounted vertically in the top of the muffler assembly. 4. The RJ-14 CCN connector on TB3 can also be used. until 4 TXV BULB TXV SOLENOID (30GXN.C161-271 units. the refrigerant flows to the EXV which regulates flow to the cooler to maintain the discharge superheat setpoint. ECONOMIZER OPERATION — Economizers are factory installed on 30GXN. On 30HXA. the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a ground at one point only.000 discrete steps of motion are obtained. The stepper motor moves in increments and is controlled directly by the processor module. As refrigerant passes through the orifice. See Fig. If the communication bus is entirely within one building. the shields of its communication bus cables must be tied together. The vapor that flashes leaves the top of the economizer where it passes to the compressor and is used to provide motor cooling. The large number of steps and long stroke result in very accurate control of refrigerant flow. 2. A series of calibrated slots are located inside the orifice assembly. The sleeve is moved by a linear stepper motor. the efficiency of the machine improves. OPERATION DATA Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) — The MBB controls the EXV through the EXV board. 1 — Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) the next initialization. Through the stepper motor and lead screw. the microprocessor keeps accurate track of the valve position in order to use this information as input for the other control functions. 15. 2. Liquid refrigerant is supplied from the condenser to the top of the economizer. the processor counts the total number of open and closed steps it has sent to each valve. To control refrigerant flow for different operating conditions.R108. The processor sends out enough closing pulses to the valve to move it from fully open to fully closed.C chillers the economizer is active all the time. the pressure drops and the refrigerant changes to a 2-phase condition (liquid and vapor). 2 — Brazed Plate Economizer . the EXV position is at zero. After passing over the motor windings. then the unit is under clock control if it is in an ON mode. 1. As the refrigerant passes through the economizer. On 30GX chillers the economizer is active when any compressor is fully loaded. the sleeve moves up and down over the orifice.

When a circuit is required to start. The control again reads the pressure from the oil pressure transducer. after which the oil solenoid is energized to open the oil inlet valve at the compressor.R units equipped with economizers.R models only) and continually flows to the motor windings. The pump is operated for a period of 20 seconds.HX screw chillers use one externally mounted prelubricating oil pump per circuit. if the compressor needs 2 gpm (high pressure differential condition) and the oil pump is capable of 1.3 C). the oil pump will continue to run for 120 seconds. the oil pump will increase pressure to satisfy the oil pressure requirement. It is not designed to overcome high pressure drop across filters during high pressure differential conditions. For example. 5 . which contains an internal spring that closes a piston if the pressure in the oil separator is not at least 15 psig greater than the economizer pressure. Within 3 seconds. All refrigerant used for motor cooling reenters the rotors through a port located midway along the compression cycle and is compressed to discharge pressure. The oil flow requirements of the compressor vary based on pressure differential across the compressor.Oil Pumps — The 30GXN.75 gpm.GXR. 3 — Oil Pump Table 2 — Oil Pump Suction Pressure Requirements SUCTION PRESSURE (SP) ≤ 35 psig 35 psig < SP < 51 psig ≥ 51 psig OIL PUMP TURNS ON WHEN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE IS LESS THAN: 12 psig 14.R units and mounted on the oil separator shell of 30HXA units. This pump is operated as part of the start-up sequence. The sensors are listed in Table 3. The control generates an alarm if the third attempt fails. 3). flash gas leaves the top of the economizer (when the circuit is fully loaded for 30GXN.GXR. If the pump is not able to build up enough oil pressure. the controls energize the oil pump first and read the oil pressure transducer reading. On 30GXN. the pump is turned off.2 gpm.5 psig 17 psig The oil pump will continue to operate until the discharge pressure minus economizer pressure (which equals 25) is greater than 17 plus 15 (oil system loss before pump was started). there is no pressure rise and the oil flow will bypass the check valve and supply the 2 gpm to the compressor. When the oil pump is operating. if necessary. The pumps are mounted to a bracket on the condensers of 30HXC units and to the oil separator on 30HXA units. See Table 2. The valve’s function is to ensure that there is sufficient system differential pressure to allow for oil to be driven back to the compressor. to build oil pressure. The control accomplishes this by cycling the motor cooling solenoid valve to allow liquid refrigerant to flow across the motor windings as needed. Sensors — The 30GXN. If the differential oil pressure (oil pressure – economizer pressure) for a compressor is too low the oil pump will be started. If the compressor requires . If the pump has built up sufficient oil pressure. Once the compressor has started. The pump will continue to operate until the discharge pressure minus economizer pressure is greater then 17 psi plus the oil system pressure drop. The units use up to 10 standard pressure transducers and up to 10 standard thermistors (including 4 motor temperature thermistors). Motor Cooling — Compressor motor winding temperatures are controlled to a set point of 200 F (93. Example: Discharge pressure 80 psi Oil pressure 65 psi Oil system pressure drop 80 – 65 = 15 psi Economizer pressure 55 psi Differential oil pressure (65 – 55) = 10 psi Suction pressure 40 psi Based on the above conditions the oil pump will be started because differential oil pressure equals 10 psi. the pumps are mounted above the base rails on the oil separator side of the unit (see Fig. Back Pressure Valve (30GXN.HX ComfortLink™ control system gathers information from sensors to control the operation of the chiller. it is capable of increasing oil pressure from 0 psi to 50 psi depending on the oil flow requirements of the compressor. On 30GXN. the pump is re-energized and makes two additional attempts. the compressor is allowed to start after 15 seconds. The oil pump is designed to provide differential oil pressure during low pressure differential conditions. The oil system pressure drop is saved and used to determine when the oil pump should be shut off.R units.R and 30HXA only) — This valve is located on the oil separator outlet on 30GXN. A small copper line (economizer pressure) is connected to the top of the valve. OIL FEED TO COMPRESSOR CHECK VALVE OIL SUPPLY LINE TO PUMP OIL PUMP OIL SEPARATOR FILTER Fig. The oil pump is also used to supplement system pressure under certain operating conditions. Just before the oil pump is started the control measures the pressure differential between the discharge pressure and oil pressure (oil system pressure drop). The only way this can be satisfied is if the discharge pressure increases or the compressor unloads at which point the oil pump will be shut off.

8. plug J5 CCP2. terminals 3. terminals 1. J6-7. terminals 5.23 MBB.8 TB5. J5-7.2. **Sensors are available as accessories for field installation (30HXC only). J5-5.14 MBB. J8-21. 370-528 only. plug J9 EXV.25. J5-11.6 SCB.6 TB2.9 SCB.5. plug J5 CCP1.5. J8-18. J6-1.8 EXV.22. †30GXN.16.6 SCB. J5-9.12 EXV.12 CCP1. J8-24.2. J5-7. J8-15.R204-350.6 TB5.4 Connection Terminals MBB. J8-11.Table 3 — Thermistor and Transducer Locations Sensor T1 T2 Motor Temp A1 Motor Temp A2* Motor Temp B1 Motor Temp B2† T5 T6 T3* T4† T9 (optional)** T10 (optional)** COND EWT (optional)** COND LWT (optional)** Sensor DPT-A SPT-A EPT-A OPT-A1 OPT-A2* DPT-B SPT-B EPT-B OPT-B1 OPT-B2† THERMISTORS Description Location Cooler Leaving Fluid Temp Cooler Head Leaving Fluid Side Cooler Entering Fluid Temp Cooler Head Entering Fluid Side Motor Temperature A1 Compressor A1 Junction Box Motor Temperature A2 Compressor A2 Junction Box Motor Temperature B1 Compressor B1 Junction Box Motor Temperature B2 Compressor B2 Junction Box Discharge Gas Temp Comp A1 Top of Comp A1 Discharge Line Discharge Gas Temp Comp B1 Top of Comp B1 Discharge Line Discharge Gas Temp Comp A2 Top of Comp A2 Discharge Line Discharge Gas Temp Comp B2 Top of Comp B2 Discharge Line Outdoor Air Thermistor/Dual LWT Outside Air Stream/Common Leaving Fluid Space Temperature Conditioned Space Condenser Entering Water Thermistor Condenser Entering Fluid Line Condenser Leaving Water Thermistor Condenser Leaving Fluid Line PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS Description Location Discharge Pressure Circuit A Top of Condenser Separator Circuit A Suction Pressure Circuit A Top of Cooler Circuit A Economizer Pressure Circuit A Economizer Line Entering Comp A Oil Pressure Compressor A1 Compressor A1 Oil Connection Oil Pressure Compressor A2 Compressor A2 Oil Connection Discharge Pressure Circuit B Top of Oil Separator Circuit B Suction Pressure Circuit B Top of Cooler Circuit B Economizer Pressure Circuit B Economizer Line Entering Comp B Oil Pressure Compressor B1 Compressor B1 Oil Connection Oil Pressure Compressor B2 Compressor B1 Oil Connection Connection Terminals MBB.26 SCB. J5-4.20 SCB.8. 6 .19.17 MBB.3 *30HX206-271 and 30GXN. terminals 7.9 SCB. J8-13.10 EXV.3 MBB. J6-4.R281-350 only.2 TB2. J5-1. plug J9 CCP2.

4.C206-271 and compressor B2 for 30GXN. 3 and 4 should be set to ‘0’ (“OFF” position).C076-186 units and two CCP boards are installed on 30GXN. The CCP provides the following functions: • compressor main contactor control • Wye-Delta contactor transition • compressor ground current protection • motor temperature reading • high-pressure protection • reverse rotation protection • current imbalance protection • compressor oil solenoid control • motor cooling solenoid control • LEN communications • starting and running overcurrent protection The CCP has the following 4 output relays and 3 inputs: OUTPUTS: • compressor contactor • compressor oil solenoid • compressor motor cooling solenoid • Wye-Delta transition relay INPUTS: • motor temperature • three-phase current • high-pressure switch A diagram of the CCP board is shown in Fig. The CCP has a reset button located between the DIP switch and the J10 connector. 4.C206-271 units. Switch 2 should be set to ‘0’ (“OFF” position). Control power to CCP board must be off before making any changes to DIP switch settings. J10 3 2 1 3 2 1 J2 8 1 GREEN LED J3 5 4 3 2 1 J11 Fig. 4 — ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection (CCP) Board 7 . DIP switch 2 disables compressor ground current protection. DIP switch 1 should be set to ‘L’ (‘On’ position for LEN communication). Each compressor's MTA (must trip amps) setting is communicated to the MBB during the initialization period. On all connectors. The address for each CCP board is set using DIP (dual in-line package) switches. For CCP2 (compressor A2 for 30GXN. One CCP board is installed on 30GXN. switch 1 should be set to ‘L’ and switches 3 and 4 should be set to ‘1’ (“ON” position). pin 1 is identified by a “G ”. J7 ON L 1 1 J1 1 2 3 4 5 J6 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 J9 COMP B1/B2 MTA HEADER S SW1 SW2 0 SW3 0 8 SW4 DIP SWITCH RED LED L 1 J8 1 2 3 4 J4 ON S 1 2 3 4 LED MBB MTA L S — — — — — LEGEND Light-Emitting Diode Main Base Board Must Trip Amps LEN (Local Equipment Network) SIO (Sensor Input/Output) RESET BUTTON COMP A1/A2 MTA HEADER J5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 0 0 NOTES: 1.R080-178 and 30HXA. See Table 4 for CCP board connections. See Table 5 for DIP switch settings.R204-350 and 30HXA. ON = DISABLE. 2.R204-268 and 30HXA.ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection (CCP) Board — One CCP board controls up to 2 compressors. Switches 2. The red LED blinks continuously when the module is operating properly. For CCP1 (compressor A1 and B1). 3. 5.R281-350). The green LED blinks continuously when communicating properly with MBB.

the control reads the entering and leaving fluid temperatures. 2M. Any compressor operation in the reverse direction will result in a compressor failure that will require compressor replacement. the control starts (stops) a compressor when the ratio reaches + 100% (–100%). The CCP communicates on the LEN (Local Equipment Network) bus to the MBB. or from a network signal. the Wye-Delta option may be used. Loaders are allowed to cycle faster than compressors. A2. Demand Limit in effect. This can include being unoccupied. Do not alter the factory-installed power wiring from the control box terminal block to the compressor junction block. 5. CM. This option uses a factory-installed starter assembly for each compressor. The high-pressure switch is wired in series with the relay coils of the 8 relays on the CCP. The CCP communicates status of its inputs and outputs and reports 13 different alarm conditions to the MBB. Remote Contact/Off/Enable switch in the OFF position.A1. This value can be zero without the machine running in many situations. For example. 6. Position 12 in model number) are supplied with factoryinstalled Wye-Delta starters.B2 in the UNIT sub-mode. The XL starting method is the most cost effective and simply starts the compressor motor in a Delta configuration (the motors are designed for continuous operation in this configuration) using a single contactor. See Fig. 5. switching the compressor windings to a Delta wiring configuration. use the Navigator and the Configuration mode portion of Appendix A to locate the items CM. If this switch opens during operation. T055. or 8 at Capacity Control — The control system cycles compressors. The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The control determines the rate at which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based on these conditions. It can also be reset from an external 4 to 20 mA signal (requires optional EMM). the CCP module energizes contactors 1M and S. The machine should start normally once the time limit has expired. loaders. J11 DESCRIPTION 24-vac Power Input Compressor Contactor(s) High Pressure Switch. no call for cooling due to no load. and S. J8 J5. including reverse rotation protection. Where current limitations exist. Next. Doing so will cause permanent damage to the compressor and will require that the compressor be replaced. If the machine should be running and none of the above are true. The starting current required will be approximately 60% less than that required for an XL start due to the higher impedance of the motor windings when Wye connected. This ratio value ranges from –100 to + 100%. Press the ENTER and ESCAPE buttons on the Navigator simultaneously to expand the full meaning of the alert. Wye-Delta vs Across-the-Line (XL) Starting Option — All 30GXN. Each time it runs.R204-350 30HXA206-271 30HXC206-271 1 L L CCP1 2 3 OFF 0 OFF 0 4 0 0 1 — L CCP2 2 3 — — OFF 1 4 — 1 To verify proper must trip amps header configuration. The S and 2M contactors in the starter assembly are both mechanically and electrically interlocked so that they will not both be energized at the same time. which consists of 3 contactors labelled 1M. Do not attempt to bypass or alter any of the factory wiring.A2. This is the simplest starting method to use and is ideal where starting current does not require limiting. the Navigator will read: T055 CIRCUIT B. As the compressor is started. CM. Proper operation of the CCP board can be verified by observing the 2 LEDs located on the board. The CCP module has many features that are specifically designed to protect the compressor. Oil and Motor Cooling Solenoids Current Sensor Input Compressor Motor Temperature Input Communication Connections NOTE: Plugs J2-J5 are for compressors A1 (CCP1) or A2 (CCP2). T052. All other voltage options can be ordered with either Wye-Delta or XL starting options. 8 . The green LED blinks when the module is satisfactorily communicating with the MBB. COMPRESSOR 1 FAILURE-HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH TRIP. Table 5 — CCP Address DIP Switch Settings UNIT 30GXN. If the next stage of capacity is a compressor. If the values do not match those in Appendix A. Plugs J6-J9 are for compressor B1 (CCP1) or B2 (CCP2).R080-178 30HXA076-186 30HXC076-186 30GXN.R and 30HX chillers operating at voltages of 230-3-60. the control energizes (deenergizes) a loader when the ratio reaches + 60% (–60%). MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed in the Status subfunction and represents the amount of time to elapse before the unit is started. See Appendix A for correct settings. The compressor will attain about 100% of its normal operating speed (approximately 3 to 5 seconds) before the CCP module deenergizes the S contactor and energizes the 2M contactor. a minimum off time may be in effect. a capacity ratio (SMZ. verify that the configuration headers have been properly punched out. Outputs under Sub-mode GEN.Table 4 — ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection (CCP) Board Plug Connections CCP PLUG J1 J2. B1.B1 and CM. CCN not allowing unit to start. and alarm or alert conditions present. and minimum load control valves to maintain the user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature set point. to minimize the number of starts and stops on each compressor. all relays on the CCP are deenergized and the compressor is stopped. See Fig. B2 respectively). The red LED blinks at a rate of once every 1 to 2 seconds. which connects and energizes the motor windings in a Wye configuration. J7 J4. The failure is reported to the MBB and the processor module locks off the compressor from restarting until the alarm is manually reset. The chilled fluid temperature set point can be automatically reset by the return fluid temperature. Entering fluid temperature is used by the microprocessor to determine the temperature drop across the cooler and is used in determining the optimum time to add or subtract capacity stages. A delay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity step change. If the next stage of capacity is a loader. This indicates that the module is powered and operating correctly.O) is calculated using the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any changes to the current stages of capacity. space temperature or outdoor-air temperature reset features. 208/230-3-60 or 230-3-50 (4. The alert will be generated as T051. J6 J3. J9 J10. or T056 (for Compressors A1. The algorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired set point. The MBB will generate an alert when it receives an alarm input from the CCP.

the loaders in the circuit are deenergized for 15 seconds before the compressor is started. Whenever a compressor is started in a circuit. the following sequence list applies to capacity control. 3. 9 . LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION (LLCS. Changes to which circuit is the lead circuit and which is the lag are made when shutting off compressors.R204-350 units set for staged loading. this gives the user the ability to prevent all the units from restarting at once after a power failure. the control maintains nearly equal capacities in each circuit when the chiller is loading and unloading. the control is allowed to use any loading/capacity control devices required to maintain better leaving fluid temperature regulation. On 30HX206-271 and 30GXN. See Appendix B for an example. the circuit with the lowest hours is started first. 2. This control choice does NOT have any impact on machines with only 2 compressors. the control fully loads the lead circuit before starting the lag circuit and unloads the lag circuit first. The control determines the order in which the steps of capacity for each circuit are changed. The second unloading stage is only used during initial capacity staging of the unit at start-up. When these units are set for equal loading. under sub-mode OPT2) — This is configurable as equal circuit loading or staged circuit loading with the default set at staged. Typically. The value can be changed to Circuit A or Circuit B leading. as desired.HX compressor efficiency is greatest at full load. The loaders are energized 90 seconds after the compressor is started. For example. 1. Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT2) — This is a configurable choice and is factory set to be automatic. CAPACITY SEQUENCE DETERMINATION (LOAD. CLOSE CONTROL (CLS. Therefore. Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT2) — When configured for Close Control. Configuration mode. Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT2) — This user-configurable time period is used by the control to determine how long unit operation is delayed after power is applied/restored to the unit. A value of zero for this variable does not mean that the unit should be running. 5 — Across-the-Line (XL) Compressor Wiring TERMINAL BLOCK 1 21 2 22 3 23 L2 L3 L1 COMPRESSOR STARTER ASSEMBLY 1 T1 4 2 T2 3 T3 COMPRESSOR JUNCTION BOX 6 1M 1 6 21 L1 L2 L3 T1 2 22 23 4 2M T2 T3 3 L1 L2 L3 T1 5 S T2 T3 5 Fig.TERMINAL BLOCK 1 21 2 22 3 23 COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 1 L1 L2 L3 T1 2 T1 3 T3 COMPRESSOR JUNCTION BOX 1 2 3 5 6 4 JUMPER BARS Fig. 6 — Wye-Delta Compressor Wiring MINUTES OFF TIME (DELY. Set at automatic. LOADING SEQUENCE — The 30GXN.C.GXR. All stages of unloading are available. The next compressor is not started until all others are running at 100%. this time period is configured when multiple machines are located on a single site.

The lowest stage will not be removed. 8. 6. 3. Press ENTER followed by and ENTER again. Press ESCAPE until ‘Select a Menu Item’ is displayed. the control makes 2 comparisons before deciding to change stages of capacity. CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following overrides will modify the normal operation of the routine. and then (enter Password if required). If the unit is in a Cooling mode and configured for Ramp Loading. the control removes an amount greater than 25%. but no more than necessary. The Main Base Board (MBB) closely follows the rate of compressor cycling for each circuit. Slow Change Override — The control prevents the capacity stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature is close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and moving towards the set point. 3.GN. to illuminate the Configuration mode LED.0 for systems with small loop volumes.3° C). the control will modify the routine with a 1. test the operation of the relay and solenoid valve using the Service Test mode. and then 4.8° C) and decreasing. Configuration mode under sub-mode SLCT). Press ENTER and enter the Password (use arrow keys and press ENTER for each digit) if required. Use to change the flashing ‘No’ to ‘Yes’.0 to 4. Configuration mode under sub-mode SLCT) has a default value of 2. This value should be set in the range of 3. Figure 7 shows how compressor starts can be reduced over time if the leaving water temperature is allowed to drift a larger amount above and below the set point. if the difference between the cooler entering and leaving water temperature is 3° F with the valve deenergized.2° C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more than the configured Cooling Ramp Loading value (CRMP. Configuration mode under submode SLCT) — Limits the rate of change of leaving fluid temperature. When the valve is adjusted correctly. Record the cooler ∆T (the difference between cooler entering fluid temperature and cooler leaving fluid temperature) at this fully unloaded condition.8° C). then the difference between cooler entering and leaving water temperature must be at least 1. the first stage of capacity is altered by energizing the Minimum Load valve relay. First Stage Override — If the current capacity stage is zero. Press to select ‘COMP’ and press ENTER . Press ENTER and to select ‘OPT1’. the Minimum Load valve relay will be energized for the last stage of capacity to be used before the circuit is shut down. the minimum load valve is deenergized and normal capacity staging resumes with loaders and compressors. Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT1) — When this option is installed and configured. this factor is applied to the capacity Load/ Unload Factor. This override is ignored for the first 3 minutes after a compressor is started. Configure Unit for Minimum Load Control — The chiller must be configured for minimum load control operation. ENTER 5. Press 4. 10 . If the difference is greater than 4° F (2. For example. the circuit is unloaded every 30 seconds until the superheat is greater than 5° F (2.0 to 4.5° F with the valve energized. The range is from 1. Disable manual control and return chiller to desired operational status. the installation is complete. Low Discharge Superheat — If a circuit’s discharge superheat is less than 15° F (8. Test Minimum Load Relay Outputs — After the unit is configured. Use the Manual Control feature to enable the minimum load valve for the circuit that is operating. 7. Adjust the ball valve so that it is approximately half open. 4. the control will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being used. and ENTER again to turn Adjust Setting of Minimum Load Ball Valve — The minimum load ball valve must be adjusted to suit the application. If exactly 25% cannot be removed. Both circuits’ solenoids are turned on at the same time. Ramp Loading — (RL. Deadband Multiplier — The user configurable Deadband Multiplier (Z. the longer the control will delay between adding or removing stages of capacity. Calibrate one circuit at a time as follows: 1. and all compressor loaders deenergized. 2. The control calculates a temperature difference between the control point and leaving fluid temperature.0. Switch the EOR (Enable/Off/Remote Contact) switch to the “Enable” position. Press ENTER . Open the ball valve to decrease the temperature difference or close the ball valve to increase the temperature difference (∆T). Once the outputs have been tested and the ball valve adjusted. Press ESCAPE on the Navigator to display ‘Select a Menu Item’ and press to illuminate the Service Test LED. 1. Set the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch in the Off position. Press to select ‘MLV OFF’. 7. The final capacity stage is not unloaded unless an alarm condition exists. Press and the display says ‘MLV Yes’. Press 2.0. ENTER 3. the difference between cooler entering and leaving fluid temperatures when the minimum load control is energized must be at least half of the temperature difference when the minimum load control is deenergized. Once the control requires more capacity. If the discharge superheat is less than 5° F (2. to display ‘TEST ON’. The minimum load valve output will be turned on. Operate the chiller in Manual Control mode. followed by the valve output off.0. 5. with one circuit operating. Press to select ‘MLV’. Similarly. Observe and record the cooler ∆T with the minimum load valve energized.S. The larger this value is set. When set to other than 1. This may be done using the Navigator. 5. Adjust the minimum load ball valve until the cooler temperature difference reading from Step 5 is equal to half of the temperature difference reading from Step 3. This factor is also applied when the control is attempting to remove the last stage of capacity. the control does not increase the current capacity stage.2 factor on adding the first stage to reduce cycling. Press ENTER ENTER and ‘TEST OFF’ will be displayed. the control does not allow any changes to the current stage of capacity. 1. Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading — When the entering fluid temperature is below the control point. 2. Switch the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the ‘Off’ position. 6. ENTER The chiller is now configured for minimum load valve control.MINIMUM LOAD VALVE (MLVS.

These packages contain all the hardware required to install this accessory. the compressor is shut down and an alarm is generated. temperature switches. With Motormaster V Control — For low-ambient operation.1 C) for entering condenser water require the use of head pressure control. If this condition continues for a total of 3 minutes. [the Brine Freeze Point minus 6° F (3. 163-350 units. Failure to set the Brine Freeze Point correctly will cause improper unit operation. BR. the unit capacity will not increase. 075. MOP (Maximum Operating Pressure) Override — The control monitors saturated condensing and suction temperature for each circuit as well as differential oil pressure. For Brine applications. each circuit’s fan stages are independently controlled based on the circuit Saturated Condensing Temperature. If the saturated condensing temperature rises to more than 5° F (2. Integral. The default for the Brine Freeze Point is 34 F (1. Water cooled units (30HXC) operating at less than 70 F (21. The chiller must be field configured for the options shown in Table 6.7 C) for 30HXA. For the 30GXN. Once a fan stage has been added. 9A for operational information. The 30HXA condenserless units with a 09DK condenser use a combination of factory-supplied . and 122 F (50 C) for 30HXC units. Fan stage settings are shown in Table 7. 076 for a dual controller package (30GXN.8° C) above the maximum condensing temperature during the 60 seconds. AIR-COOLED UNITS (30GXN. Based on a configurable maximum operating set point (saturated suction temperature). the control may reduce the number of capacity stages being used and/or may lower the EXD position when system pressures approach the set parameters. for 90 seconds. all loaders in the circuit are turned off.3° C) as the point to compare with the Saturated Suction Temperature.7° C) below the maximum condensing temperature. Refer to Table 8 for condenser fan control information. The control will use the Brine Freeze Point value minus 6° F (3. The control uses the higher of the 2 Saturated Condensing Temperature values for 30GXN. A fan stage will be removed when the Saturated Condensing Temperature has been less than the Head Pressure Set Point minus 35° F (19.8 C) for 30GXN. 152 F (66. 073 for a single controller package (30GXN. With the Variable Head Pressure Select option set to 1 (4 to 20 mA). 8 for condenser fan locations. Without Motormaster V Control — The first stage of fans are turned on based on compressor status or a Head Pressure Set Point based on Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT).DEADBAND EXAMPLE 47 8 46 45 2 STARTS LWT (C) LWT (F) 7 44 43 42 6 5 41 0 200 400 600 800 1000 3 STARTS TIME (SECONDS) STANDARD DEADBAND MODIFIED DEADBAND LEGEND LWT — Leaving Water Temperature Fig. order by part number 30GX-900---071. if the Saturated Suction temperature falls below 34 F (1. 9B for operational information. For water [brine] circuits. Head Pressure set point. To obtain this accessory for field installation. the lead fan in each circuit can be equipped with the optional or accessory Motormaster head pressure controller. If all the loaders were already off. Proportional. Additional fan stages are added when the SCT exceeds the Head Pressure Set Point. the circuit will alarm and shut down.R) to maintain the saturated condensing temperature to a configurable set point.1 C). If the saturated condensing temperature is more than 2° F (1.R) — See Fig.R080-160). Order part number 30GX-900---074.3° C)]. and minimum differential oil pressure. 163-350). The default is 113 F (45 C). If a circuit’s saturated condensing temperature is more than 12° F (6. See Fig.R080-160 units. which means the control will use 28 F (–2. the controller will be configured for 4 to 20 mA control. the software temporarily modifies the head pressure set point by adding 15° F (8. Loaders will be cycled as needed to control the saturated condensing temperature below the configured maximum condensing temperature.R153. 072. the Brine Freeze Point (Configuration Mode.R) or water valve controlled (30HXC) based on each circuit’s saturated condensing temperature and compressor status. and an accessory Motormaster® control to maintain head pressure independent of 30HXA unit control. and Derivative gain parameters for air-cooled controls are adjustable and can be found in the SERV sub-mode under the Configuration mode. SERV sub-mode.3° C) for 35 seconds. The Brine Freeze Point is adjustable from –20 F to 34 F (–29 C to 1.1° C) above the maximum condensing temperature for 60 seconds.1 C). Only certified Carrier Comfort Network technicians should perform checkout and adjustment of the PID loop.R153. and a PID (proportional integral derivative) loop calculation. If the Saturated Suction temperature falls below 28 F (–2. The fans are staged or speed varied (30GXN.2 C) as the freeze point. 11 Head Pressure Control GENERAL — The microprocessor controls the condenser fans (30GXN. 7 — Deadband Multiplier Low Saturated Suction Temperature — To avoid freezing the cooler.R.4° C) for 2 minutes. a loader is turned off. High Condensing Temperature Unloading — Every 10 seconds the control checks for the conditions below.FZ) must be configured for the freeze point of the brine solution. the control will compare the circuit Saturated Suction temperature with a predetermined freeze point.2 C). This 4 to 20 mA output is driven through the SCB. the MBB module calculates the required output based on Saturated Condensing temperature. See Fig. a loader is turned off immediately. the circuit capacity is not allowed to increase. set maximum condensing temperature. The Head Pressure Set Point is configurable in the Set Point sub-mode. Configured maximums are 154 F (67. If factory installed.1 C) [the Brine Freeze Point]. fan cycling pressure switches (shipped in the 30HXA control box).

Refer to Table 9 for condenser fan staging information. Do not modify) 0=None 1 = 4 to 20 mA (*2 to 10 vdc) 2 = 0 to 20 mA (*0 to 10 vdc) 3 = 20 to 0 mA (*10 to 0 vdc) No Control Air Cooled (30HXA Default) Common Condenser Independent Condenser 0=None 1 = 4 to 20 mA (*2 to 10 vdc) 2 = 0 to 20 mA (*0 to 10 vdc) 3 = 20 to 0 mA (*10 to 0 vdc) 30GX 30HXC Head Pressure Control Type Method of controlling head pressure Variable Head Pressure Method of controlling variable head Select pressure Head Pressure Control Type Method of controlling head pressure HPCT VHPT HPCT 30HXA Variable Head Pressure Select Method of controlling variable head pressure VHPT *A vdc signal can be generated by installing a 500-ohm 1/2-watt resistor across the 2 output terminals of the mA signal. Integral and Derivative gain parameters for the water-cooled controls are adjustable and can be found in the SERV sub-mode under the Configuration mode. The 30HXA chillers also support the use of a 4 to 20 mA (2 to 10 vdc). 3 (Common Condenser). each circuit’s fan stages are independently controlled based on the circuit's Saturated Condensing Temperature. Proportional.) Set to 4 to 20 mA if Motormaster accessory is installed.R153.R080-160 units. 2 (0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 vdc). temperature switches (09DK044. Do not modify) See Table 7 0 = None (Default) 1 = 4 to 20 mA (Default if Motormaster FIOP is installed. terminals 14 and 15 for circuit A. Set this configuration (VHPT. The remote condenser fans are controlled by 2 relay outputs. A 0 to 20 mA (0 to 10 vdc) or 20 to 0 mA (10 to 0 vdc) can also be configured. The Head Pressure Control Type (HPCT under sub-mode OPT1) may be set to control various types of head pressure control devices. and Condenser Pump control must be set to 0 (CNPC must be set to No control. WATER-COOLED UNITS (30HXC) — The 30HXC chiller can be configured to control direct acting water valves that are controlled by a 4 to 20 mA (2 to 10 vdc) signal. The Motormaster V control also requires a temperature sensor input or the 4 to 20 mA output signal from the Comfortlink™ control system. Unit Type (TYPE. 1 (Air Cooled).S VHPT FACTORY CONFIGURATION Air Cooled (30GX Default. Signal connections are made at terminal block TB2. the signal connections are made at terminal block TB2. configuration mode under sub-mode OPT1) to 1 (4 to 20 mA or 2 to 10 vdc). The Head Pressure Control Type (HPCT under sub-mode OPT1) must be configured to 1 (aircooled). 12 . HPCT may be set to 0 (No Control). These connections are in the 30HXA control box. To set the 30HXA control for this configuration. The control scheme reads the saturated condensing temperature and uses a PID (proportional integral derivative) loop to control the head pressure. Installing a 500-ohm 1/2 watt resistor across the 2 output terminals of the mA signal enables the use of the vdc signal. or 3 (20 to 0 mA or 10 to 0 vdc) as desired depending on valve type. Configuration mode under sub-mode UNIT) must be configured to 3 (Split System). and terminals 12 and 13 for circuit B. Low ambient head pressure control can be accomplished with fan cycling pressure switches (09DK054-094). Water Cooled (30HXC Default. For common output applications (single output for both circuits).The control will use the higher of the 2 Saturated Condensing Temperature values for 30GXN. Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT1). For the 30GXN. terminals 14 and 15. Set this configuration (VHPT. the signal connections are made at terminal block TB2. Only certified Carrier Comfort Network technicians should perform checkout and adjustment of the PID loop. terminals 14 and 15. For independent (one output for each circuit) applications. or 20 to 0 mA (10 to 0 vdc) for fan speed control. The Motormaster control requires a temperature sensor input to control condenser fan cycling. 074-094). and Motormaster® control. CONDENSERLESS UNITS (30HXA) — The 30HXA unit is often applied with an 09DK air-cooled condenser. Installing a 500-ohm 1/2 watt resistor across the 2 output terminals of the mA signal enables the use of the vdc signal. See Field Wiring section on page 72 for wiring details. 163-350 units. The 30HXA control must be configured to turn the 09DK fans on and/or off. Table 6 — Field Configured Head Pressure Control Options UNIT CONFIGURATION OPTION DESCRIPTION Head Pressure Control Type Method of controlling head pressure Fan Staging Select Method of controlling fan staging Variable Head Pressure Method of controlling variable head Select pressure POINT NAME HPCT FAN. or 4 (Independent Condenser). 0 to 20 mA (0 to 10 vdc). configuration mode under sub-mode OPT1) to 1 (4 to 20 mA or 2 to 10 vdc). or 3 (20 to 0 mA or 10 to 0 vdc) as desired depending on control type. 2 (0 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 vdc). See accessory installation instructions for further information.

128. 281-350* 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 CONTROL BOX END 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 30GXN.225* 163.R163. 150.174. 093. 108. 125. compressor status 2nd.138.R118.281-350* COMPUTER SOFTWARE DISPLAY 6 7 8 4 2 5 3 NAVIGATOR DISPLAY (1 STAGE COM) (2 STAGE COM) (3 STAGE COM) (A2B1 IND) (2 STAGE IND) (A3B2 IND) (3 STAGE IND) DESCRIPTION 1st stage compressor status and SCT set point 2nd stage common control based on highest SCT 1st stage compressor status and SCT set point 2nd and 3rd stage common control based on highest SCT 1st stage compressor status and SCT set point 2nd through 4th stage common control based on highest SCT 1st stage each circuit.093.268. 8 — 30GX Condenser Fan Locations 13 . 106.R083.R208.106. 228* 8 6 4 2 CONTROL BOX END 11 9 7 5 3 1 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 *And associated modular sizes. 135* 4 6 2 30GXN. 3rd and 4th stage Circuit A independent 1st stage each circuit.108.R249.228 253. 3rd and 4th stage each circuit independent LEGEND SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature *And associated modular sizes.160* 153.125. compressor status 2nd and 3rd stage each circuit independent 1st stage each circuit. 204. 30GXN.R253.R153. 160* 4 6 8 1 3 1 3 5 1 3 5 7 30GXN. 090* 4 2 CONTROL BOX END CONTROL BOX END CONTROL BOX END 2 30GXN.R) Units UNIT 30GXN.R080. Fig. 114.264* 208. 114. 264* 3 5 7 9 11 CONTROL BOX END 9 7 5 3 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 30GXN. 128. 174. 268. 150.R 080.178* 249.Table 7 — Fan Staging Select Configuration Settings for Air Cooled (30GXN. compressor status 2nd stage Circuit B independent 2nd. compressor status 2nd stage Circuit B independent 2nd and 3rd stage Circuit A independent 1st stage each circuit.090* 083. 204. 178* 12 10 8 6 4 2 CONTROL BOX END 14 12 10 30GXN. 225* 10 8 6 4 2 CONTROL BOX END 1 30GXN. 138.135* 118.

CSP2 used when switch input is closed.30GXN.CSP1 ON.CSP2 4 to 20 mA† ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON *Dual set point switch input used. DOES OUTPUT REQUIRE MORE FANS? READ CIRCUIT SATURATED CONDENSING TEMPERATURE AND CURRENT FAN STAGE NO NO DOES PID OUTPUT REQUIRE LESS FANS? NO YES YES INCREASE CURRENT FAN STAGE BY ONE INCREASE CURRENT FAN STAGE BY ONE DECREASE CURRENT FAN STAGE BY ONE OUTPUT NEW mA SIGNAL TO CONTROLLER Fig. 7 day Dual.R Units Head Pressure Control Without Motormaster® V Control 30GXN.R UNITS — MOTORMASTER V CONTROL NOT INSTALLED LEGEND SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature Fig. 9B — 30GXN.CSP2 ON* Illegal Illegal OFF Illegal Illegal ON* Illegal Illegal OFF Illegal Illegal ON* ON. CCN Occ ON* ON.R UNITS — MOTORMASTER V CONTROL INSTALLED IS SCT GREATER THAN HEAD PRESSURE SET POINT PLUS 15°F (8.CSP1 ON.CSP1 OFF ON.CSP2 ON.CSP1 ON.CSP1 OFF ON.CSP1 COOLING SET POINT SELECT (CLSP) Dual.3°C)? YES CALCULATE NEW PID VALUE.CSP1 ON* ON. †Cooling set point determined from 4 to 20 mA input to Energy Management Module (EMM) to terminals TB6-3.CSP2 ON.R Units Head Pressure Control With Motormaster V Control Table 8 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points CONTROL TYPE (CTRL) Switch 7 Day Occ Occupancy CCN OCCUPANCY STATE Occupied Unoccupied Occupied Unoccupied Occupied Unoccupied Occupied Unoccupied Single ON. CSP1 used when switch input is open. Switch Dual.CSP1 ON.CSP1 ON* ON.CSP1 ON. 14 .5. 9A — 30GXN.

3A FC-4. 10 11. 2A FC-3 FC-4. 8 9. 6 7. 10 11. 4 5. 2 3. B1 contactor* Fan 2 Fan 1 Comp. 8A FANS CONTROLLED 1. 8 1. 1A FC-2. 138. 135 High Static NAVIGATOR OUTPUT POINT NAME Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 3 Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 3 Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 3 Fan 3 Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 3 Fan 3 Comp. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 3 Fan 3 FAN CONTACTOR FC-1 FC-2 FC-1. B1 contactor* Fan 2 Fan 3 Comp. 3A FC-4. 2A FC-1 FC-2 FC-3 FC-1. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 3 Fan 3 Comp. 5A FC-6. 12 13. 8 for condenser fan locations when viewing from the control box end. 10 1. 6 7. 4 3 5. 160 High Static Standard 153. 4A FC-1 FC-2 FC-3 FC-4 FC-5 FC-1. 4 1. 8 9. 12 1. 15 . 125. 5A FC-1 FC-2 FC-3 FC-4 FC-5 FC-6 FC-1. B1 contactor* Fan 2 Fan 4 Comp. 2 3. 8 9. 4 1. 6 7. 2 3. 10 11. 128. 2A FC-3. 4A FC-5. 6 1. fan relays Fan 1 and Fan 3 energize Circuit A fans. 1A FC-2. 12 1. 174. 4A FC-5. 178 High Static Standard 249. 2 3. 6A FC-1 FC-2 FC-3 FC-4 FC-5 FC-6 FC-7 FC-8 FC-1 FC-2. 106-114.R153. 2 3. 10 11. 2A FC-3. 6 7. 1A FC-2. NOTE: For 30GXN. 8 9. 4 5. Fan relays Fan 2 and Fan 4 energize Circuit B fans. 4 3 5. 2 3. 7A FC-8. 2A FC-3. 1A FC-2. A1 contactor* Fan 1 Fan 3 Comp. 3A FC-1 FC-2 FC-3 FC-4 FC-1. 090 High Static Standard 083. 163-350 units. 2 3. 8 9.R UNIT SIZE FAN TYPE Standard 080. 6A FC-7. 7 6. 3A FC-4. 8 1. 14 Standard 118. 2 3. 4 5. 2 3. 4 5. 4 5. B1 contactor* Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 4 Fan 3 Comp. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 3 Fan 3 Comp. 12 13. A1 contactor* Fan 1 Fan 3 Comp.Table 9 — 30GXN. 8 9. 3A FC-4. 6A FC-1 FC-2 FC-3 FC-4 FC-5 FC-6 FC-1. 10 11. 6 7. B1 contactor* Fan 2 Fan 4 Comp. 4A FC-5. 6 1. 204. 6 7. 1A FC-2. 6 7. 228 High Static Comp. 8 9. B1 contactor* Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 4 Fan 3 Comp. 4 5. B1 contactor* Fan 2 Fan 1 Comp. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 3 Fan 3 Comp. 4 5. 14 1 2. 2A FC-3. 5A FC-6. 4 5. 4 5. 1A FC-2. 4 5. FC LEGEND — Compressor — Fan Contactor *Proper rotation of these fans to be checked when compressor(s) is running. 150. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 1 Comp. 12 1. 2 3. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 1 Comp. 4A FC-5.R080-350 Condenser Fan Staging (Main Base Board Controlled) 30GXN. 225 High Static Standard 163. 8 9. 10 1. B1 contactor* Fan 2 Fan 3 Comp. 7 6. 5A FC-6. 2 3. 6 7. 10 11. 093. 2 3. 264 High Static Standard 208. 2A FC-3. 12 1 2. See Fig.

7 C) Between 55 and 65 F (12. 4A FC-5. If pressure is rising between 97 psig (669 kPa) and 185 psig (1276 kPa). A drop in entering outdoor-air temperature results in a lower saturated condensing temperature. Head pressure can also be controlled by fan cycling controls supplemented by the accessory Motormaster® V solid-state head pressure control.14 15.7 C) Between 70 and 80 F (21. 1 is non-cycling. 16 . fans 3 and 4 are controlled by using a fan cycling pressure switch on each of the primary coil circuits in response to condensing pressure. 163-350 units.16 Standard 253.7 ± 1.14 15. See Motormaster V installation instructions for more information. Fan number 2 and 3 cycling is controlled by outdoor-air temperature through air temperature switches (ATS) 1 and 2.6 7.4 5.7 C) Between 70 and 80 F (21.4 3 5.3 C) and temperature falling Below 55 ± 3 F (12.3 C) and temperature rising Above 80 ± 3 F (26.7 C) Between 55 and 65 F (12.8 9.R153.10 11.16 1 2. B1 contactor* Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 4 Fan 3 Comp.12 13.Table 9 — 30GXN. When outdoor-air temperature drops below the minimum temperature for standard units. additional head pressure control is required.8 9. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 3 Fan 3 Comp.1 and 26. 8A FANS CONTROLLED 1 2. B1/B2 contactor* Fan 2 Fan 4 Fan 4 Fan 1 Comp.10 11. 5A FC-6. 5A FC-6.3 ± 1. Fan cycling switches must be replaced with the switches supplied in the control box of the 30HXA chiller. See Fig. 09DK AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS 09DK044 Units — The 09DK044 units have accessory provision for fully automatic intermediate-season head pressure control through condenser fan cycling. In the standard control scheme. The fan cycling pressure switch controls the fans as follows: Fans 3 and 4 are on above 185 ± 10 psig (1276 ± 69 kPa) and off below 97 ± 10 psig (669 ± 69 kPa).12 13.2 3. B1 contactor* Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 4 Fan 3 Comp. 8A FC-9. On 054 and 064 units.8 9. 7A FC-8. fans 1 and 2 are on when there is a call for cooling from the respective coil circuits. 7A FC-8.6 7. The sensing element is exposed to air entering the no.8 ± 1. The air temperature switch controls the fans as shown in Table 10. 6A FC-7. fan relays Fan 1 and Fan 3 energize Circuit A fans.R UNIT SIZE FAN TYPE NAVIGATOR OUTPUT POINT NAME Comp. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 3 Fan 3 Fan 1 Comp. Fans 1 and 2 are non-cycling.16 1. Table 10 — Air Temperature Switch Control (09DK044 Units) FAN FAN SWITCH ON FAN 2 OFF TEMPERATURE Above 65 ± 3 F (18. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 3 Fan 3 FAN CONTACTOR FC-1 FC-2 FC-3 FC-4 FC-5 FC-6 FC-7 FC-8 FC-9 FC-1 FC-2. fans 3 and 4 are off. Fan no. 6A FC-7.14 15. — Compressor FC — Fan Contactor *Proper rotation of these fans to be checked when compressor(s) is running.7 C) and temperature falling Below 70 ± 3 F (21. Fan relays Fan 2 and Fan 4 energize Circuit B fans. 9A FC-1 FC-2 FC-3 FC-4 FC-5 FC-6 FC-7 FC-8 FC-1.8 and 18.1 ± 1. The air temperature switches are located in the lower divider panel underneath the coil header. 4A FC-5. 2A FC-3. 8 for condenser fan locations when viewing from the control box end.8 and 18.12 13. 3A FC-4. B1/B2 contactor* Fan 2 Fan 4 Fan 4 Fan 1 Comp.10 11.16 1.7 6. 268 High Static Standard 281-350 High Static LEGEND Comp.7 C) and temperature rising ON FAN 3 OFF 09DK054-094 — The capacity of an air-cooled condenser increases with increased temperature difference (defined as saturated condensing temperature minus entering outdoor-air temperature) and decreases with decreased temperature difference.14 15. 1 fan compartment through a hole in the panel.4 5.1 and 26.12 13.4 3 5. A1/A2 contactor* Fan 3 Fan 3 Fan 1 Comp.10 11. Standard head pressure controls regulate the 100 and 50/50% condenser capacity applications. If pressure is falling from 185 psig (1276 kPa) to 97 psig (669 kPa) fans 3 and 4 are on. NOTE: For 30GXN.R080-350 Condenser Fan Staging (Main Base Board Controlled) (cont) 30GXN.2 3.7 6. 1A FC-2.8 9. 2A FC-3 FC-4. Model 09DK units have fully automatic intermediateseason head pressure control through condenser fan cycling using electromechanical fan cycling controls.

1) when the Dual Setpoint switch contacts are open and Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP. Follow the instructions under Tuning Control loops.PGN. The control calculates a new fan speed (30GXN. using R-134a refrigerant. Inputs for a cooler pump interlock and condenser flow switch or interlock are provided. 4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Unit operation is based on an external 4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module (EMM). It is also recommended that the chiller be interlocked with the chiller water pump starter to provide additional protection.1 ± 1. Gain defaults values are located in the SERV sub-mode under the Configuration mode (items H. 09AZ AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS — The 09AZV091182 units are designed to operate specifically with 30HXA chillers. Table 8 illustrates how the control method and cooling setpoint select variables direct the operation of the chiller and the set point to which it controls. Configuration Mode/ sub-mode OPT1) — Proper configuration of the cooler pump control is required to prevent possible cooler freeze-up. H. Ice Mode — When Ice Mode is enabled Cooling Setpoint Select must be set to Dual Switch. for example).” It is recommended for all chillers that the cooler pump control be utilized unless the chilled water pump runs continuously or the chilled water system contains a suitable antifreeze solution. Optional variable speed control will ramp direct fan motor speed for improved low ambient performance. The default for the derivative term is zero.1) during the Occupied mode and Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP. OCCUPANCY — Unit is started and stopped in accordance with the local occupancy schedule accessible only from CCN.7 C) fans 5 and 6 are on.7 C) outdoor ambient. fans 5 and 6 are off.1) during the occupied mode and Cool Setpoint 2 (CSP. keep the integral term positive and as low as possible. To minimize hunting. increase the proportional term. If the temperature is rising from 70 F (21. The factory default setting for cooler pump control is “OFF. when ordered with fan head pressure control are furnished with the number 1 condenser motor as a single-phase motor for use with head pressure control. Fan cycling pressure switches that are compatible with R-134a refrigerant pressures are shipped with the 30HXA chillers. above 80 ± 3 F (26. The optional factory-mounted motor head pressure control contains a fan head pressure control device activated by a pressure sensor. DUAL CCN OCCUPIED — Unit operation is based on Cooling Setpoint 1 (CSP. Control method must be configured for Switch.7 C) to 70 F (21. The illustration also shows the ON/OFF state of the machine for the given combinations.2) during the unoccupied mode as configured under Time Clock mode.DGN). When the routine is making too great a change to valve position or fan speed.7 C). 7-DAY SCHEDULE — Unit is started and stopped in accordance with the schedule configured under Time Clock mode. Ice Setpoint (CSP. These 3 set points can be utilized to develop your specific control strategy. Field adjust 09AZ switch settings as follows: PRESSURE Cut in 175 psi Cut out 145 psi AMBIENT Cut in 70 F Cut out 60 F REMOTE position. whether fans 5 and 6 are on or off depends on whether temperature is rising or falling. The value should not need to be changed. Unit operation is based on Cooling Setpoint 1 (CSP. If the temperature is falling from 80 F (26. A cooler flow switch is factory installed to prevent operation without flow through the cooler. 6 refrigerant pressure and 4 ambient temperature controlled fans. The unit can be enabled and disabled by this action or all control methods. Cooling Set Point Select SINGLE — Unit operation is based on Cooling Setpoint 1 (CSP1). below 70 ± 3 F (21. DUAL SWITCH — Unit operation is based on Cooling Setpoint 1 (CSP.3) during the Unoccupied mode with the Ice Done contacts open and Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP. For more information on tuning PID loops. Control method must be configured for Switch.1 C) to 80 F (26. Schedule Number in Table SCHEDOVR must be configured to 1 to utilize the local occupancy schedule. Units with 10 fans have 2 direct controlled (applied to optional variable speed).R and 30HX chillers can be configured for cooler and condenser (30HXC) pump control. fans 5 and 6 are off.2) during the Unoccupied mode with the Ice Done contacts closed. If the Schedule Number is set to 0 the unit will operate in a continuous 24-hr Occupied mode. COOLER PUMP CONTROL (CPC. The kit controls condenser-fan motor speed in response to the saturated condensing pressure.7 ± 1. ADJUSTING PID ROUTINES — The 30GXN.2) during the Unoccupied mode as configured under the local occupancy schedule accessible only from CCN. The air temperature switch controls the fans as follows: On the 074-094 condensers. fans 5 and 6 are on. 4 refrigerant pressure and 2 ambient temperature controlled fans.IGN and H. 4 refrigerant pressure and 4 ambient temperature controlled fans. DUAL 7 DAY — Unit operation is based on Cooling Setpoint 1 (CSP. or 65-99 to utilize a global schedule. OPERATION SEQUENCE — All condenser fans are allowed to operate once a call for cooling comes from the chiller. See page 72 of the Field Wiring section for proper connection of the cooler pump interlock. VARIABLE SPEED FAN CONTROL — All units. This schedule can be configured from the Navigator or from CCN. If the Schedule Number is set to 0 the unit will operate in a continuous 24-hr Occupied mode. CCN — Unit is started and stopped by communication over the CCN bus. Direct fans will operate while refrigerant pressure and ambient temperature control fans maintain refrigerant head pressure based on existing refrigerant pressure and ambient temperature conditions. The CHIL_S_S point in the A_UNIT table is provided for this purpose.1 C) and 80 F (26.1 C). 30HXA and 30HXC head pressure control routines use PID (proportional integral derivative) loops to maintain a user-configurable head pressure set point. Dual 7 day or Dual CCN Occupied and the Energy Management Module (EMM) must be installed.The 09DK054-094 condensers are supplied with fan cycling pressure switches suitable for use with R-22 refrigerant.2) when they are closed. consult the Comfort Controller Installation manual.1) during the Occupied mode. Units with 12 fans have 2 direct controlled (applied to optional variable speed). Cooler and Condenser (30HXC) Pump Control — The 30GXN.” which is common in master/submaster control schemes. These fan cycling pressure switches must be installed in place of the 09DK factory-installed switches before charging to ensure proper head pressure control. This value is used to control “droop.R. catalog number 808-890. Between 70 F (21.7 C). Units with 8 fans have 2 direct controlled (applied to optional variable speed). 17 Control Methods SWITCH — Unit is started and stopped manually by switching the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch from OFF to ENABLE or by external contacts with the switch in the .R) or water valve position (30HXC) every 5 seconds based on these gain values and an error term equal to saturated condensing temperature minus head pressure set point. Schedule Number in Table SCHEDOVR must be configured to 1. If the control routine is not responding fast enough to large changes (circuit starting. decrease the proportional term.

FZ Brine Freeze Point (Configuration Mode. The number of heaters depends on the size of the machine. Cooler flow must be established in order to de-energize the cooler heaters. Sub-mode SERV). If cooler pump control is turned “OFF” or “ON” and the chilled water flow switch/interlock does not close within 5 minutes after the unit is enabled and in an “ON” mode.” the cooler pump relay will be energized when the chiller enters an “ON” mode (i. BRN. ON TIME. A red LED can also indicate inoperative pump(s). or within one minute after the condenser pump relay is energized when configured “ON”. Heaters turn on when DGT < 95 F (35 C) and turn off when DGT > 100 F (37. In addition. Alarm A159 is also generated if the flow switch/interlock opens for more than 10 seconds during chiller operation. A condenser water flow switch must be installed and wired to TB2 terminals 5 and 6.I set to “ON”). Alarm A201 will be generated whenever the cooler pump interlock is open for at least 10 seconds during chiller operation. The condenser pump output remains energized for 30 minutes after the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch is placed in the “OFF” position or the Remote Contacts are opened allowing refrigerant pressure equalization. Proper operation of this sensor/switch is necessary to allow the unit to operate and provide running freeze protection for the unit. one red LED will illuminate. When the first green LED is illuminated. Various conditions can cause variations in flow and allow the switch to open and cause a “nuisance trip”. will energize the condenser pump output when the first compressor is started and deenergize the output 30 seconds after the last compressor stops. the switch is closed and the unit will start and run.8 C) and compressors are off. CONDENSER PUMP CONTROL (CNP. The heater is deenergized if the oil level switch is open. Press the ESCAPE key until ‘Select a Menu Item’ is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys when the display says ‘Select a Menu Item’ (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator to its default menu of rotating display items (those items in the VIEW sub-mode under the Run Status mode). items and their values can be displayed. Greater constant flow will help reduce nuisance tips. ON CCN).R Units Only) — Standard feature that controls oil temperature based on the discharge gas temperature (DGT) thermistor. Liquid line solenoids are included as part of the Brine FIOP. When power is supplied to the switch. This will energize liquid line solenoid valves on brine units when the condenser pump is “ON” and when the compressors are “OFF”. alarm A200 will be generated. If after 15 minutes of operation. Oil Heater Control (30GXN. the heaters will stay on. an alarm A159 is generated if the input does not close within one minute after the machine enters an “ON” mode. and the unit has been off for more than 30 seconds. If cooler pump control is turned “ON” and the chilled water flow switch/interlock is closed when the unit is enabled and enters an “ON” mode alarm A202 will be generated. the Cooler Pump will be commanded ON in attempt to increase the water temperature. (CNPC set to “ON WHEN OCCUPIED”) the pump can be controlled like the cooler pump. To reduce the possibility of condenser freeze-up the cooler pump must be stopped or isolation valve closed in the event of loss of condenser water flow. and an ENTER key.FZ + 3 ºF (1. the 18 Flow Sensor — The factory-installed flow sensor/switch should not require adjustment. It is turned on whenever the machine is in an “ON” mode and turned off 30 seconds after all compressors stop and the machine is in an “OFF” mode. The cooler heater will be energized if the unit is OFF (no mechanical cooling) and either of the following two conditions has been met: • The Saturated Suction Temperature in either circuit is less than BR.When the cooler pump control is “ON.9 ºC).. the cooler pump relay will be energized whether cooler pump control is configured “ON” or “OFF. 30HXC brine applications below 32 F (0° C) leaving brine temperature require cooler pump control. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler and use Appendix E to determine the cooler flow rate then determine if the flow rate is adequate for the application. The cooler pump relay will remain energized for 30 seconds after all compressors stop due to off command. In the event a freeze protection alarm is generated. Configuration Mode/sub-mode OPT1) — Factory defaults for both condenser pump control and condenser flow switch are set to “NO CONTROL” and “OFF. When there is chilled water flow. Cooler Heater Control — Factory-installed cooler heaters can be ordered for the 30GXN. The heaters will remain on until both Entering and Leaving Water Temperatures equal or exceed 120 ºF (48. but the flow is inadequate to close the switch and allow unit operation. The cooler heaters will be deenergized if the unit is ON (mechanical cooling is ON) or if the Saturated Suction Temperature for both circuits is greater than BR.3 ºC).FZ + 10 ºF (5. See Table 11. • Entering or Leaving Water Temperature is less than BR. the Saturated Suction Temperature for both circuits is not greater than BR. Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously will put the Navigator into expanded text mode where full meaning of all sub-modes. • If the Entering or Leaving Water Thermistor has failed.R chillers.L (Configuration Mode. The heaters will energize again when both water temperatures are below 110 ºF (43. . an ESCAPE key. the amber LED in the center of the display will be illuminated.7 ºC). These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display structure. ON LOCAL. The control system operates the heaters in response to the saturated suction temperature of each circuits as well as Entering and Leaving Water Temperature. The cooler pump relay should be used as an override to the external pump control if cooler pump control is not utilized.6 ºC). closed valve. The display has up and down arrow keys.” The cooler pump relay is also energized anytime a compressor is started as well as when certain alarms are generated. When configured for a condenser flow switch/interlock (CNP. A green LED does not mean minimum flow requirements have been met.I AND CNPC.e. The condenser pump can be controlled in one of two ways: In the first method. Navigator Display Module Usage (See Fig. 10 and Tables 11-24B) — The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the ComfortLink™ control system. sub-mode SLCT) must be configured to YES if Brine FIOP is installed. 30HXC brine applications below 32 F (0° C) leaving brine temperature require condenser pump control to be configured to “ON WHEN OCCUPIED” and condenser pump interlock to be “ON”.6 ºC) for at least 10 minutes.” respectively.FZ + 10 ºF (5. The second method (CNPC set to “ON WITH COMPRESSORS”). IMPORTANT: If the cooler pump control relay output is not wired to control or override the operation of the chilled water pump an OFF DELAY of 10 minutes must be provided after the chiller is disabled to maintain cooler water flow during the pump down period. clogged strainer or air in the system.

minimum load valve and oil heaters can be tested with compressors on or off. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state of a item and press the ENTER key to accept it. 2222. Sub-mode DISP).R units with Motormaster® control. Note that condenser-fan motors are NOT started during VH. Service Password (Configuration Mode. Use the ENTER and arrow keys to enter the 4 digits of the password. The relays under the COMP sub-mode will stay on for 10 minutes if there is no keypad activity. Press the ESCAPE key to exit out of the expanded text mode. Test the expansion valves. 11. Sub-mode UNIT) and SPT Space Temperature (Temperature Mode. Switch the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable position. To access the Service Test mode. The password has been changed. The STAT item (Run Status mode under sub-mode VIEW) will display ‘SERVICE TEST’ as long as the Service mode is enabled.PB test on 30GXN. a flashing “f” will appear next to the value indicating a forced value. Change PAS. fans.PA or VH. circuit or motor off if necessary. Sub-mode UNIT) can be forced to a value at the Navigator. Any other mode or sub-mode can be viewed or changed during the TEST mode. 4. select the item and press the ENTER key so that the value is flashing. All compressor outputs can be turned on. Compressors will stay on until they are turned off by the operator. For example. NOTE: When the LANG variable is changed. the other as the slave chiller. 19 . Compressor loaders. The password can be changed utilizing the Navigator or through CCN devices such as ComfortWORKS®. Use the display keys to enter the Service Test mode and display ‘TEST OFF’. and change the value to ENBL. For parallel flow applications. Press the ENTER key and ‘Off’ will flash (Enter the password if required). and change the password to the desired value. If the password is required.0 °F MO Run Servi Temp Pres DE Al ar m St atu s Statu s ce Te st eratur es sures Setpo ints Inputs Outpu ts Two items. loaders. Sub-mode DISP) to DSBL. For series fluid flow. Press the up and down arrow keys simultaneously and the force will be removed. the value will appear near the middle of the display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the display. remote alarm relay. ComfortVIEW™ and Service Tool. The TEST sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chiller can be switched to Enable or Remote contact for normal operation. See Fig.6 °F 44. The default password is 1111. Repeat the process as required for other items. See Tables 12-25 for further details. Return to the PASS. If one of these two points has been forced. cooler/condenser pump relays. solenoids. Service Password. ENT ER Fig. Test the compressors. and compressor oil and motor cooling solenoids under the OUTS sub-mode. the master chiller is installed so that it receives entering fluid from the slave chiller and its leaving fluid supplies the load. Locate and display the desired item. but the control will limit the rate by staging one compressor per minute. Use the following procedure to change the password: 1. pumps. Press the ESCAPE key to return to the next higher level of structure. Once changed. Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. 2. head pressure control. The Service Test function should be used to verify proper operation of the compressors.5 8 54. Use the up or down arrow keys to change the value to the correct password. Refer to the Field Wiring section. the screen will show the new value.1 °F 44. The Service Test function should be used to verify proper protected items. Refer to Thermistors section for sensor wiring. The words ‘Enter Password’ will be displayed when required. These discrete outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for 10 minutes. minimum load valves and oil heaters under the COMP sub-mode. Return to the PAS. Use the arrow keys to select either sub-mode OUTS or COMP. oil pumps. loaders. all appropriate display expansions will immediately change to the new language. OAT Outside Air Temperature (Temperature Mode. Measure 4 to 20 mA dc output using meter in series with violet or pink wire to controller. an additional leaving water temperature thermistor (Dual Chiller LWT) must be installed as shown in Fig. No power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring languages. the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the Off position. 10 — Navigator Module password will be disabled requiring that it be entered again before changes can be made to password protected items.E Password Enable (Configuration Mode. 3. This control is designed for either series or parallel fluid flow (PARA. Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control (See Table 24A and 24B) — The dual chiller routine is available for the control of two units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. Press the ENTER key at a changeable item and the value will begin to flash. Confi gurat ion Time Cloc k Opera ting Mode Alarm s s ESC Service Test (See Table 13) — Both main power and control circuit power must be on. etc. heaters. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller.E Password Enable. 12 and 13 and connected to the master chiller. the item name appears on the left of the display. Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. the machine will show the default 1111 as the password. cooler heaters. Configuration mode under sub-mode RSET) arrangements. The Service Test mode will remain enabled as long as there is more than one compressor turned on. When a specific item is located. with the default password also being displayed. To remove the force. 2222. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a compressor. Use either arrow key to change the ‘Off’ to ‘On’ and press ENTER . fans. Enter the correct password under PASS.Com NA VIG fort ATO Lin R k T IM E EWT LW T SETP 12. Press ENTER so that the item value flashes.

28 (32. only the LLEN. 13 — Dual Leaving Water Thermistor Well Table 11 — Navigator Display Menu Structure SERVICE TEMPERATURES TEST Manual Unit Mode Temperatures On/Off (UNIT) (TEST) Machine Ckt A/B Ckt A Hours/Starts Outputs Temperatures (RUN) (OUTS) (CIR. The parallel variable (PARA) must be configured the same as the master chiller.10 (104. if demand limiting is enabled. The slave chiller does not use the variables LLBL.B) SET POINTS Cooling (COOL) Heating (HEAT) Head Pressure (HEAD) INPUTS Unit Discrete (GEN. PART NUMBER 10HB50106801 10HB50106802 A 0.1) 1. (mm) A B 3. The chillers will be configured for parallel fluid flow. LLBD and LLDY. The master chiller is now configured for dual chiller operation. 11 — Dual Chiller Piping Arrangement (Series Fluid Flow) RETURN FLUID MASTER CHILLER SLAVE CHILLER THERMISTOR WIRING* LEAVING FLUID INSTALL DUAL CHILLER LWT LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (T9) HERE * Depending on piping sizes.A) Compressor Compressor Ckt B Run Hours Tests Temperatures (HOUR) (COMP) (CIR. The master and slave chillers cannot have the same CCN address (CCNA.505/0. the master chiller will be configured to use Lead/Lag Balance to even out the chiller runtimes weekly. Outdoor Air Broadcast (BCST.5) 1/4 N. the chillers must be connected together on the same CCN bus. sensor/well) • HH79NZ029 sensor/10HB50106802 well (4-in.4) 4.10 (78. Enable the Lead/Lag chiller variable (LLEN) as shown in Tables 24A and 24B.RETURN FLUID SLAVE CHILLER MASTER CHILLER LEAVING FLUID Fig. In addition. follow the example shown in Tables 24A and 24B. The master chiller controls the slave chiller by forcing the slave chiller ON and OFF. The master chiller will also split demand limiting function appropriately between the two chillers. and forcing the control DIMENSIONS in. 12 — Dual Chiller Thermistor Location Parallel Fluid Flow point of the slave chiller. Similarly.I) Ckt A/B (CRCT) Unit Analog (4-20) OUTPUTS Unit Discrete (GEN. 7 and 8).P. The Lag Start Delay feature will be set to 10 minutes.B) CONFIGURATION Display (DISP) Machine (UNIT) Options 1 (OPT1) Options 2 (OPT2) Temperature Reset (RSET) Set Point Select (SLCT) Service Configuration (SERV) Broadcast Configuration (BCST) TIME CLOCK Unit Time (TIME) Unit Date (DATE) Daylight Savings Time (DST) Schedule (SCHD) OPERATING MODES Modes (MODE) ALARMS Current (CRNT) Reset Alarms (RCRN) Alarm History (HIST) LEGEND Ckt — Circuit 20 . OAT. 6” MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR THERMISTOR REMOVAL Fig.O) Ckt A (CIR. It is recommended to set the cooling set points to the same setting on both Master and Slave chillers for series flow (Duplex) applications.61 DIA To configure the two chillers for operation. use either: • HH79NZ014 sensor/10HB50106801 well (3-in.A) Ckt B (CIR. sensor/well) Fig.B) Compressor Starts (STRT) Software Version (VERS) RUN STATUS Auto Display (VIEW) PRESSURES Ckt A Pressures (PRC.T.55 (39. Remote contacts should be connected to both Master and Slave to control unit operation. set the Master/Slave Select variable (MSSL) to SLVE. Also in this example. To configure the slave chiller. Connections can be made to the CCN screw terminals on TB3 in both chillers. The master chiller will be configured with a slave chiller at address 2. The master chiller will determine which chiller will be Lead and which will be Lag.495 B 0. If outdoor air reset is required the outdoor air thermistor must be connected to the Slave chiller (TB5 term. Configuration mode under OPT2).7) 1. Optional control inputs and Energy Management Module (EMM) should be connected to the Master chiller. PARA and MSSL variables need to be set.A) Ckt B Pressures (PRC.B) must be configured “ON”.

A X NUMBER CIRC A COMPRESSOR CMP.R281-350 = 2 Default: 22° F DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT None (30HXA.R083. 208. 174. 128. 253. 225) A3B2 IND (30GXN. 093. 268) A2B1 IND (30GXN.R080-178 = 1 GXN.S XX.R163.R118.R249. 153 = 59 106 = 63 150 (60 Hz) = 41 160 = 45 174. 108. 161 = 59 106. 125. 138 = 54 090. 106.R080-268 = 1 GXN. 268 = 67 228 = 72 30HXA. 228.C 076. 160) Verify with Appendix A Verify with Appendix A Verify with Appendix A Verify with Appendix A CMP. 204.A2 CM. 114. 178) 3 STAGE IND (30GXN. 186 = 50 086. B2 MUST TRIP AMPS ENTER ENTER ENTER 21 .C076-271 = 1 GXN. 116. 253 = 71 208 = 70 264. 114.C206-271 = 2 GXN.B X NUMBER CIRC B COMPRESSOR DIS. 264) 1 STAGE COM (30GXN.R153. A1 MUST TRIP AMPS COMPR.A1 CM. 125.R080. 093. A2 MUST TRIP AMPS COMPR. B1 MUST TRIP AMPS COMPR. 108.S FAN.B2 XXX AMPS XXX AMPS XXX AMPS XXX AMPS COMPR. 281-350 = 50 204 = 64 225 = 61 118. 136. 135.A XXX XXX % UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT A % CAPACITY 30GXN.Table 12 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUBMODE DISP KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM TEST METR LANG DISPLAY ON/OFF ON/OFF X ITEM EXPANSION TEST DISPLAY LEDs METRIC DISPLAY LANGUAGE SELECTION COMMENT See Backlight and Contrast adjustment in Tables 21 and 22. 30HXC) 1 STAGE IND 2 STAGE IND (30GXN.X °F X DISCHARGE SUPER SETPOINT FAN STAGING SELECT ENTER CM.R 080. Off = English On = Metric Default: English English Espanol Francais Portuguese PAS. 178. 090) 2 STAGE COM (30GXN. 163 = 55 249.R204-350 = 2 HXA. 138.C076-186 = 1 HXA. 150. 246 = 63 146 = 55 171 = 45 206 = 57 261 = 65 271 = 67 HXA. 083.R) Water Cooled (HXC) Split (HXA) Heat Machine Heat Reclaim TYPE TONS CAP.B1 CM. 128. 135) 3 STAGE COM (30GXN.E PASS UNIT ENTER ENBL/DSBL XXXX X PASSWORD ENABLE SERVICE PASSWORD UNIT TYPE Default: 1111 Air Cooled (GXN.R281-350. 126 = 54 096.

C XX.S EMM OPT2 ENTER YES/NO YES/NO X CONDENSER FLUID SENSORS EMM MODULE INSTALLED CONTROL METHOD CTRL CCNA CCNB BAUD XXX XXX X CCN ADDRESS CCN BUS NUMBER CCN BAUD RATE LOAD LLCS X X LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT LEAD/LAG SEQUENCE SELECT CP. 30GX No Motormaster) 4-20 mA (2-10 vdc)(30GX with Motormaster) 0-20 mA (0-10 vdc) 20-0 mA (10-0 vdc) Default: Yes Default: Off Default: Off (Does not require condenser pump control) Default: No Control No Control On when occupied On with compressor(s) Default: No MLVS HPCT YES/NO X MIN LOAD VALVE SELCT HEAD PRESS CONTROL TYPE VHPT X VAR HEAD PRESSURE SELECT PRTS CPC CNP.400 Default: Equal Equal Staged Default: Automatic Automatic Circuit A Leads Circuit B Leads Default: Automatic Automatic Compressor 1 Leads Compressor 2 Leads Default: 60 Range: 2 to 60 F Default: 0 Minutes Range: 0 to 15 Minutes Default: Disable Default: Disable Default: 15% Range: 10 to 25% Default: Enable Default: Enable Default: Alerts + Alarms Alerts + Alarms Alarms Only Off 22 .X ∆F XX ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL XX % ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL X HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT MINUTES OFF TIME CLOSE CONTROL SELECT ICE MODE ENABLE CURRENT UNBALANCE SETPOINT ENABLE NO FLOW DETECTION WINTERIZE ALERT CONFIG ALARM RELAY USAGE Default: Switch Switch = Enable/Off/Remote Contact 7 Day Occ = 7 Day Schedule Occupancy = CCN Occupancy CCN = CCN Control Default: 1 Range: 1 to 239 Default: 0 Range: 0 to 239 Default: 9600 2400 4800 9600 19.C ICE.M C.I CNPC YES/NO ON/OFF ON/OFF X PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS COOLER PUMP CONTROL CONDENSER PUMP INTERLOCK CONDENSER PUMP CONTROL CWT.Table 12  Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUBMODE OPT1 KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM FLUD DISPLAY X ITEM EXPANSION COOLER FLUID COMMENT Default: Water Water Medium Temperature Brine Low Temperature Brine (30HX only) Minimum Load Valve No Control Air Cooled (30GXN.UNB NO.MSG ALR.200 38. 30HXA default) Water Cooled (30HXC default) Common Cond (30HXA Common Condenser) Ind Cond (30HXA Independent Condenser) None (30HX.FL W.SQ X COMPRESSOR SEQUENCE LCWT DELY CLS.R.

Table 12  Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUBMODE RSET KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM CRST DISPLAY X ITEM EXPANSION COOLING RESET TYPE COMMENT Default: No Reset No Reset 4 to 20 mA Input Outdoor Air Temperature Return Fluid Space Temperature Default: 125 F Range: 0° to 125 F For return fluid reset use cooler ∆T Default: 0° F Range: 0° to 125 F For return fluid reset use cooler ∆T Default: 0° F Range: –30 to 30 F Default: No Reset No Reset 4 to 20 mA Input Outdoor Air Temperature Return Fluid Space Temperature Default: 0° F Range: 0° to 125 F Default: 125 F Range: 0° to 125 F Default: 0° F Range: –30 to 30 F Default: None None Switch 4 to 20 mA Input CCN Loadshed Default: 100% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99 Default: 0% Range: 0 to 60% Default: 60 Minutes Range: 0 to 120 Minutes Default: 80% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 50% Range: 0 to 100% Default: Disable Default: Master Default: 0 Range: 0 to 239 Default: Master Leads Master Leads Slave Leads Automatic Default: 168 hours Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 5 minutes Range: 0 to 30 minutes Default: No (Series Flow) CRT1 CRT2 DGRC HRST XXX.X °F XX.X °F XX.X ∆F X NO HEAT RESET TEMP FULL HEAT RESET TEMP DEGREES HEAT RESET DEMAND LIMIT SELECT DM20 SHNM SHDL SHTM DLS1 DLS2 LLEN MSSL SLVA LLBL XXX % XXX XXX % XXX XXX % XXX % ENBL/DSBL SLVE/MAST XXX X DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 mA LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1 DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2 LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE MASTER/SLAVE SELECT SLAVE ADDRESS LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT LLBD LLDY PARA XXX XXX YES/NO LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA LAG START DELAY PARALLEL CONFIGURATION 23 .X °F XXX.X °F XXX.X ∆F X NO COOL RESET TEMP FULL COOL RESET TEMP DEGREES COOL RESET HEATING RESET TYPE HRT1 HRT2 DGRH DMDC XXX.

GXN.0 F Range: 0.B EN.L SERV H.BC BC.FZ MC.118-350) Range: 1 To 4 According to number of cooler passes. Default: 1.R080-178) Enable (HX206-271.IGN H.R080-106.S CRMP HRMP HCSW Z.PGN H.GN BRN.B GS.1 Range: –20 to 20 Default: 0.30GXN.X XXX.S.MIN MT.0 Range: 1.X °F ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF EXVA START POSITION EXVB START POSITION ENABLE COMPRESSOR A1 ENABLE COMPRESSOR A2 ENABLE COMPRESSOR B1 ENABLE COMPRESSOR B2 WINTERIZATION PERFORMED ECONOMIZED NUMBER OF EVAP.0 Default: No Yes.SP BR.C OAT.B. GXN.0 Default: 1.AK 24 .DNE ECON EVPS LWTC AP.B2 W. TEMP SETPOINT ENTER EX.R281-350) HTSP X HEATING SETPOINT SELECT RL.2 to 2. Default: 3.0 Range: 0.1 to 20.SP BCST ENTER XX. GXN. COND.S.114) Yes (30HX161-271.SP ENBL/DSBL X.R108.A EX.X XXX.X % XX.0 Range: 0.DGN H. PASSES CIRCUIT WITH LWT SENSOR APPROACH SETPOINT CCN TIME/DATE BROADCAST CCN OAT BROADCAST GLOBAL SCHEDULE BROADCAST BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER No (30HX076-146.X COOL/HEAT X.0 Range: –20 to 20 Default: 0.0 Default: Cool Default: 2.0 F Default: Off Default: Off Default: Off Default: Off TD.B1 EN.X X.X XX. MOTOR TEMP SETPOINT BRINE FREEZE POINT MAX.X YES/NO XX.0 to 4.R) 145 F (HXA) 118 F (HXC) Range: 100 F To Default Default: 20 % Range: 0 T0 40 % Default: 20 % Range: 0 To 40 % Default: Enable (All) Disable (HX076-186.R204-350) Default: Enable (All) Disable (HX076-271.X °F XXX.X % ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL YES/NO YES/NO X A/B XXX.2 to 2.0 Range: –20 to 20 Default: 20% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 200 F (170 F for Brine) Default: 34 F Range: –20 to 34 F Default: 152 F (GXN.R080-268 Enable (GXN.A2 EN.Table 12  Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB MODE SLCT KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM CLSP DISPLAY X ITEM EXPANSION COOLING SETPOINT SELECT COMMENT Default: Single Single Dual Switch Dual 7 day Dual CCN Occupied 4 to 20 mA Input (requires EMM) Default: Single Single Dual Switch Dual 7 day Dual CCN Occupied 4 to 20 mA Input (requires EMM) Default: Enable Default: 1.X °F RAMP LOAD SELECT COOLING RAMP LOADING HEATING RAMP LOADING HEAT COOL SELECT DEADBAND MULTIPLIER HXC BRINE CONFIG LOCK HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN WATER VALVE MINIMUM POS.A1 EN. 30GXN.X XX. if brine FIOP is installed (liquid line solenoid valves).X °F XXX.

268) Fans 7.P. 7 (208. 8 (118. Move switch to ENABLE. 228.160) Fans 2. 253.B2 LD.A1 LD. 16 (281-350) Fans 5. 163-178.PB OL. 249.A COMP ENTER ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF COOLER PUMP RELAY COOLER HEATER CONDENSER PUMP RELAY REMOTE ALARM RELAY COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY LOADER A1 RELAY LOADER A2 RELAY MINIMUM LOAD VALVE OIL HEATER COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY LOADER B1 RELAY LOADER B2 RELAY OIL HEATER Energizes circuit A and B solenoids CC. 253. 204. 268) Fans 3.H. 178) FAN2 FAN3 ON/OFF ON/OFF FAN 2 RELAY FAN 3 RELAY FAN4 ON/OFF FAN 4 RELAY CLR.A1 MC. 6 (249. 228.P CLR. 6 (083. 225. 264. 268) Fans 5. 253.B VH. 228. move Enable/Off/ Remote Contact switch to OFF. 10 (153. 16 (253. 208. 268-350) Fans 15.B 25 .A1 CC. 4 (080-178.A2 EXV. 6. 138. 281-350) Fan 3 (208. 150.P. 160) Fans 9.225. Change TEST to ON.B1 CC. 178.H CND. ENTER EXV.A CC. 128. 268) Fans 5.B1 MC. 225) Fans 6. 2 (080-150.B MC. 268) Fans 5. 14 (208. 7.B2 OL. 8 (281-350) Fans 11. 8 (253. 204. 228.H.B1 OS. 093-160.B2 OS. 264) Fans 11.B1 LD. 10 (249. 4 (208.Table 13 — Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUBMODE TEST OUTS KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM DISPLAY ON/OFF ITEM EXPANSION SERVICE TEST MODE COMMENT To Enable Service Test Mode.A VH.281-350) Fans 15.A2 OS. 264) Fans 9. 12 (163. 204. 174.B2 FAN1 XXX % XXX % ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF XXX % XXX % ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF EXV % OPEN VAR HEAD PRESS % OIL PUMP MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID A1 MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID A2 OIL SOLENOID A1 OIL SOLENOID A2 EXV % OPEN VAR HEAD PRESS % OIL PUMP MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID B1 MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID B2 OIL SOLENOID B1 OIL SOLENOID B2 FAN 1 RELAY Fans 1. 12 (163.PA OL.A2 LD.A MC.A1 OS.A2 MLV OL. 228-268) Fans 13. 253.P RMT.

B SH.X °F XXX.B DGT.R204-350 and HX206-271 only CIR.X °F XXX.A1 MT.X °F XXX.R204-350 and HX206-271 only GXN.X ^F XXX.R281-350 only 26 .X °F XXX.1 DGB.Table 14 — Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE UNIT KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM CEWT CLWT OAT SPT CNDE CNDL DLWT DISPLAY XXX.2 MT.X °F XXX.A DGA.X °F XXX.B1 MT.1 DGA.X ^F XXX.R281-350 only GXN.B2 B1 MOTOR TEMPERATURE B2 MOTOR TEMPERATURE COMMENT CIR.X °F XXX.B DGB.X °F XXX.X °F XXX.X °F XXX.X °F XXX.B1 DISCHARGE GAS TEMP .B ENTER SCT.A SST.X °F XXX.X °F XXX.2 MT.B2 Average of B1/B2 values for GXN.X °F XXX.A1 DISCHARGE GAS TEMP .A2 Average of A1/A2 values for GXN.X °F XXX.A DGT.X °F XXX.X °F XXX.X °F XXX.A ENTER SCT.X °F ITEM EXPANSION COOLER ENTERING FLUID COOLER LEAVING FLUID OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SPACE TEMPERATURE CONDENSER ENTERING FLUID CONDENSER LEAVING FLUID LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID SATURATED CONDENSING TMP SATURATED SUCTION TEMP DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT TEMP DISCHARGE GAS TEMP DISCHARGE GAS TEMP .B SST.A2 A1 MOTOR TEMPERATURE A2 MOTOR TEMPERATURE SATURATED CONDENSING TMP SATURATED SUCTION TEMP DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT TEMP DISCHARGE GAS TEMP DISCHARGE GAS TEMP .R204-350 and HX206-271 GXN.A SH.X °F XXX.X °F XXX.R281-350 GXN.

1 CSP.Table 15 — Pressure Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE PRC. PRESS CALCULATED OIL PRESS A1 CALCULATED OIL PRESS A2 DISCHARGE PRESSURE SUCTION PRESSURE ECONOMIZER PRESSURE B1 OIL PRESSURE B2 OIL PRESSURE B1 OIL PRESSURE DIFF.B ENTER DP.A1 FD. A2 OIL PRESSURE DIFF.A2 PS.X °F XXX.A SP.X PSI XXX.A2 DISPLAY XXX.X PSI XX.X PSI XX.X PSIG XXX.B2 Equals oil pressure minus Economizer pressure Equals oil pressure minus Economizer pressure Equals discharge pressure minus oil pressure Equals discharge pressure minus oil pressure CKT B oil pressure setpoint 1 (See notes for Table 32) CKT B oil pressure setpoint 2 (See notes for Table 32) Table 16 — Set Point Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE COOL KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM CSP.B2 PS. B2 OIL PRESSURE DIFF.P.A2 DO.X PSIG XXX.X °F XXX. B2 OIL FILTER DIFF.B2 FD. PRESS A2 OIL FILTER DIFF.B ECN.B2 DO.2 HEAD ENTER HD. CALCULATED OIL PRESS B1 CALCULATED OIL PRESS B2 COMMENT Equals oil pressure minus Economizer pressure Equals oil pressure minus Economizer pressure Equals discharge pressure minus oil pressure Equals discharge pressure minus oil pressure CKT A oil pressure setpoint 1 (See notes for Table 32) CKT A oil pressure setpoint 2 (See notes for Table 32) PRC.A1 PS.X PSI XX.X PSIG XXX.X PSIG XXX.X PSI XXX.X PSIG XXX.X PSI XXX.B SP.HXA) 85 F (30HXC) Default: 113 F (30GX.X PSIG XXX. B1 OIL FILTER DIFF.A2 FD.A1 OP.X PSI XX.A ECN.2 CSP.X °F XXX.B1 OP.X °F XXX.B1 FD.X PSI ITEM EXPANSION DISCHARGE PRESSURE SUCTION PRESSURE ECONOMIZER PRESSURE A1 OIL PRESSURE A2 OIL PRESSURE A1 OIL PRESSURE DIFF.P.B 27 .A KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM DP.X PSIG XXX.3 DISPLAY XXX.A OP.X PSIG XXX. A1 OIL FILTER DIFF.X °F XXX.1 HSP.B1 PS.X PSI XXX.HXA) 85 F (30HXC) HEAT ENTER HSP.B1 DO.X °F ITEM EXPANSION COOLING SETPOINT 1 COOLING SETPOINT 2 ICE SETPOINT HEATING SETPOINT 1 HEATING SETPOINT 2 HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINT A HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINT B COMMENT Default: 44 F Default: 44 F Default: 32 F Default: 100 F Default: 100 F Default: 113 F (30GX.X °F XXX.A1 DO.B OP.X PSIG XXX.X PSIG XXX.X PSI XXX.A HD.X PSI XXX.X PSI XXX.

X MA XX.F DLS1 DLS2 ICED DUAL DISPLAY STRT/STOP ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OPEN/CLSE XXX AMPS XXX AMPS ON/OFF ON/OFF OPEN/CLSE XXX AMPS XXX AMPS XX.CR B2.X MA XX.X MA ITEM EXPANSION START/STOP SWITCH COOLER FLOW SWITCH CONDENSER FLOW SWITCH DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1 DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2 ICE DONE DUAL SETPOINT SWITCH COMPRESSOR A1 FEEDBACK COMPRESSOR A2 FEEDBACK OIL LEVEL SWITCH COMP A1 RUNNING CURRENT COMP A2 RUNNING CURRENT COMPRESSOR B1 FEEDBACK COMPRESSOR B2 FEEDBACK OIL LEVEL SWITCH COMP B1 RUNNING CURRENT COMP B2 RUNNING CURRENT 4-20 MA DEMAND SIGNAL 4-20 MA RESET SIGNAL 4-20 MA COOLING SETPOINT 4-20 MA HEATING SETPOINT COMMENT CRCT ENTER FKA1 FKA2 OIL.CR FKB1 FKB2 OIL.B B1.X MA XX.Table 17 — Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE GEN.I KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM STST FLOW CND.CR A2.CR 4-20 ENTER DMND RSET CSP HSP 28 .A A1.

A OL.A ENTER CC.B OL.HT CNDP SMZ DISPLAY ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF X.A1 OL.B1 OL.A1 MC.A1 LD.H.B1 CC.A2 LD.P.PB 29 .P.A MC.B2 OL.A2 OL.A2 OL.PA CIR.A VH.B1 MC.A2 EXV.B2 LD.X ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF XXX % XXX % ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF XXX % XXX % ITEM EXPANSION FAN 1 RELAY FAN 2 RELAY FAN 3 RELAY FAN 4 RELAY MINIMUM LOAD VALVE COOLER PUMP RELAY COOLER HEATER CONDENSER PUMP RELAY LOAD/UNLOAD FACTOR COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY LOADER A1 RELAY LOADER A2 RELAY OIL PUMP MOTOR COOLING A1 SOLENOID MOTOR COOLING A2 SOLENOID OIL HEATER OIL SOLENOID A1 OIL SOLENOID A2 EXV % OPEN VARIABLE HEAD PRESS % COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY LOADER B1 RELAY LOADER B2 RELAY OIL PUMP MOTOR COOLING B1 SOLENOID MOTOR COOLING B2 SOLENOID OIL HEATER OIL SOLENOID B1 OIL SOLENOID B2 EXV % OPEN VARIABLE HEAD PRESS % COMMENT CIR.B1 LD.B ENTER CC.B2 OL.B VH.B2 EXV.PMP C.H.Table 18 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE GEN.A1 CC.B MC.O KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 MLV C.

A HIGH MOTOR CURRENT CIR. B CKT A OFF REF FLOW DELAY* CKT B OFF REF FLOW DELAY* CIRCUIT A — PUMPING OUT CIRCUIT B — PUMPOUT OUT UNIT OFF: NO WATER FLOW COMMENT SHUTDOWN IN PROGRESS SHUTDOWN IN PROGRESS *Recycle restart pending 15-minute delay due to loss of refrigerant flow detected at start-up.Table 19 — Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE MODE KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM MD01 MD02 MD03 MD04 MD05 MD06 MD07 MD08 MD09 MD10 MD11 MD12 MD13 MD14 MD15 MD16 MD17 MD18 MD19 MD20 MD21 MD22 MD23 MD24 MD25 MD26 MD27 MD28 MD29 DISPLAY ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ITEM EXPANSION CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL LOW SOURCE PROTECTION RAMP LOAD LIMITED TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE LOW DISCHRGE SUPERHEAT A LOW DISCHRGE SUPERHEAT B DUAL SETPOINT TEMPERATURE RESET DEMAND LIMIT IN EFFECT COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION LOW TMP COOL/HI TMP HEAT HI TMP COOL/LO TMP HEAT MAKING ICE STORING ICE HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B HIGH MOTOR CURRENT CIR. 30 .

XX XX XX XX XXXX HRS XXXX XXXX HRS XXXX HRS XXXX HRS XXXX HRS XXXX HRS XXXX HRS XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX OCCUPIED MINUTES LEFT FOR START OVERRIDE MODES IN EFFECT PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY ACTIVE DEMAND LIMIT CURRENT ALARMS & ALERTS TIME OF DAY MONTH OF YEAR DAY OF MONTH YEAR MACHINE OPERATING HOURS MACHINE STARTS CIRCUIT A RUN HOURS CIRCUIT B RUN HOURS COMPRESSOR A1 RUN HOURS COMPRESSOR A2 RUN HOURS COMPRESSOR B1 RUN HOURS COMPRESSOR B2 RUN HOURS CIRCUIT A STARTS COMPRESSOR A1 STARTS COMPRESSOR A2 STARTS CIRCUIT B STARTS COMPRESSOR B1 STARTS COMPRESSOR B2 STARTS 00.B ST.A ST.L ALRM TIME MNTH DATE YEAR RUN ENTER YES/NO XX MIN YES/NO XXX % XXX % XXX XX.A2 STR.L MODE CAP DEM.A HRS.X °F X ITEM EXPANSION ENTERING FLUID TEMP LEAVING FLUID TEMP ACTIVE SETPOINT CONTROL POINT CONTROL MODE COMMENT SERVICE TEST OFF LOCAL OFF CCN OFF TIME OFF EMRGCY ON LOCAL ON CCN ON TIME OCC MIN.B2 31 . 01-31 HRS.B1 ST.B2 STRT ENTER STR.A2 HR.U HOUR ENTER HRS.Table 20 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE VIEW KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM EWT LWT SETP CTPT STAT DISPLAY XXX.U STR. February. etc.B1 HR.59 January.A1 ST.X °F XXX.B HR.00-23.A1 HR.X °F XXX.X °F XXX.

The Navigator will display all block segments. Display Test is Enabled. The alarm and all mode LED’s light up. Press arrow keys at the same time. Press the ESCAPE key when finished to exit the mode.’ Use the up arrow key to brighten the backlight and the down arrow key to dim the backlight. ‘OFF’ will be flashing. Use the up arrow key to increase contrast and the down arrow key to decrease the contrast. TEST Table 22 — How to Adjust Navigator Contrast from Configuration Mode SUB-MODE DISP KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM TEST DISPLAY ON/OFF Enter Password 1111 OFF ON ON ITEM EXPANSION TEST DISPLAY LEDS COMMENT ENTER TEST TEST ENTER Enter password as required using ENTER key after each number. The Navigator will display ‘ADJUST CONTRAST’ with a percentage indication. Press the ESCAPE key when finished to exit the mode. ‘OFF’ will be flashing Change value to ‘ON’ (‘ON’ flashes). The alarm and all mode LED’s light up. Press Enter and Escape keys at the same time. Change value to ‘ON’ (‘ON’ flashes). The Navigator will display ‘Adjust Brightness. TEST ENTER ESCAPE 32 . Display Test is Enabled. The Navigator will display all block segments.Table 20 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE VERS KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM MBB EXV EMM CP1 CP2 SCB NAVI DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION CESR-131344-xx-xx CESR-131172-xx-xx CESR-131174-xx-xx 100233-1R1-xx-xx 100233-1R1-xx-xx CESR-131226-xx-xx CESR-131227-xx-xx COMMENT xx-xx is Version number xx-xx is Version number xx-xx is Version number xx-xx is Version number xx-xx is Version number xx-xx is Version number xx-xx is Version number Table 21 — How to Adjust Navigator Backlight from Configuration Mode SUB-MODE DISP KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM TEST DISPLAY ON/OFF Enter Password 1111 OFF ON ON ITEM EXPANSION TEST DISPLAY LEDS COMMENT ENTER TEST TEST ENTER Enter password as required using ENTER key after each number.

D MIN. etc.O FRI.59 Default: 00.59 Default: 00.MM MNTH DOM DAY YEAR DISPLAY XX.00 Range: 00.00 to 23.U THU.O MON. etc.XX XX.XX ITEM EXPANSION HOUR AND MINUTE MONTH OF YEAR DAY OF MONTH DAY OF WEEK YEAR MONTH WEEK DAY MINUTES TO ADD MONTH WEEK DAY MINUTES TO SUBTRACT MONDAY OCCUPIED TIME MONDAY UNOCCUIPED TIME TUESDAY OCCUPIED TIME TUESDAY UNOCCUPIED TIME WEDNESDAY OCCUPIED TIME WEDNESDAY UNOCCUPIED TIME THURSDAY OCCUPIED TIME THURSDAY UNOCCUPIED TIME FRIDAY OCCUPIED TIME FRIDAY UNOCCUPIED TIME SATURDAY OCCUPIED TIME SATURDAY UNOCCUPIED TIME SUNDAY OCCUPIED TIME SUNDAY UNOCCUPIED TIME COMMENT Military (00:00 — 23:59) January.M STR.XX XX.00 Range: 00.O TUE.00 to 23. February.59 Default: 00.00 to 23.XX XX.00 Range: 00.W STR.XX XX.O SAT.00 Range: 00.59 Default: 00.00 Range: 00.00 to 23.XX XX.59 Default: 00.00 to 23.00 to 23.00 to 23.XX XX XX X XXXX XX X X XX XX XX XX XX XX.XX XX.D MIN.00 Range: 00.59 33 .00 to 23.00 to 23.00 to 23. Tuesday.XX XX.00 Range: 00.00 to 23.59 Default: 00. DST ENTER STR.A STP.00 Range: 00.XX XX.59 Default: 00.O WED.W STR.O SUN.Table 23 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE TIME DATE KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM HH.59 Default: 00.00 to 23.U SAT.00 Range: 00.XX XX.00 Range: 00.00 Range: 00.M STP.59 Default: 00.00 Range: 00.00 to 23.5 SCHD ENTER MON.U FRI.XX XX.O THU.U SUN.U Default: 4 Range: 1-12 Default: 1 Range: 1-5 Default: 7 Range: 1-7 Default: 60 Range: 0-99 Default: 10 Range: 1-12 Default: 5 Range: 1-5 Default: 7 Range: 1-7 Default: 60 Range: 0-99 Default: 00. Range: 01-31 Monday.U WED.00 to 23.59 Default: 00.XX XX.00 Range: 00.XX XX.59 Default: 00.59 Default: 00.00 Range: 00.U TUE.59 Default: 00.XX XX.

The desired control method should be configured for the Master only. Master and Slave chillers must both be configured for the same piping configuration. The slave is always configured for switch control. No = Series piping configuration.Table 24A — Example of Configuring Dual Chiller Control (Master Chiller) SUB-MODE OPT2 ITEM OPT2 CTRL CTRL KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT ENTER SWITCH SWITCH CONTROL METHOD VALUE FLASHES SEE NOTE 1 ENTER CCNA CCNA ENTER 1 1 CCN ADDRESS DEFAULT 1 CHANGE IF REQUIRED ENTER CCNB CCNB CCNB ENTER 0 0 OPT2 RESET CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0 CHANGE IF REQUIRED ENTER ESCAPE PROCEDE TO SUBMODE RSET RSET RSET CRST ENTER NO RESET COOLING RESET TYPE 15 ITEMS LLEN ENTER DSBL DSBL ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT ENBL ENTER LLEN ENTER ENBL MSSL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED MSSL ENTER MAST SLVA MASTER/SLAVE SELECT SLAVE ADDRESS DEFAULT MAST SLVA ENTER 0 2 VALUE FLASHES SELECT 2 SLAVE ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED SLVA ENTER 2 LLBL ENTER MASTER LEADS AUTOMATIC LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT VALUE FLASHES SELECT AUTOMATIC LLBL ENTER AUTOMATIC LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED LLBD ENTER 168 LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA DEFAULT 168 ENTER LLDY ENTER 5 5 10 LAG START DELAY VALUE FLASHES SELECT 10 LAG START DELAY PARALLEL CONFIGURATION CHANGE ACCEPTED DEFAULT NO SELECT YES PARALLEL CONFIGURATION SEE NOTE 2 MASTER COMPLETE ENTER LLDY PARA ENTER 10 NO YES ENTER PARA ENTER YES RSET ESCAPE NOTES: 1. 2. 34 . Yes = Parallel piping configuration.

Yes = Parallel piping configuration. 3. 2. 4. 35 .Table 24B — Example of Configuring Dual Chiller Control (Slave Chiller) SUB-MODE OPT2 ITEM OPT2 CTRL KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT ENTER SWITCH SWITCH CTRL CCNA CONTROL METHOD SEE NOTE 1 ESCAPE ESCAPE CTRL CCNA ENTER 1 1 2 CCN ADDRESS SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT 2 (SEE NOTE 2) ENTER CCNA ENTER 2 CCNA CCNB CCN ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED ESCAPE CCNB ENTER 0 CCNB OPT2 RSET CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0 (SEE NOTE 3) ESCAPE ESCAPE PROCEED TO SUBMODE RSET COOLING RESET TYPE LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED RSET RSET ENTER CRST LLEN LLEN ENTER DSBL DSBL ENBL ENTER LLEN ENTER ENBL LLEN MSSL ESCAPE MASTER/SLAVE SELECT SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT SLAVE MASTER/SLAVE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED MSSL ENTER MAST MAST SLVE ENTER MSSL ENTER SLVE MSSL ESCAPE 5 ITEMS PARA ENTER NO YES PARALLEL CONFIGURATION SELECT YES PARALLEL CONFIGURATION SEE NOTE 5 SLAVE COMPLETE PARA ENTER YES RSET ESCAPE NOTES: 1. Slave is always configured for switch control. 5. Slave CCN Address must be different than Master. LLBD or LLDY to be configured. Master and Slave chillers must both be configured for the same piping configuration. Slave CCN Bus Number must be the same as Master. No = Series piping configuration. Slave does not require LLBL.

Next. Press ENTER to make the current value flash. ENTER ENTER Alarms are shown as AXXX. Alerts are shown as TXXX. At part load. for 5 seconds. Record the current values from the MBB before removing the module or downloading new software. To use the return reset. In the Configuration mode under the sub-mode RSET.Alarms/Alerts — Alarms and alerts are messages that one or more faults have been detected. See Tables 25 and 26 to view and clear alarms. See Tables 27 and 28 on page 37 for correct configuration.* ESCAPE NO ENTER Use to clear active alarms/alerts NO Flashes Select YES Alarms/alerts clear. Under normal operation. Return temperature reset allows for the leaving temperature set point to be reset upward as a function of the return fluid temperature or. Codes for safeties which do not automatically reset are not deleted until the problem is corrected and the machine is reset. and 17 are examples of outdoor air. Up to 25 alarms/alerts can be displayed in currently active alarms. Full reset is at a 2-degree temperature difference across the cooler and no reset would be at a 10 F difference across the cooler. The example uses a reset value of 10 degrees at full reset. the entering cooler fluid will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. items CRST. When an alarm or alert is stored in the display and the machine automatically resets. space and return water temperature resets. but can be changed if a replacement MBB is installed. (CCP1 for compressors A1 or B1. four variables must be configured. terminate an option (such as reset) or result in the use of a default value such as a set point. or from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. SUB-MODE OPT2) to be both one or the other or off paragraph. the building load. the efficiency of the machine would increase. 14. Figures 15. The Energy Management Module (EMM) must be used for temperature reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal. 36 . CRT2. If the leaving fluid temperature was allowed to increase at part load. Figure 14 is an example of no reset. 16. space temperature (SPT). The control system is also capable of temperature reset based on outdoor-air temperature (OAT). Table 25 — Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE CRNT RCRN HIST KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM AXXX or TXXX YES/NO AXXX or TXXX ITEM EXPANSION CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS RESET ALL CURRENT ALARMS ALARM HISTORY COMMENT Alarms are shown as AXXX. in effect. The alarms and alerts indicate failures that cause the unit to shut down. Table 26 — Example of Reading and Clearing Alarms SUB-MODE CRNT CRNT KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM AXXX or TXXX ITEM EXPANSION CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS COMMENT ACTIVE ALARMS (AXXX) OR ALERTS (TXXX) DISPLAYED. As the cooler load varies. 14-17 and Table 29. IMPORTANT: Do not clear the alarms without first reviewing the full list and investigating and correcting the cause of the alarms. the return temperature reset is in effect an average building load reset method. CCP2 for compressors A2 or B2). Alerts are shown as TXXX. Use the arrow keys to configure the correct value and press the ENTER key again. the chiller will maintain a constant leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled fluid set point. See Fig. All items are password protected. the alarm/alert is deleted. Because the change in temperature through the cooler is a measure of the building load. Up to 50 alarms/alerts can be stored in the alarm history. Run Hours and Starts — The HOUR and STRT submodes under the Run Status mode contain items for number of hours for each circuit and each compressor and the total number of starts for each compressor. the unit set point is reset from full load based on the chilled fluid return temperature. Refer to the Troubleshooting section for more information. follow the example in Table 26 to clear the alarm from the Main Base Board (MBB) history. CRT1. YES changes to NO NO YES RCRN ENTER NO *Press ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously to display expanded alarm description. Accessory sensors must be used for OAT and SPT reset (HH79NZ023 for OAT and HH51BX006 for SPT). Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point are selected based on a full-load condition. and DGRC must be set properly. the fluid temperature set point may be colder than required. To reset the return fluid temperature. Alarm relay usage alerts and alarms are configurable in (CONFIGURATION MODE. Temperature Reset — The control system is capable of handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on return cooler fluid temperature. To clear manual reset alarms from the CCP modules. press the reset button located on the CCP board generating the alarm.

5) 2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature (Connect to TB5-7.7 C) Range: 0° to 125 F Default: 0° F (–17.1 C) 5.7 to 16.7 to 16.Table 27 — Configuring Temperature Reset MODE CONFIGURATION KEYPAD KEYPAD SUB-MODE ENTRY ENTRY ENTER ITEM TEST TYPE FLUD CTRL CRST DISPLAY ON/OFF X X X X ITEM EXPANSION TEST DISPLAY LEDs UNIT TYPE COOLER FLUID CONTROL METHOD COOLING RESET TYPE COMMENT DISP UNIT OPT1 OPT2 RSET ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER CRT1 CRT2 DGRC 0 = No Reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA Input (EMM required) (Connect to EMM J6-2.7 C) Table 28 — Return Water Reset SUB-MODE RSET ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COOLING RESET TYPE NO COOL RESET TEMP FULL COOL RESET TEMP DEGREES COOL RESET COMMENT 0 = no reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA input 2 = Outdoor air temp 3 = Return Fluid 4 = Space Temperature Default: 125 F (51.X F FULL COOL RESET TEMP Range: 0° to 125 F Set to 20.5 C) 2.0 F (5.X ∆F DEGREES COOL RESET Range: –30 to 30 F (–16. 15 — Outdoor-Air Temperature Reset .8 ∆C) CRT1 CRT2 DGRC LEGEND EWT — Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature LEGEND LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature Fig.0 F (1. 14 — Cooling Return Water — No Reset 37 Fig.0 for CRST= 1 No Cool Reset ∆T for CRST=3 Default: 0° F (–17.7 C) CRST 3 10.6) Default: 125 F (51.0 ∆F (2.8 C) Range: 0° to 125 F Default: 0°F (0° C) Range: –30 to 30 F (–16.7 C) Range: 0° to125 F XXX.X F NO COOL RESET TEMP Set to 4.8) 3 = Return Fluid 4 = Space Temperature (Connect to TB5-5.0 for CRST=1 Full Cool Reset ∆T for CRST=3 Default: 0° F (0° C) XX.8 C) XXX.

Loadshed Demand Delta (SHDL). Then configure the Loadshed Group Number (SHNM). See Fig. See Table 29.8 3. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point. 16 — Space Temperature Reset DESIGN RISE 5.55 1. DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) — To configure Demand Limit for 2-stage switch control set the Demand Limit Select (DMDC) to 1. Then configure the Demand Limit at 20 mA (DM20) to the maximum loadshed value desired.0 4.8 3. The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest demand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. To disable demand limit configure the DMDC to 0. ALLOWABLE LOAD (%) 80 60 40 100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA 75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA 20 0 0 2 4 6 12 8 10 DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL – 4 . When the Redline command is received. 17 — Return Water Reset Demand Limit — Demand Limit is a feature that allows the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy usage.5 TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE (EWT-LWT) DEGREES C LEGEND EWT — Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature Fig. 18.to 20-mA input signal types of demand limiting require the Energy Management Module (EMM). The ComfortLink™ Control will respond to a Redline command from the Loadshed control. See Table 29.4 3.3 2. the current stage of capacity is set to the maximum stages available. The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN system designer.55 0 10 RESET AMOUNT DEGREES F 9 8 7 6 5 CHANGE IN 3 LWT SET POINT 2 1 4 RESET AMOUNT NO COOL RESET ∆T FULL COOL RESET ∆T 0 9 5 10 8 6 2 3 4 7 1 TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE (EWT-LWT) DEGREES F 0 . and Maximum Loadshed Time (SHTM). Then configure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (DLS1 and DLS2) to the desired capacity limit. To use Demand Limit.7 2. Then configure the Demand Limit set points based on the type selected. 18 — 4 to 20 mA Demand Limiting 38 . closing the first stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand limit level.0 5. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level at a 20 mA input signal. The first type is through 2-stage switch control.4 5. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed module and has the ability to limit the current operating capacity to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required. which will reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable 100 percentages.5 RESET AMOUNT DEGREES C 5. the unit will limit capacity to the closest capacity stage.2 1.3 3. See Table 29. Capacity steps are controlled by 2 relay switch inputs field wired to TB6.7 1.2 2. The control will reduce allowable capacity to this level for the 20 mA signal.LEGEND LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature Fig.20 mA INPUT 14 16 18 20 Fig. EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to 20 mA Controlled) — To configure Demand Limit for 4 to 20 mA control set the Demand Limit Select (DMDC) to 2.1 1. If the demand limit percentage does not match unit staging. select the type of demand limiting to use. There are 3 types of demand limiting that can be configured. DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) — To configure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control set the Demand Limit Select (DMDC) to 3. NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4. For Demand Limit by 2-stage switch control.8 2.1 . the ComfortLink Control will 50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA MAX.9 4. Should the loadshed control send a Loadshed command. Closing contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit from exceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch 2 set point.

–). 19 — Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) 39 .7 20 4 TO 20 mA SIGNAL TO EMM LEGEND EMM — Energy Management Module Fig. The Maximum Loadshed Time is the defines the maximum length of time that a loadshed condition is allowed to exist.5 (+.4) 30 (-1) 20 (-7) 10 (-12) 0 (-17) 4 6. The control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no Cancel command has been received within the configured maximum loadshed time limit. The signal is connected to TB6-3.reduce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed Demand delta. 100 (38) 90 (32) 80 (27) 70 (21) SET POINT.3 8. F (C) 60 (15) 50 (10) 40 (4. Figure 19 shows how the 4 to 20 mA signal is linearly calculated on an overall 10 F to 80 F for both Water and Medium Temperature Brine COOLER FLUID configurations.3 C) 13.6 10.9 (FLUD = 2) MINIMUM SET POINT 14 F (-10 C) Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) — Unit operation is based on an external 4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module (EMM).4 17. See Table 30 for configuration instructions.1 C) (FLUD = 1) MINIMUM SET POINT 38 F (3. MAXIMUM SET POINT 70 F (21.1 15.

X °F XXX. Range: 0 to 120 min.X °F XX.X ∆F ITEM EXPANSION Test Display LEDs Unit Type Cooler Fluid Control Method Cooling Reset Type No Cool Reset Temperature Full Cool Reset Temperature Degrees Cool Reset COMMENT ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER DMDC X Demand Limit Select DM20 SHNM SHDL SHTM DLS1 DLS2 NOTE: Heating reset values skipped in this example.Table 29 — Configuring Demand Limit MODE CONFIGURATION KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER SUB-MODE DISP UNIT OPT1 OPT2 RSET KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM TEST TYPE FLUD CTRL CRST CRT1 CRT2 DGRC DISPLAY ON/OFF X X X X XXX. XXX% XXX XXX% XXX MIN XXX % XXX% Demand Limit at 20 mA Loadshed Group Number Loadshed Demand Delta Maximum Loadshed Time Demand Limit Switch 1 Demand Limit Switch 2 Default: 0 0 = None 1 = Switch 2 = 4 to 20 mA Input 3 = CCN Loadshed Default: 100% Range: 0 to 100 Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99 Default: 0% Range: 0 to 60% Default: 60 min. Default: 80% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 50% Range: 0 to 100% Table 30 — Menu Configuration of 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Control MODE (RED LED) CONFIGURATION KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER SUB-MODE DISP UNIT OPT1 OPT2 RSET SLCT KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT ENTER CLSP 0 0 0 4 COOLING SETPOINT SELECT Scrolling Stops Flashing ‘0’ Select ‘4’ Change Accepted ENTER ENTER ENTER 4 40 .

move the Emergency On/Off switch to the Off position. For configuration header fault alarms from the CCP module. Complete Unit Stoppage — Complete unit stoppage can be caused by any of the following conditions: • cooling load satisfied • remote on/off contacts open • programmed schedule • emergency stop command from CCN • general power failure • blown fuse in control power feed disconnect • open control circuit fuse(s) • Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch moved to Off position • freeze protection trip • low flow protection trip • open contacts in chilled water flow switch • Open contacts in any auxiliary interlock. POWER FAILURE EXTERNAL TO THE UNIT — Unit restarts automatically when power is restored. SCB board or either CCP module • low refrigerant pressure • off-to-on delay is in effect Alarms and Alerts — These are warnings of abnormal or fault conditions and may cause either one circuit or the whole unit to shut down. determine and correct the cause before attempting another restart. They are assigned code numbers and a detailed description of each alarm/alert code error including possible causes is shown in Table 32. the circuit is LEGEND — Chillervisor™ System Manager — Water System Manager 41 . Verify that the chiller is properly configured. see Table 32. move the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position.12) is energized. A password entry may be required.R and 30HX screw chiller control has many features to aid in troubleshooting. Up to 50 alarms/alerts can be stored at once. For checking specific items. Restart Procedure — After the cause for stoppage has been corrected. If they open while unit is running. Low Temperature) Cooler Pump Interlock Control Circuit Fuse Blown High-Pressure Switch Open Low Sat. Both circuits will complete a pumpdown cycle and all compressors and solenoids will shut off. restart is either automatic or manual. Some typical fault conditions are described in Table 31. Single Circuit Stoppage — Single circuit stoppage can be caused by the following: • low oil pressure • open contacts in high pressure switch • low refrigerant pressure • thermistor failure • transducer failure • alarm condition from CCP module Stoppage of one circuit by a safety device action does not affect other circuit. Turn off the unit control power. reset the alarm(s) using the Navigator as shown in Table 26. similar to moving the control switch to Off position. Next. codes and reset type. Suction Temperature Low Oil Pressure Loss of Communications with WSM or CSM Controller CSM WSM RESET TYPE Manual reset Auto reset first time. the alarm relay output (MBB relay K7. including options and/or accessories. Refer to Table 32 for more information. check the diagnostic information displayed in the Status function and the configuration information displayed in the Service function. first find and correct the cause of the alarm. Refer to Table 31 for typical stoppage faults and reset types. The alarm descriptions are displayed on the Navigator under the ‘CRNT’ or ‘HIST’ sub-modes of the Alarms mode. For a complete list of fault conditions. Press ENTER . shut down immediately and EXV closes. This action will reset only the alarmed circuit or compressor. Opening the circuit between these terminals places unit in Stop mode. the unit stops • cooler entering or leaving fluid thermistor failure • low/high transducer supply voltage • loss of communications between the Main Base Board (MBB) and either the EXV board. For extreme cases. terminals TB5-11. manual if repeated in same day Manual reset Unit restarts automatically when power is restored Manual reset Manual reset after 1 hour Manual reset Automatic reset If a stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of the above safety devices. Use Alarm and Alert tables to view and clear alarms. By using the Navigator control. All compressors. depending on the fault. terminate an option (such as reset) or result in the use of a default value such as a set point. Terminals that are jumpered from factory are in series with control switch. To clear these alarms. Table 31 — Typical Stoppage Faults and Reset Types STOPPAGE FAULT Loss of Condenser Flow (30HXC) Cooler Freeze Protection (Chilled Fluid. The Main Base Board also recognizes and reports illegal configurations as shown in Table 32. ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection (CCP) module alarms require an additional step to reset alarms. refer to the Mode/Sub-Mode directory (Table 11). Wait for all compressors to stop. Then press and hold the reset button on the CCP board for 5 seconds. Select the RCRN item under the Alarms mode. Manual reset requires that the alarm(s) be reset via the Navigator. The alarms and alerts indicate failures that cause the unit to shut down. Unit cannot start if these contacts are open. Checking Display Codes — To determine how the machine has been programmed to operate. determine and correct the cause before attempting another restart. and clear the CCP. Unit Shutoff — To shut the unit off. move the Enable/ Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position. Correct the configuration header problem and restore unit control power. When a safety device trips. solenoids and other outputs will stop immediately. When an alarm or alert is activated configurable.TROUBLESHOOTING The 30GXN. and ENTER again to reset all current alarms and alerts. using the Configuration mode. The Service Test function allows for testing of all outputs and compressors. If a stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of the preceding safety devices. operating conditions of the chiller can be viewed while the chiller is running.

oil shutoff valve closed. plugged oil filter. See Note 1 and Fig. plugged oil strainer Manual Low Water Temperature. 20 on page 49. plugged oil strainer Manual Low Water Temperature. check valve failed open. compressor oil check valve stuck. A031 Alarm Compressor A2 PreStart Oil Pressure A032 Alarm Compressor B1 PreStart Oil Pressure A033 Alarm Compressor B2 PreStart Oil Pressure 42 . closed oil valve. T056) are reported as alerts. plugged oil filter. cycle. Compressor faults (T051. oil line check valve stuck. 20 on page 49. low refrigerant charge. check valve failed open. cycle. oil pump failure. oil shutoff valve closed. bad oil solenoid. See Note 1 and Fig. Manual Low oil.Compressor Alarm/Alert Circuit — Each compressor is directly controlled by a CCP module. plugged oil strainer Manual Low oil. compressor oil check valve stuck. Oil Pump did not build suffiCompressor cannot cient pressure during pre-lube start. plugged oil filter. compressor oil check valve stuck. oil line check valve stuck. ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL Comp A1 shut down RESET PROBABLE CAUSE METHOD Manual Low Water Temperature. Manual Low oil. compressor oil check valve stuck. oil transducer failure. See Note 1 and Fig. 20 on page 49. oil line check valve stuck. Comp B2 shut down Compressor B2 Low Oil Pressure – 2 PO-PS < Oil Set Point 2. oil shutoff valve closed. compressor oil check valve stuck. compressor oil check valve stuck. oil transducer failure. low refrigerant charge. See Note 1 and Fig. Comp A2 shut down T028 Alert Compressor B1 Low Oil Pressure – 1 PO-Pe < Oil Set Point 1. plugged oil filter. low refrigerant charge. check valve failed open. low refrigerant charge. oil transducer failure. closed oil valve. closed oil valve. 20 on page 49. oil solenoid failure. oil pump failure. cycle. See Note 1 and Fig. Comp A1 shut down T027 Alert Compressor A2 Low Oil Pressure – 1 PO-Pe < Oil Set Point 1. Comp B1 shut down T029 Alert Compressor B2 Low Oil Pressure – 1 PO-Pe < Oil Set Point 1. oil line check valve stuck. cycle. Press ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously to display description. 20 on page 49. bad oil solenoid. See Note 1 and Fig. bad oil solenoid. plugged oil strainer Manual Low Water Temperature. 20 on page 49. low refrigerant charge. check valve failed open. See Note 1 and Fig. bad oil solenoid. T055. plugged oil filter. oil transducer failure. plugged oil filter. T052. oil line check valve stuck. oil pump failure. oil line check valve stuck. The specific fault condition for a compressor alert is included as part of the alert description displayed on the Navigator. oil shutoff valve closed. Manual Low oil. bad oil solenoid. compressor oil check valve stuck. Oil Pump did not build suffiCompressor cannot cient pressure during pre-lube start. plugged oil filter. oil solenoid failure. 20 on page 49. closed oil valve. bad oil solenoid. closed oil valve. See Note 1 and Fig. plugged oil strainer Manual Low Water Temperature. Oil Pump did not build suffiCompressor cannot cient pressure during pre-lube start. closed oil valve. oil line check valve stuck. Comp B1 shut down Compressor B1 Low Oil Pressure – 2 PO-PS < Oil Set Point 2. Comp B2 shut down A030 Alarm Compressor A1 PreStart Oil Pressure Oil Pump did not build suffiCompressor cannot cient pressure during pre-lube start. oil line check valve stuck. low refrigerant charge. low refrigerant charge. bad oil solenoid. Table 32  Alarm and Alert Codes ALARM/ALERT CODE T026 ALARM OR DESCRIPTION ALERT Alert Compressor A1 Low Oil Pressure – 1 WHY WAS THIS ALARM GENERATED? PO-Pe < Oil Set Point 1. compressor oil check valve stuck. 20 on page 49. oil pump failure. low refrigerant charge. bad oil solenoid. closed oil valve. Comp A2 shut down Compressor A2 Low Oil Pressure – 2 PO-PS < Oil Set Point 2. Compressor A1 Low Oil Pressure – 2 PO-PS < Oil Set Point 2. plugged oil strainer Manual Low Water Temperature. plugged oil strainer Manual Low Water Temperature. plugged oil filter. oil solenoid failure. closed oil valve. oil solenoid failure. plugged oil strainer Manual Low Water Temperature.

B1 Failed Oil Solenoid A041 Alarm Comp. bad oil solenoid. Oil Pressure > 2. plugged oil strainer Manual Plugged oil filter. compressor oil check valve stuck. B2 shut down Delta P. compressor oil check valve stuck. oil line check valve stuck. closed oil valve. Oil (Discharge press – Oil press) Comp. B1 shut down Delta P. oil line check valve stuck. A2 shut down Delta P. plugged oil strainer Manual Plugged oil filter. Oil Pressure > 2. check oil line > 100 PSI for more than 5 seconds Comp. oil line check valve stuck. bad oil solenoid. compressor oil check valve stuck. B1 Max. bad oil solenoid. bad oil solenoid. check oil line > 100 PSI for more than 5 seconds RESET PROBABLE CAUSE METHOD Manual Plugged oil filter. A1 shut down Delta P. closed oil valve.5 PSI during period after oil pump starts and before oil solenoid opens Diff. B2 Failed Oil Solenoid Diff. B1 not allowed to start Manual Faulty oil solenoid valve Comp. plugged oil strainer Manual Plugged oil filter. closed oil valve. A2 not allowed to start Manual Faulty oil solenoid valve Comp. A1 not allowed to start Comp. B2 Max. check oil line > 100 PSI for more than 5 seconds Alarm Comp. A2 Max.5 PSI during period after oil pump starts and before oil solenoid opens Comp. A1 Max. Oil Pressure > 2. Oil (Discharge press – Oil press) Comp. plugged oil strainer Manual Faulty oil solenoid valve A035 A036 Alarm Comp.5 PSI during period after oil pump starts and before oil solenoid opens Diff. Oil Pressure > 2.Table 32  Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ALERT CODE A034 ALARM OR WHY WAS THIS ALARM ACTION TAKEN BY DESCRIPTION ALERT GENERATED? CONTROL Alarm Comp.5 PSI during period after oil pump starts and before oil solenoid opens Diff. A1 Failed Oil Solenoid A039 Alarm Comp. A2 Failed Oil Solenoid A040 Alarm Comp. check oil line > 100 PSI for more than 5 seconds A037 Alarm A038 Alarm Comp. closed oil valve. compressor oil check valve stuck. oil line check valve stuck. Oil (Discharge press – Oil press) Comp. Oil (Discharge press – Oil press) Comp. B2 not allowed to start Manual Faulty oil solenoid valve 43 .

shut down motor temp thermistor Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor outside range of Chiller shut down Thermistor Failure – 1 –40 to 240° F (–40 to 116° C) Cooler Leaving Fluid LWT > EWT + 5° F for Chiller shut down Thermistor Failure – 2 15 minutes Cooler Entering Fluid Thermistor Failure Condenser Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure Condenser Entering Fluid Thermistor Failure Cir. Comp. Shorted Thermistor A061 T062 T063 Alarm Alert Alert Terminal block power supply leads not in correct phase. damaged cable/wire or wiring error. Automatic Thermistor failure. Power supply disconnected. Manual Thermistor failure. shut down Current Unbalance Manual Manual Loss of condenser air/water flow. loose plug connector. Manual Thermistor outside range of None. Incorrect size or voltage entered when MBB was downloaded.0 ± 2. damaged cable/wire or wiring error. Alert will be generated if measured imbalance exceeds set point. A Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure Thermistor outside range of –40 to 240° F (–40 to 116° C) Thermistor outside range of –40 to 240° F (–40 to 116° C) Uses 0. load valve of affected circuit energized (if equipped) Circuit shut down Manual Operation beyond chiller capability. Liquid valve not open. High Motor Current CCP detects high current Comp.1×F/% Total Capacity as rise/ton None. All loaders deenergized. shut down Manual CCP measures current Circuit shut down imbalance between phases must be above C. circuits) solenoid failure. loose terminals Manual Manual Contactor Failure Current Phase Reversal CCP detects phase reversal from toroid reading or from incoming power supply. shut down RESET METHOD PROBABLE CAUSE Manual Comp. header not fully seated in CCP board. Chiller continues to run. contactor not energized.0 amps) CCP detects min. blown fuse(s). damaged cable/wire.0 seconds Comp. Operation beyond chiller capability. damaged cable/wire or wiring error. Automatic Thermistor failure. Automatic Thermistor failure. wiring error. Faulty economizer TXV or poor bulb connection to motor cooling line. Motor Over Temperature Comp. wiring error. Circuit A shut down T070 Alert 44 . See Appendix A. MTA Value Error MTA value stored in MBB does not agree with MTA header value from CCP. Min. Blown fuse. Chiller contin–40 to 240° F (–40 to 116° C) ues to run. Manual Motor cooling (all) or Economizer (2 comp. Average of compressor A1 and A2 (if installed) sensors > 210° F for 30 seconds. shut down value punched out in header. Manual Wiring error or faulty thermistor* Manual Header pins on CCP board either all or none punched out. low refrigerant charge. improperly punched configuration header. shut down Open Thermistor MTA Header Fault CCP detects open circuit in Comp. CCP detects motor winding temperature >245 F All remaining compressors shut down. Comp. Manual Thermistor failure. 10% of MTA for 10 seconds after shutting off compressor contactor. faulty current toroid. Manual Wiring error or faulty thermistor* Automatic Thermistor failure.UNB for 25 minutes Single Phase Current CCP measures current Circuit shut down Loss imbalance between phases greater than 50% (running current <50% of MTA) or 30% (running current ≥ 50% of MTA) for 1 second. damaged cable/wire or wiring error. Oil solenoid is energized. Manual Header pin(s) on CCP board not punched out correctly. Faulty contactor. Check compressor contactor. damaged cable/wire. Alert Compressor B1 Failure – (See below) Alert Compressor B2 Failure – (See below) High Pressure Switch Trip HPS input to CCP module open No Motor Current CCP reads less than 10% of MTA on all legs for >3. shut down motor temp thermistor CCP finds error with MTA Comp. wiring error. wiring error or motor cooling solenoid failure. contactor welded. blown fuse Motor winding(s) gone to ground. not allowed to start A060 Alarm CCP detects short circuit in Comp. wiring error or water piping error. shut down compared to MTA setting Ground Fault Trip CCP detects ground current (4. Loose terminals on power wires. wiring error. check toroid wiring.Table 32  Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ALERT CODE T051 T052 T055 T056 ALARM OR WHY WAS THIS ALARM ACTION TAKEN BY DESCRIPTION ALERT GENERATED? CONTROL Alert Compressor A1 Failure – (See below) Alert Compressor A2 Failure – (See below) See additional descriptions below. Toroid wire harness crossed.

5% for 50 seconds. Automatic Transducer failure. Thermistor outside range of Reset disabled. Voltage ratio more than 98. Automatic Transducer failure. Runs under normal control/ set points. T073 T074 Alert Alert Outside Air Temperature Thermistor Failure Space Temperature Thermistor Failure Compressor A1 Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure Compressor A2 Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure Compressor B1 Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure Compressor B2 Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid Temperature Thermistor Failure Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer Failure Comp A1 Oil Pressure Transducer Failure Comp A2 Oil Pressure Transducer Failure Comp B1 Oil Pressure Transducer Failure Comp B2 Oil Pressure Transducer Failure Circuit A Economizer Pressure Transducer Failure – 1 Circuit A Economizer Pressure Transducer Failure – 2 Circuit B Economizer Pressure Transducer Failure – 1 Circuit B Economizer Pressure Transducer Failure – 2 Circuit A Loss of Charge Circuit B Loss of Charge T075 T076 Alert Alert Reset disabled. damaged cable/wire. damaged cable/wire. poor connection to MBB.9% or less than 6%.Table 32  Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ ALERT CODE T071 ALARM OR DESCRIPTION ALERT Alert Cir. Automatic Thermistor failure.9% or less than 6%. Automatic Thermistor failure. Automatic Transducer failure. Automatic Transducer failure. Discharge pressure reading < 10 psig for 30 seconds. Automatic Thermistor failure. poor connection to SCB. Automatic Thermistor failure. 45 . damaged cable/wire. Voltage ratio more than 98.9% or less than 6%. Automatic Thermistor failure. Voltage ratio more than 99. Automatic Transducer failure. or wiring damage/error. or wiring damage/error. wiring error or sensor not installed. Automatic Thermistor failure. B Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure WHY WAS THIS ALARM GENERATED? Average of compressor B1 and B2 (if installed) sensors > 210° F for 30 seconds. Automatic Transducer failure. poor connection to SCB. or wiring damage/error. Automatic Transducer failure. Circuit A shut down T077 T078 Alert Alert T079 T090 Alert Alert T091 T092 Alert Alert Circuit B shut down Circuit A shut down T093 T094 Alert Alert Circuit B shut down Comp A1 shut down T095 Alert Comp A2 shut down T096 T097 Alert Alert Comp B1 shut down Comp B2 shut down T098 Alert Alert Circuit A shut down Circuit A shut down T099 Alert Alert Circuit B shut down Circuit B shut down T110 T111 Alert Alert Circuit A shut down Circuit B shut down Automatic Thermistor failure. damaged cable/wire.9% or less than 6%. wiring error or motor cooling solenoid failure. or wiring damage/error.9% or less than 0. poor connection to MBB. damaged cable/wire. or wiring damage/error. or wiring damage/error. Voltage ratio more than 99.9% or less than 6%. Thermistor outside range of – Comp A1 shut down 40 to 240° F (–40 to 116° C) Thermistor outside range of – Comp A2 shut down 40 to 240° F (–40 to 116° C) Thermistor outside range of – Comp B1 shut down 40 to 240° F (–40 to 116° C) Thermistor outside range of – Comp B2 shut down 40 to 240° F (–40 to 116° C) Thermistor outside range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C) Voltage ratio more than 98. Breaks Dual Chiller link if set up for Parallel operation. wiring error or sensor not installed. Economizer pressure is more than 12 psi (83 kPa) less than suction pressure. Voltage ratio more than 99. wiring error or motor cooling solenoid failure. Voltage ratio more than 99. Runs –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C) under normal control/ set points. wiring error or motor cooling solenoid failure. wiring error or motor cooling solenoid failure. or wiring damage/error. or wiring damage/error.9% or less than 0. Manual Refrigerant leak or transducer failure. Voltage ratio more than 98. poor connection to SCB.9% or less than 0. Automatic Transducer failure.5% for 50 seconds. Voltage ratio more than 98. wiring error or motor cooling solenoid failure.9% or less than 6%. poor connection to MBB. Automatic Transducer failure. Thermistor outside range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C) ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL Circuit B shut down RESET METHOD Manual PROBABLE CAUSE Thermistor failure. Voltage ratio more than 98. damaged cable/wire. poor connection to MBB. Discharge pressure reading < 10 psig for 30 seconds. wiring error or sensor not installed.5% for 50 seconds. Manual Suction and Economizer pressure connectors/wiring are swapped. Economizer pressure is more than 12 psi (83 kPa) less than suction pressure. Automatic Transducer failure. Manual Refrigerant leak or transducer failure. or wiring damage/error.9% or less than 0.5% for 50 seconds. Manual Suction and Economizer pressure connectors/wiring are swapped. damaged cable/wire. damaged cable/wire. poor connection to SCB. poor connection to SCB. or wiring damage/error. poor connection to SCB.

faulty expansion valve. Level switch input open.8° C) SCT > MCT_SP + 5° F 2. Superheat < 5° F (2. or Economizer TXV.3° C) or more below the brine freeze point for 3 minutes or 28° F below brine freeze point for 2 minutes. faulty expansion valve.6° C) in 6 minutes. failed control module. Circuit B shut down after 4th failure in 18 hours. For water cooled chillers only. 46 . Oil filter pressure drop (FD. if SCT < 34 F (1. Faulty thermistor. After first 90 seconds.3° C) or more below the brine freeze point for 3 minutes or 28° F below brine freeze point for 2 minutes. transducer. wiring error. Manual T136 Alert Circuit B Failure to Pump Out Manual Faulty transducer or EXV T137 Alert Circuit A Low Discharge Superheat Circuit B Low Discharge Superheat Compressor A1 – High Oil Filter Pressure Drop Manual T138 Alert Manual T140 Alert None Manual Faulty thermistor. Chiller shut down. configured for watercooled condenser. plugged strainer. if SCT < 34 F (1. ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL Circuit A shut down RESET METHOD Manual† PROBABLE CAUSE Low refrigerant charge.Table 32  Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ ALARM OR DESCRIPTION ALERT CODE ALERT T120 Alert Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature T121 Alert Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature WHY WAS THIS ALARM GENERATED? SST reads 6° F (3.3° C) less than Brine Freeze. refrigerant leak. Motor cooling solenoid stuck open.A2) exceeds 25 psig (172 kPa) for water-cooled units or 30 psig (207 kPa) for air-cooled and split system units. or SST is not less than 10 F (–12 C). With EXV closed. or SST is not less than 10 F (–12 C). wiring error. Circuit B shut down. T141 Alert Compressor A2 – High Oil Filter Pressure Drop None Manual Filter change needed to prevent machine from shutting down. or Economizer TXV. Automatic Failed/bad discharge pressure transducer. SST reads 6° F (3.8 C) and EXV < 1% for 5 minutes. failed switch. or low water flow. SST did not None drop 10° F (5.8° C) Circuit A shut down after 4th failure in 18 hours.8 C) and EXV < 1% for 5 minutes. low/restricted condenser air/water flow†† Automatic** Faulty transducer/high pressure switch. Circuit B shut down Manual† T122 T123 Alert Alert T124 T125 Alert Alert Circuit A High Saturated Suction Temperature Circuit B High Saturated Suction Temperature Circuit A Low Oil Level/Flow Circuit B Low Oil Level/Flow Circuit A High Discharge Pressure Circuit B High Discharge Pressure Circuit A Condenser Freeze Protection (alarm ignored for brine chillers) Circuit B Condenser Freeze Protection (alarm ignored for brine chillers) Circuit A Failure to Pump Out Circuit A shut down Circuit B shut down Manual Manual Faulty expansion valve or transducer. Circuit A shut down. Filter change needed to prevent machine from shutting down. plugged strainer. A128 Alarm For water cooled chillers only. EXV. EXV. Faulty expansion valve or transducer. Circuit B shut down A129 Alarm T135 Alert Low oil level.3° C) less than Brine Freeze. or low water flow. or SST is not 6° F (3. configured for watercooled condenser. failed switch. or SST is not 6° F (3.1° C) Turns condenser pump On if Chiller is Off. Automatic** Faulty transducer/high pressure switch. With EXV closed.8° C) for Circuit A shut down 10 minutes.A1) exceeds 25 psig 172 kPa) for water-cooled units or 30 psig (207 kPa) for air-cooled and split system units. After first 90 seconds. SST > 55 F (12. Chiller shut down. low/restricted condenser air/water flow†† Automatic Failed/bad discharge pressure transducer. Oil filter pressure drop (FD. Manual Faulty transducer or EXV. Level switch input open. Superheat < 5° F (2. SST > 55 F (12. Manual Low oil level.1° C) Turns condenser pump On if Chiller is Off. failed control module. Motor cooling solenoid stuck open.6° C) in 6 minutes. refrigerant leak. transducer. T126 T127 Alert Alert SCT > MCT_SP + 5° F (2. Low refrigerant charge. SST did not None drop 10° F (5.8° C) for 10 minutes.

Loss of CommunicaMBB has lost communication EMM options are Automatic Failed EMM. wrong address. Chiller shut down. wiring Input Failure to EMM less than 2 mA or Normal set point used. failed Protection Module 1 tion Module 1 transformer.an error on critical data. T143 Alert Compressor B2 – Oil filter pressure drop High Oil Filter Pressure (FD. 47 . None Manual Filter change needed to prevent machine from shutting down. wrong address. A152 Alarm Circuit A&B Off for Control has shut down both Alerts. Manual Re-download the software of consider replacement of the Main Base Board.Internal diagnostic has found age Failure Error an error on critical data.B1) exceeds 25 psig Drop (172 kPa) for water-cooled units or 30 psig (207 kPa) for air-cooled and split system units. wiring tion with Screw Chiller with the Screw Chiller Module error. loss of signal greater than 22 mA. Manual Manual Manual A172 Alarm T173 Alert T174 T175 Alert Alert T176 T177 Alert Alert A178 A180 Alarm Alarm A181 Alarm Automatic Failed EXV Module. Loss of Condenser Flow switch not closed within Flow 1 minute after pump is started or if flow switch opens during normal operation for > 10 sec. Replace Main Base Board. Normal set error. Loss of CommunicaMBB has lost communication Chiller shut down. wrong configuoption is installed. wiring Out of Range to EMM less than 2 mA or abled. Automatic Faulty signal generator. wiring tion with Compressor with the Compressor Protecerror. Automatic Failed CCP Module. Correction needed. wiring error.Internal failure of the ware Failure EEPROM. Replace Main Base Board. A155 Alarm Serial EEPROM Stor. None Defaults to occupied Machine shuts down Machine shuts down CCN/ Network command Automatic Manual Configuration error. 4-20 mA Cool Setpoint If configured and input signal Function disabled. 4-20 mA Demand Limit If configured and input signal Reset function disAutomatic Faulty signal generator. wiring Input Failure to EMM less than 2 mA or Normal set point used. ration. wiring error. 4-20 mA Heat Setpoint If configured and input signal Function disabled. Loss of CommunicaMBB has lost communication Chiller shut down. failed Protection Module 2 tion Module 2 transformer. point used. loose connections. circuits due to alerts.Table 32  Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ALERT ALARM OR WHY WAS THIS DESCRIPTION CODE ALERT ALARM GENERATED? T142 Alert Compressor B1 – Oil filter pressure drop High Oil Filter Pressure (FD. Automatic Faulty signal generator. failed transformer. loss of signal greater than 22 mA. loss of signal greater than 22 mA. agement Module ment Module when this wrong address. A156 A157 A159 Alarm Alarm Alarm Critical Serial Internal diagnostic has found EEPROM Storage Fail. Automatic Time clock not initialized or board fail Manual Replace Main Base Board. loose connections. wrong address. A154 Alarm Serial EEPROM Hard. loose connections. See Table 33. Automatic Failed SCB Module. failed Module transformer. loose tion with Energy Man. Automatic Failed CCP Module. Loss of CommunicaMBB has lost communication tion with EXV Module with the EXV Module ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL None RESET PROBABLE CAUSE METHOD Manual Filter change needed to prevent machine from shutting down. wrong address. T153 Alert Real Time Clock Hard. error.Time not advancing on ware Failure board. Low condenser water flow. Chiller shut down Chiller cannot start. wiring tion with Compressor with the Compressor Protecerror. wiring Input Out of Range to EMM less than 2 mA or abled. loose connections. Automatic Check individual alarms.with the Energy Managedisabled.B2) exceeds 25 psig Drop (172 kPa) for water-cooled units or 30 psig (207 kPa) for air-cooled and split system units. ure Error A/D Hardware Failure A/D converter on the MBB has failed. failed condenser pump. 4-20 mA Reset Input If configured and input signal Reset function disAutomatic Faulty signal generator. Unit down. connections. point used. failed transformer. Machine shuts down Machine shuts down Chiller shut down. Loss of CommunicaMBB has lost communication Chiller shut down. Normal set error loss of signal greater than 22 mA. A150 Alarm Unit is in Emergency CCN command received to Stop shut unit down A151 Alarm Illegal Configuration-x Illegal Configuration has been entered. error.

faulty liquid line solenoid valve. Pump turned off. or flow switch Affected compressors are shut down. 0° F (–18 C) and the rate of change is negative (in 5 second increments). loss of control power on master chiller. welded contacts. Automatic Failed Master MBB Module. Circuit A compressor is shut down. A202 Alarm T203 Alert T204 Alert T205 Alert T206 Alert A207 Alarm T210 Alert The master chiller (when configured) has lost communication with the slave chiller for 3 minutes. wiring error. Sub-mode SERV) to YES to reset alert. A951 Alarm T998 Alert No communications have been received by the MBB within 5 minutes of transmission. closed liquid line service valve. consider replaceMBB ment of the CCP module if alerts continue. Between 40 and 90 seconds of runtime. Freeze point is the brine freeze setpoint +2 F (1. flow Leave Cooler pump on. Manual Loose connections. Cooler pump enabled but mot controlling pump Automatic Failed Slave MBB Module. low water/brine flow. Slave chiller runs as a stand-alone chiller. Runs under own control. Master and Slave The master chiller (when conChiller with Same figured) has determined that Address its address is the same as the slave address. frequent power interruptions. closed discharge line valve. 48 . faulty EXV/Economizer operation. Winterization SCT<32 F in either circuit Required Failure of cooler pump relay or interlock. wrong address CSM forces removed. CCP has experienced too many power cycles*** CCP has experienced too many power cycles*** Interlock did not close within 5 minutes after chiller was enabled Interlock opened for at least 10 seconds during operation and does not close within 5 min. Automatic Wiring faulty or module failure Manual T999 Alert Loss of Refrigerant Flow in Circuit B. faulty EXV/Economizer operation.Table 32  Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ALERT ALARM OR DESCRIPTION CODE ALERT T182 Alert Compressor Protection Module 1 Internal Diagnostic T183 Alert Compressor Protection Module 2 Internal Diagnostic Compressor Protection Module 1 Compressor Protection Module 2 Cooler Pump Interlock Failed at Start-Up Cooler Pump Interlock Opened Unexpectedly Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump OFF Loss of Communication with the Slave Chiller WHY WAS THIS ALARM GENERATED? The ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module has generated an internal diagnostic alert. if SST is less than shut down. After winterization has been completed.Cooler EWT or LWT less than tion freeze point. cooler pump interlock. Dual chiller control disabled. Automatic Building load greater than unit capacity. Automatic Master and Slave chiller must have different addresses. Refrigerant restriction such as closed suction service valve.The slave chiller (when contion with the Master figured) has lost communicaChiller tion with the master chiller for 3 minutes. closed discharge line valve. Master chiller runs as a stand-alone chiller. SST is less than 0° F (–18 C) and the rate of change is negative (in 5 second increments). or compressor fault. frequent power interruptions. loss of control power on slave chiller. Manual Failure of cooler pump. wiring error. None. wiring error. The ComfortLink Compressor Protection Module has generated an internal diagnostic alert. Manual Loose connections. Unit prevented from starting. Manual on Eliminate EMI sources around CCP and the module.DNE Winterization Performed (Configuration Mode. plugged refrigerant strainer. Interlock closed when pump relay is off ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL Affected compressors are shut down. configure W. or flow switch Manual Failure of cooler pump. Check for other alarms or alerts. closed liquid line service valve. plugged refrigerant strainer. faulty liquid line solenoid valve. Between 40 and 90 seconds Circuit B compressor is of runtime. loose connections. RESET PROBABLE CAUSE METHOD Manual on Eliminate EMI sources around CCP and the module. Automatic† Faulty thermistor. Loss of Communica. Manual Refrigerant restriction such as closed suction service valve. consider replaceMBB ment of the CCP module if alerts continue. Manual T950 Alert Loss of Communication with WSM Loss of Communication with Chillervisor System Manager (CSM) Loss of Refrigerant Flow in Circuit A.1 C). loose concontrol. Pump turned off. wrong address. Runs under own failed transformer. nection plug. loose connections. T184 T185 A200 A201 Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm` Chiller shut down Chiller shut down Chiller shut down. Automatic Failed module. wrong address. WSM forces removed. low water Chiller shut down. No communications have been received by the MBB within 5 minutes of last transmission. Turn Cooler pump on if Chiller is off. None Manual Winterization must be performed to avoid cooler freezeup. cooler pump interlock. High Leaving Chilled LCW read > LCW Delta Alarm Water Temperature limit and total capacity is 100% and current LCW > LCW reading 1 minute ago Cooler Freeze Protec. Chiller shut down. Cooler pump remains off.

235 x (Pd – Ps) + 0. Alert criteria is based on operating time.588 b. 20) is defined as: a. Low Oil Pressure Alert Criteria and Set Points Where: Pd = Discharge Pressure. Oil Set Point 2 (see Fig. Oil Set Point 1 is defined as: a.A1 and DO.] c. (Po – Ps) < Oil Set Point 2 for 15 seconds. On time less than 5 seconds oil pressure is ignored.0 x (Pd – Ps) – 220. the alert will be generated if the following condition is true for 3 consecutive readings: (Po – Pe) < [15 psig/120 sec. 3.A) for Circuit A and DO. PSI Fig. On time between 5 and 120 seconds. If (Pd – Ps) > 125 and < 165. ††Note that the high-pressure switch should trip before this alert is generated.LEGEND AND NOTES FOR TABLE A/D CCN CCP EMI EMM EWT EXV HPS LCW LWT MBB MCT_SP MTA SCB SCT SST TXV WSM — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — LEGEND Analog to Digital Converter Carrier Comfort Network ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Electromagnetic Interference Energy Management Module Entering Water Temperature Electronic Expansion Valve High-Pressure Switch Leaving Chilled Water Leaving Water Temperature Main Base Board Maximum Condensing Temperature Set Point Compressor Must Trip Amps Screw Compressor Board Saturated Condensing Temperature Saturated Suction Temperature Thermostatic Expansion Valve Water-System Manager NOTES: 1. 180 160 140 OIL PRESSURE SET POINT 2. Po = Oil Pressure and Pe = Economizer Pressure Two oil set points are used by the control for the Low Oil Pressure alert trip. then Oil Set Point 1 = 15 psig. If Ps < 35.] x [Compressor Run Time in sec.A2 (Pressures mode under sub-mode PRC.B) for Circuit B.6364 x (Pd – Ps) + 5. then Oil Set Point 2 = 2.0 c. If (Pd – Ps) ≥ 165 then Oil Set Point 2 = 0. then Oil Set Point 1 = 12. (Po – Pe) is the Oil pressure differential displayed as items DO. If Ps > 35 and < 51.0 2. Verify first that the problem is not a wiring error before using backup thermistor. If Ps ≥ 51.5 psig. †Manual reset after 1 hour from occurrence. a.S or HPCT Selection Air-cooled chiller with Low Temperature Brine fluid (FLUD = Low Brine) Water-cooled chiller configured for air-cooled head pressure control type (HPCT) Air-cooled chiller with condenser pump control enabled Air-cooled chiller with condenser fluid sensors enabled 49 . b.B2 (Pressures mode under submode PRC. *Compressors are equipped with 2 motor winding temperature thermistors. ***Maximum 5 power losses at CCP in one hour. then Oil Set Point 1 = 10 psig. **Reset automatic first time. b. manual if repeated on the same date. Ps = Suction Pressure. If (Pd – Ps) < 125. 20 — Oil Pressure Set Point 2 Calculation Table 33 — Illegal Configurations (Alarm A151) CODE NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ILLEGAL CONFIGURATION DESCRIPTION Unit type outside range of 1-5 Number of compressors in Circuit A outside range of 1-2 Number of compressors in Circuit B outside range of 1-2 Invalid FAN. then Oil Set Point 2 = 0. Check HPS operation if this alert is generated.B1 and DO. c. On time greater than 120 seconds the alarm will be generated if one of the following conditions is true: (Po – Pe) < Oil Set Point 1 for 15 seconds. PSIG 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 125 130 140 150 160 165 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 (DISCHARGE-SUCTION) PRESSURE.

Move the pointer down to the OUTS sub-mode and press ENTER . Connect positive test lead to red wire (EXV-J6 terminal 3 for Circuit A. Put the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch in the Off position. raising the sleeve closer to the motor. Commanding the valve to either 0% or 100% will add 7500 steps to the move. Remove any remaining refrigerant from the system low side using proper reclaiming techniques. Move the pointer to item EXV. Remove the EXV module plug (J6 for Circuit A. For example. The compressor will complete its pumpout routine and turn off. During the next several seconds. press ENTER . Using the Service Test procedure above. Press ENTER . A sight glass is located on the valve body to verify that the sleeve is moving to expose/cover slots in the orifice. The Service Test mode is now enabled.B’. Make sure they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV driver and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed. If the reading is correct. Digital voltmeters will average this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. yet does not operate as described above. remove the connector to the valve and recheck. Press ENTER again twice if necessary to confirm this. To close the valve. The EXV motor moves at 300 steps per second. 2. Close the liquid line service valve of the circuit to be checked. Carefully unscrew the large retaining nut securing the motor portion to the body of the valve making sure the EXV plug is still connected.4 and 5 in succession (plug J6 for Circuit A. The resistance should be 75 ohms ± 7. If it is believed that the valve is not working properly. The display will be: > TEST OFF OUTS COMP Press ENTER (password entry may be required) and use to change ‘OFF’ to ‘ON’. Use to select 100% valve position (hold for quick movement) and press ENTER . carefully connect the negative test lead to pins 1. Drain oil from cooler using Schrader port in cooler inlet line. DO NOT short meter leads together or pin 3 to any other pin as board damage will occur. Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test mode. If the valve is properly connected to the processor and receiving correct signals.B as needed. Fig. selecting 100% would allow 75 seconds for the dc voltage to be checked (15. The actuator should knock when it reaches the bottom of its stroke. 4. Press ENTER and select 0% to close the valve. 1. Check EXV motor operation first. select 0% with and press ENTER . the expansion valve and EXV wiring should be checked. Press ESCAPE on the Navigator until ‘Select a menu item’ appears on the display. Press ENTER to make the valve position of 0% flash. 50 INSPECTING/OPENING ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement O-ring before opening EXV. If it remains constant at a voltage other than 6 VDC or shows 0 volts. Turn off the line voltage power supply to the compressors and control circuit power. Switch the EOR switch to the Enable position.xx) for the circuit. if the EXV is fully closed. Enter the appropriate EXV test step under the OUTS submode in the Service Test mode. 21). Let compressor run until gage on suction pressure port reads 10 psig. Switch the Enable/Off/ Remote (EOR) Contact switch to the Off position. plug J7 for Circuit B). A hard knocking should be felt from the actuator when it reaches the top of its stroke (can be heard if surroundings are relatively quiet). The EXV lead screw and sleeve will come off with the motor portion of the device.5 ohms.EXV Troubleshooting Procedure — Follow steps below to diagnose and correct EXV/Economizer problems. If a problem still exists. move the valve output under test to 100%. continue with the checkout procedure below: Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on the EXV module (see Fig. Press ENTER and the valve position will flash. The motor should be turning the lead screw and sleeve counterclockwise. Press ENTER . enter the Service Test mode and change the sub-mode TEST from ‘OFF’ to ‘ON’. Lead screw movement should be smooth and uniform from fully closed to fully open position. 2. Using the Navigator. the following steps must be performed. Check the EXV terminal strip and interconnecting wiring.A or EXV. Set meter to approximately 20 vdc. Under the COMP sub-mode. 21 — EXV Cable Connections to EXV Module . To check the physical operation of an EXV. Immediately after the compressor shuts off. J7 for Circuit B) and check the resistance of the two windings between pins 1 and 2 for one winding and pins 4 and 5 for the other winding (see Fig. The expansion valve motor is hermetically sealed inside the top portion of the valve. Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Press ENTER .A’ or ‘EXV. enable the desired compressor (CC. and ENTER to turn the compressor off. You should be able to feel the actuator moving by placing your hand on the EXV. Do not reuse O-rings. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin terminals. Check the 4 position DIP switch on the board (all switches should be set to On). 21). 1. Check color coding and wire connections. Observe the operation of the lead screw and sleeve. 3.2.000/300 + 7500/300). Switch the EOR switch to Enable. replace the EXV module. close the discharge valve. the sealed motor portion of the valve should be replaced. Locate the desired item ‘EXV. EXV-J7 terminal 3 for Circuit B). Press and hold until 100% is displayed and press ENTER . use to select 0% and press ENTER again to check open to closed operation.

wrap valve with a wet cloth to prevent excessive heat from damaging internal components. NOTE (non-economized units only): Frosting of valve is normal during compressor test steps and at initial start-up. If operating problems persist after economizer replacement. 118-350 and 30HXA. the heat exchanger must be replaced. Remove the four 8mm (1/4-20 on 30HX units) nuts holding the heat exchanger to the brackets. Recheck all wiring connections and voltage signals. suction pressure transducer. Lines should be soldered using silver as the soldering material with a minimum of 45% silver. If a refrigerant leak is detected. The TXV bulb is secured to the side of the economizer outlet tube. discharge gas thermistor or intermittent connections between the processor board terminals and EXV plug. 23 — Typical 30GXN. If valve is to be replaced.R108. 7. Reclaim any refrigerant remaining in the low side. Check for plugged strainer(s) or restricted metering slots in the EXV (see Fig.C161-271 models. Keep the temperature below 1472 F (800 C) under normal soldering conditions (no vacuum) to prevent the copper solder of the brazed plate heat exchanger from changing its structure. Clean or replace valve if necessary. Formation of ice or frost on lower body of electronic expansion valve is one symptom of restricted metering slots. However. 6. Check that the replacement heat exchanger is the same as the original heat exchanger. 22 — Brazed-Plate Economizer STRAIN RELIEF SEAL CAP MOTOR ASSEMBLY SLEEVE SIGHTGLASS ORIFICE Torque Specifications ITEM Sight Glass Seal Cap ft-lb 15-25 18-22 n-m 20-34 24-30 Fig. Brazed-plate heat exchangers cannot be repaired if they develop a leak. Un-solder the refrigerant-in and refrigerant-out connections.GXR. Insulate the new heat exchanger to match the original and attach to the mounting brackets with the hardware removed in Step 3. they may be due to a bad liquid level sensor. Braze equalizer line in place if removed. Flow through the TXV is enabled only when the circuit is fully loaded for 30GXN. Failure to do so can result in internal or external leakage at the connections which cannot be repaired. EQUALIZER LINE MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID TXV SOLENOID TXV BULB ECONOMIZER TXV BRAZED PLATE ECONOMIZER EXV COOLER FEED Fig. NOTE: The brazed-plate heat economizers are not serviceable. Using proper techniques.R models.4 C). 23). See Fig. 3. 5. 2. Frost should dissipate after 5 to 10 minutes operation in a system that is operating properly. 8. Other possible causes of improper refrigerant flow control could be restrictions in the liquid line. Attach economizer and motor cooling solenoid coils to their bodies if removed. move the refrigerant remaining in the circuit to the high side and close the discharge and liquid line ball valves. To replace a brazed-plate heat exchanger the following steps must be performed: 1. Check for leaks.BRAZED-PLATE ECONOMIZERS — Brazed-plate economizers are factory-installed in each circuit on 30GXN. 22 for typical piping arrangement. 4. Save the nuts and hardware. Carefully braze the refrigerant lines to the connections on the heat exchanger. frost or ice formation is normally expected when leaving fluid temperature from the cooler is below 40 F (4. Dehydrate and recharge the circuit. A TXV is included to meter the flow of refrigerant to the economizer port of the compressor.HX EXV 51 .

750 0. Up to 10% of the total number of tubes can be plugged before retubing is necessary. Apply torque in one-third steps until required torque is reached. This material is intended to “wick” into the area of the tube that is not rolled into the tube sheet. *Order directly from: Elliott Tube Company. . and prevent fluid from accumulating between the tube and the tube sheet. tube rolling tools are required: 113123 Expander Assembly 213123 Mandrel 2134123 Cage 2115122 Rolls Place one drop of Loctite No. Torque all bolts to the following specification and in the sequence shown in Fig.-lb (5.20 19. Install all bolts finger tight. Inspect the entering and leaving thermistors for signs of corrosion or scale. . The number of tubes plugged determines how soon the cooler must be retubed. tube sheets are exposed showing the ends of tubes. . Table 35 — Tube Diameters ITEM Tube sheet hole diameter: Tube OD Tube ID after rolling: (includes expansion due to clearance) INCHES 0. . .SERVICE Servicing Coolers and Condensers — When cooler heads and partition plates are removed. RETUBING (See Table 35) — When retubing is to be done. using tube plugs will not correct problem. always check the condition of the O-ring(s) first.R and 30HX coolers and 30HX condensers can be removed. . PIN RING TUBE SHEET PIN Use extreme care when installing plugs to prevent damage to the tube sheet section between the holes. 5. The O-ring should be replaced if there are any visible signs of deterioration. 3/ -in. 24 — Tube Plugging TIGHTENING COOLER/CONDENSER HEAD BOLTS O-Ring Preparation — When reassembling cooler and condenser heads. and will indicate whether water treatment is adequate in the chilled water/brine circuit. Apply a thin film of grease to the O-ring before installation. Tube condition in the cooler will determine the scheduled frequency for cleaning. Water flows inside the tubes. . Ohio.R and 30HX heat exchangers. . Load all bolts to each one-third step before proceeding to the next one-third step. 675** “N”** RING TUBE PIN AND RING INSTALLED Fig. Loss of unit capacity and efficiency as well as increased pump power will result from plugging tubes. Diameter Perimeter and 4 Plate Bolts. Care must be taken as the tubes are rolled in the center tube sheet and require special pulling tools. Inspecting/Cleaning Heat Exchangers COOLERS — Inspect and clean the cooler tubes at the end of the first operating season. Dayton.HX units use a flooded cooler design. A 7% crush can be achieved by setting the torque on the gun at 48 to 50 in. The same components for plugging and rolling tubes can be used for all coolers and 30HXC condensers. Replace the sensor if corroded or remove any scale if found. . 2.667 MILLIMETERS 19. This will apply even pressure to the O-ring.650 to 0. **Can be obtained locally. Contact your Carrier representative for assistance. . †Measure tube ID before ordering. Because these tubes have internal ridges. 3. . TUBE PLUGGING — A leaky tube in one circuit can be plugged until retubing can be done. New tubes must also be rolled into the center tube sheet to prevent circuit-to-circuit refrigerant leakage. cuts or damage.51 to 16. . . . Figure 24 shows an Elliott tube plug and a crosssectional view of a plug in place. Restore water/brine flow and check for leaks. If tube failure is in both circuits. .4 to 5. . This will aid in holding the O-ring into the groove while the head is installed. No less than one hour later. 25. Follow numbered sequence shown for head type being installed. . . . obtain service of qualified personnel experienced in boiler maintenance and repair. Failed tubes should be replaced as soon as possible. 52 . All tubes in the 30GXN. 675 or equivalent on top of tube prior to rolling. . . Replace insulation (on cooler heads only). Table 34 — Plugging Components COMPONENTS FOR PLUGGING For Tubes Brass Pin Brass Ring For Holes without Tubes Brass Pin Brass Ring Roller Extension Loctite Locquic PART NUMBER 853103-1* 853002-640* or -657† 853103-1A* 853002-738* S82-112/11 No. The 30GXN. 4. retighten all bolts to required torque values. Fix leaks as necessary. A 7% crush is recommended when rolling replacement tubes into the tubesheet. . .756 0. a rotary-type tube cleaning system is necessary to fully clean the tubes. .GXR. . Most standard procedures can be followed when retubing the 30GXN.94 NOTE: Tubes replaced along heat exchanger head partitions must be flush with tube sheet.6 N-m). . . The following Elliott Co.05 16. See Table 34. . 200 to 225 ft-lb (271 to 305 N-m) 1. .

fresh water. Hard scale may require chemical treatment for its prevention or removal. Contact your Carrier representative to obtain these brushes. Higher than normal condenser pressures. and algae. usually indicate dirty tubes or air in the machine. clean the coils with a vacuum cleaner. If this reading is more than what the design difference is supposed to be. or algae. Water must be within design flow limits. If the refrigeration log indicates a rise above normal condenser pressures. the refrigerant will leak out. Replace the sensor if corroded or remove any scale if found. In this type of application. Elimination of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. Do not use wire brushes. air usually will not enter the machine. cleaning and maintenance of E-coated aluminum or copper fin coils: Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations — Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. or a bristle brush (not wire). scaling. together with inability to reach full refrigeration load. and more often if the water is contaminated. clean and treated to ensure proper machine performance and reduce the potential of tubing damage due to corrosion. Consult a water treatment specialist for proper treatment procedures. then the condenser tubes may be dirty. Carrier assumes no responsibility for chiller or condenser damage resulting from untreated or improperly treated water. CLEANING E-COATED COILS — Follow the outlined procedure below for proper care. scaling. compressed air. Clean the condenser tubes with a rotary tube cleaning system at regular intervals. erosion. Do not use high-pressure water or air to clean coils — fin damage may result. During the tube cleaning process. or water flow may be incorrect. use brushes specially designed to avoid scraping and scratching the tube wall.R only) COIL CLEANING — For standard aluminum. Condenser Coils (30GXN. copper and pre-coated aluminum fin coils.10 6 3 9 5 NOZZLE 2 3 6 11 9 5 10 12 2 1 8 12 11 7 4 1 8 14 13 7 4 10 6 3 9 5 2 NOZZLE 3 6 11 9 5 10 12 2 1 8 12 14 7 4 1 8 16 14 7 4 13 11 13 15 Fig. 53 . The services of a qualified water treatment specialist should be obtained to develop and monitor a treatment program. Water Treatment — Untreated or improperly treated water may result in corrosion. all accumulations of dirt should be cleaned off the coil. check the condenser refrigerant temperature against the leaving condenser water temperature. erosion. Due to the pressure in the R-134a system. the tubes may be subject to contamination and scale. Inspect the entering and leaving condenser water thermistors (if installed) for signs of corrosion or scale. Units installed in corrosive environments should have coil cleaning as part of a planned maintenance schedule. 25 — Cooler and Condenser Head Recommended Bolt Torque Sequence CONDENSERS (30HX Only) — Since this water circuit is usually an open-type system.

If there is dirt below the surface of the coil. 2. Surface loaded fibers must be completely removed prior to using low velocity clean water rinse. 7. Reapply cleaner as needed to ensure 10-minute saturation is achieved. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a low velocity garden hose being careful not to bend fins. hypoallergenic.Remove Surface Loaded Fibers — Surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed with a vacuum cleaner. Coil surfaces can be easily damaged (fin edges bent over) if the tool is applied across the fins. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean water using downward rinsing motion of water spray nozzle. It is recommended that all coils. 1. Routine Cleaning of Coil Surfaces — Monthly cleaning with Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner is essential to extend the life of coils. household bleach or acid cleaners should not be used to clean outdoor or indoors coils of any kind. the fans should be positioned as shown in Fig. 3. However. Periodic Clean Water Rinse — A periodic clean water rinse is very beneficial for coils that are applied in coastal or industrial environments. The optimum solution temperature is 100 F. 4. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned areas. Thoroughly apply Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including finned area. Harsh Chemical and Acid Cleaners — Harsh chemical. Tighten setscrews to 14 ± 1 ft-lb (18 ± 1. If the fan motor must be removed for service or replacement. up-and-down motion. Avoid spraying in horizontal pattern to minimize potential for fin damage. Condenser Fans (30GXN. painted metal surfaces or insulation. and fan guard. USDA accepted biodegradable and 100% ecologically safe agent that will not harm the coil or surrounding components such as electrical wiring. Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner is non-flammable. NOTE: DO NOT USE water in excess of 130 F as the enzymatic activity will be destroyed. PLASTIC FAN PROPELLER CLEARANCE OF 0.6 mm) ABOVE FAN DECK SURFACE Fig. pre-coated. Monthly cleaning as described below is recommended. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing. and marine life. including standard aluminum. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacuum cleaner as described above. This will make cleaning efforts more difficult. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduced durability in the environment. Reduced unit performance or nuisance unit shutdown may occur. Check for proper rotation of the fan(s) once reinstalled (clockwise for high static and counterclockwise for standard viewed from above).15 IN.25 INCHES (6.3 N-m). Coil cleaning should be part of the units regularly scheduled maintenance procedures to ensure long life of the coil. tube sheets and coil headers. a soft brush may be used. 26 — Condenser Fan Position (Standard Fan) MOTOR SHAFT FAN HUB HIGH-STATIC FAN PROPELLER 2. garden hose or compressed air should never be used to clean a coil. non-bacterial. 26 or 27.R Only) — Each fan is supported by a formed wire mount bolted to a fan deck and covered with a wire guard. In either case. If necessary to reverse. Use of non-recommended coil cleaners is strongly discouraged since coil and unit durability could be affected. NOTE: Use of a water stream. High Velocity Water or Compressed Air — High velocity water from a pressure washer. The exposed end of the fan motor shaft is protected from weather by grease.4 MM) FOR STANDARD CONDENSER FANS FAN DECK SURFACE FAN ORIFICE Fig. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning solution for 10 minutes. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and apply cleaner with a vertical. the tool should be applied in the direction of the fins. switch leads at contactor(s) in control box. be sure to regrease fan shaft and reinstall fan cover. Mix Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner in a 21/2 gallon garden sprayer according to the instructions included with the Enzyme Cleaner. copper/copper or E-coated coils are cleaned with the Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner as described below. These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out of the coil and can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube interface where dissimilar materials are in contact. 27 — Condenser Fan Position (High-Static Fan) 54 . For proper performance. 5. FAN DECK SURFACE POSITION TOP OF HIGH STATIC FAN PROPELLER HUB 2. 6. use the Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner as described above. Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Application Equipment • 21/2 Gallon Garden Sprayer • Water Rinse with Low Velocity Spray Nozzle Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Application Instructions — Although Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner is harmless to humans.15 INCHES (54. Protect fins from damage from the spray nozzle. such as a garden hose. If a vacuum cleaner is not available. Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughly cleaned. against a surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt into the coil. retaining clips. it is very important that the water rinse is made with very low velocity water stream to avoid damaging the fin edges. proper eye protection such as safety glasses is recommended during mixing and application. animals. The force of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and increase airside pressure drop.

A’ or ‘CIR. Verify adequate charge by continuing to run at full load with 42 to 46 F (5. Indication of low charge on a system: NOTE: To check for low refrigerant charge on a 30HXC unit. With the circuit running at full load. To add charge to the 30GX and 30HXA systems: 1. This should be done slowly to avoid overcharging the unit. Repeat Step 5 as needed allowing the system to stabilize between each charge addition. see the instructions for using the Service Test feature in Table 13 of this manual. 3. Slowly add enough additional liquid charge to ensure a clear sight glass. see the instructions for using the Service Test feature in Table 13 of this manual. It may be necessary to use the Service Test feature to force the circuit into a full-load condition. Add 5 lb (2. then the circuit is adequately charged. The circuit is fully loaded if its compressor and loader relays all show ‘On’. To check whether circuit A is fully loaded.4 C) saturated condensing temperature (198 psig [1366 kPa]).6 to 7. 6.Refrigerant Charging/Adding Charge IMPORTANT: These units are designed for use with R-134a only.8 C). then begin adding charge.B’ (Outputs mode) and is shown as items ‘EXV.6 to 7. The circuit is fully loaded if its compressor and loader relays all show ‘On’.7 C) saturated condensing temperature (185 psig [1276 kPa]). Allow the unit to stabilize.3 to 7. For 30HXA chillers. observe the refrigerant in the liquid line sight glass. Allow the unit to stabilize. The EXV Percent Open should be between 40 and 60%. 2. Maximum allowable temperature drop is 3° F (1. 7.6 to 7. and the liquid line sight glass is flashing. 5. If this is the case. This information is located under the sub-mode ‘CIR.B’ depending on the circuit under investigation.3 kg) at a time of liquid refrigerant charge. check the liquid line sight glass. There are many system conditions where a flashing sight glass occurs under normal operation. enter the Outputs mode from the Navigator and then sub-mode ‘CIR. the circuit is probably low on charge. A flashing liquid line sight glass (located in the EXV body) is not necessarily an indication of inadequate charge. verify that the cooler leaving fluid temperature is in the range of 38 to 46 F (3.7 C) and the sight glass is flashing. Verify this by checking the EXV Percent Open. 3. If the sight glass is flashing. and no signs of flashing. The EXV should begin closing as charge is being added. At this condition. raise the compressor discharge to approximately 125 F (51. verify that the cooler leaving fluid temperature is in the range of 38 to 48 F (5. and again check the EXV Percent Open.A’ or ‘CIR. If there is a clear sight glass. measure the liquid temperature after the tee where all liquid lines have joined (see Fig. It may be necessary to use the Service Test feature to force the circuit into a full-load condition. circulate water through the condenser (30HXC) and cooler at all times to prevent freezing. If there is a clear sight glass. Make sure that the unit is running at full load. When the EXV Percent Open is in the range of 40 to 60%. 2. 2. 1. and that the cooler leaving fluid temperature is in the range of 42 to 46 F (5. 4. 4. 4. check the liquid line sight glass.3 kg) of liquid charge into the cooler using the fitting located on the tube entering the bottom of the cooler.3 kg) of liquid charge. and allow the unit to stabilize before checking the EXV position. then the circuit is low on charge. Add 5 lb (2. at the appropriate line on the display. enter the Outputs mode from the Navigator and then sub-mode ‘CIR.R units. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER REFRIGERANT in these units without first consulting your Carrier representative. Allow the system to stabilize and then recheck the liquid temperature.C 161-271 models. Overcharging results in higher discharge pressure with higher cooling fluid consumption.A’ or ‘CIR. DO NOT OVERCHARGE system. Check that the refrigerant is not flashing in the liquid-line sight glass. 6. If this is the case. 3.7 C) for optimum charge. add an additional 5 lb (2.R chillers. 55 . This fitting is located between the Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) and the cooler. Follow the procedure for adding charge for 30HXC units. 28 and 29). and the sight glass continues flashing. 6.7° C). Check temperature drop across liquid line strainer/drier. To check whether circuit A is fully loaded. then the unit has sufficient charge. If the refrigerant appears to be flashing. If the EXV Percent Open remains above 60%. At these operating conditions. For 30GXN. Slowly add charge as the sight glass begins to clear to avoid overcharging. raise the compressor discharge to approximately 130 F (54.3 kg) of liquid charge into the cooler using the fitting located on the tube entering the bottom of the cooler. the circuit is undercharged. several factors must be considered. Observe the EXV Percent Open value.8 C) cooler leaving fluid temperature. Strainer is cleanable if necessary and contains 1 standard drier core on all 30GX and 30HXA.8 C). If the EXV Percent Open is greater than 60%. Measure the liquid temperature entering the EXV for 30HXA units. To add charge to the 30HXC systems: 1. The liquid temperature should be approximately 107 F (41. possible compressor damage and higher power consumption. With the circuit running at full-load. Make sure that the circuit is running at a full-load condition.8 C). This fitting is located between the Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) and the cooler. For 30GXN.B’ depending on the circuit under investigation. Continue adding 5 lb (2. NOTE: A flashing liquid line sight glass at operating conditions other than those mentioned above is not necessarily an indication of low refrigerant charge. If the temperature is greater than 107 F (41. The EXV metering device is designed to work properly under these conditions.B’ Scroll through the Navigator until the desired item is located. 5. 5. When adding or removing charge. If this is greater than 60%. then check the EXV Percent Open. Skip the remaining steps.A’ and ‘EXV. Make sure that the circuit is running at a full load condition and all condenser fans are energized and running on the keypad. Freezing damage is considered abuse and may void the Carrier warranty.

0 5. . If the Low Oil Level alarms persist. . . .5 8. Do not exceed maximum oil change. . . Table 36 — Available Oil Quantities and Part Numbers QUANTITY 1 Quart 1 Gallon 5 Gallons TOTALINE PART NUMBER P903-1225 P903-1201 P903-1205 RCD PART NUMBER — PP23BZ104-001 PP23BZ104-005 56 . • ISO Viscosity Grade . .B1’ for compressor B1. . .0 5. Skip to Step 8. Because the system is under pressure even when the unit is not running. . . Enable the Service Test feature using the Navigator and turn the EOR switch to Enable.0 7.A1’ for compressor A1. 28 — Saturated Liquid Temperature Measurement (30GXN. Icematic® SW-220 • Oil type .GXN.89 L) of Castrol Icematic® SW-220 Polyolester oil (absolutely no substitutes are approved) to the system. Start the desired compressor by turning it On under the ‘COMP’ sub-mode.R units). . Inhibited polyolester-based synthetic compressor lubricant for use in screw compressors. 2.9 18.9 17.0 4. . allow the unit to restart and run normally. .5 5. .4 CIRCUIT B (gal) 5. continue following this procedure. . .0 5. It could also mean simply that oil is in the process of being reclaimed from the low-side of the system. Add oil to the oil separator using the 1/ -in. . Before starting the compressor. Select item ‘CC.R080-150 and 160) Addition of oil charge to 30HX. . . and a pre-start oil pressure alarm will be posted.0 4. 3. 5. the compressor will not start.5 18.0 CIRCUIT B (L) 18.GXN.GXR unit shuts off repeatedly on Low Oil Level (Alert number 124 or 125). Use the Manual Control feature of the software if the unit does not normally run at full load. . . .GXR systems: 1. . as this will make the oil charging process easier. .2 28. If none of the previous steps were successful. 10. .9 18. Open the liquid line service valve and allow the unit to restart and run normally. this may be an indication of inadequate oil charge.TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT (CIRCUIT B) MEASUREMENT LOCATION (CIRCUIT A) Fig. . . Close the liquid line service valve. 9. it will be necessary to use a suitable pump (hand pump or electric pump) to add oil to the system. 4. it must meet the following Carrier specifications: • Castrol . the unit will go through its normal pre-lube pump routine. . and allow the unit to restart and run normally. Table 37 — Factory Oil Charges UNIT SIZE 30GX080-178 30GX204-268 30GX281-350 30HXA076-186 30HXC076-186 30HXA206-271 30HXC206-271 CIRCUIT A (gal) 5. . If the 30HX. . 163-350) Oil Charging/Low Oil Recharging OIL SPECIFICATION — If oil is added. ‘CC.5 26.0 7.5 18. . If there is an insufficient level of oil in the oil separator. continue following this procedure.0 18. . . . Make sure that the oil level safety switch is NOT jumpered.R153.5 CIRCUIT A (L) 18. etc. 220 This oil is available in the following quantities from your local Carrier representative (see Table 36). Using a suitable pump. Make sure that the unit is not running when adding oil. If the compressor starts successfully. the unit is low on oil charge. . . add 1/2 gal.0 30. Begin by running the unit at full load for 11/2 hours. 6. . and place a pressure gage on top of the cooler. 29 — Saturated Liquid Temperature Measurement (30GXN.0 5. 7. After running the unit for 11/2 hours. observe the cooler pressure gage. 8. . . . .9 26. . .0 7. See Table 37.9 17. . If the Low Oil Level alarms persist. When this gage reads approximately 10 psig. . . Schrader-type fitting on the discharge line entering 4 the top of the oil separator (30HX units) or through the Schrader fitting on the top of the oil separator (30GXN. Do not add oil at any other location as improper unit operation may result. .0 7. .9 MEASUREMENT LOCATION (TYPICAL) Fig. .9 26. . . . . . (1. turn the selected compressor Off from the Navigator and move the EOR switch to the Off position.

the PRC. If low oil level problems persist. contact your Carrier representative.) increments until the problem is resolved. Disconnect oil filter with fitting at shutoff valve side and set filter and compressor inlet line assembly aside.A’ sub-mode contains oil filter pressure differentials for each Circuit A compressor (items ‘FD. Fluid must be flowing through heat exchangers whenever adding or removing charge. 5. Check main power leads for marked numbers. 30). Oil line pressure loss is monitored by the control and reported for each compressor as the oil filter pressure drop.) of oil. If it is necessary to add more than 5. Remove the old filter.B sub-mode contains oil filter pressure differentials for each circuit B compressor (items FD. Remove protective plastic caps from new filter and install.B1. The ‘PRC. REPLACING THE EXTERNAL OIL FILTER shutoff valve (if equipped) for circuit to be changed. Compare this value to the discharge pressure read at the Navigator. To determine the oil pressure drop due to the oil lines and external filter only. Replace the internal oil filter if the pressure drop is greater than 25 psi (173 kPa) for 30HXC and 30 psi (207 kPa) for 30GXN.R and 30HXA chillers. REPLACING THE INTERNAL OIL FILTER — Close the service valves at the compressor and drain the oil using the bleed port. Mark remaining control circuit wires (connected together with wire nuts) for ease of reconnecting later. The difference between the gauge pressure and compressor oil pressure read at the Navigator is the pressure drop through the internal oil filter. Use proper safety precautions when relieving pressure. Disconnect main power leads from compressor terminal lugs. Check both fittings for leaks and repair if necessary. Disconnect the oil inlet line from the compressor. The following color scheme applies (verify with label diagram on panel): Loader 1 2 Violet wires Loader 2 2 Pink wires Motor Cooling Solenoid 1 Blue wire. The internal oil filter pressure drop should be checked and filter changed (if necessary) after the initial 200 to 300 hours of compressor operation. Allen wrench. 1 Brown wire* High-Pressure Switch 2 Red wires *One lead from the motor cooling and oil solenoids are connected together with a single brown wire. suction valve (if equipped). both from pressure transducer inputs) is typically 15 to 20 psi (103 to 138 kPa) for a system with clean internal and external filters. Backseat angle valve and open ball valve. add another 1. Similarly. Turn off all main and control circuit power supplying the machine. Close the discharge and liquid valve(s). This information can be found in the Pressures mode of the Navigator for each circuit. replace the external filter. 2. After that. mark leads with appropriate numbers to match those printed on the ends of the terminal lugs. Remove any remaining refrigerant in the compressor and refrigerant lines using proper reclaiming techniques. connect a gage to the oil pressure bleed port. 30 — Compressor Component Diagram . Draw a vacuum at the bleed port. If no numbers are visible on leads. Lightly oil O-ring in the filter and install with filter open end first into the housing. oil line shutoff valve.B2). Remove the charging hose. Compressor oil is pressurized. 4. This pressure differential (discharge pressure minus oil pressure.75 L (1. Open angle valve enough to let oil flow. and minimum load 57 Fig.5 gallons) of oil to the system. IMPORTANT: Cooler and condenser pumps must be energized. remove the internal filter access cover (see Fig. Connect a charging hose to the oil pressure bleed port and drain the oil trapped between service valves. All of the refrigerant that is in the cooler must be removed if there is no suction service valve installed on the cooler. 3. This is extremely important as power leads MUST be installed on the exact terminals from which they were removed. Unscrew the nut from the other side of the filter and remove the old filter. Replacement filters (one for each compressor) are factory supplied to cover the first changeout. Oil Filter Maintenance — Each compressor has its own internal oil filter and each circuit also has an in-line external filter. If this value exceeds 10 psi (69 kPa). Using a 3/4-in. Follow procedure in previous section for opening angle valve and purging lines. Compressor Changeout Sequence — Compressor service requires metric tools and hardware. Remove junction box cover of compressor to be changed.89 L (1/2 gal. and cooler inlet line service valve (if equipped). filters are field supplied. Remove charging hose. FD. Fully front seat (close) the angle valve on the filter and the ball valve at the compressor.A1’ ‘FD. Change compressors according to the following procedure: 1.A2’).11. Continue adding oil in 1. Replace access cover and retorque to 75 ft-lb (101 N-m). If the oil pressure does not bleed off using this method it will be necessary to remove the entire circuit charge. A quart (liter) of oil is typically what is removed during this process. 1 Brown wire * Oil Solenoid 1 Orange wire.89 L (1/2 gal. Check for leaks and repair if necessary.

For 30GX units. Tighten screws to 6. 31 for lifting locations and center of gravity dimensions. Reconnect the oil filter to the shutoff valve and oil line to the compressor. Evacuate compressor and refrigerant lines. and oil pressure transducer. 20. Open all shutoff valves and leak check the circuit and all fittings and joints. conduits.8 to 9. 30. The O-rings must NOT be re-used. locate and test each loader solenoid under the COMP sub-mode (items ‘LD.R204-268 units) or B2 (30GXN.A1’. 13. Use care when removing bolts and disconnecting flanges. If the new compressor is the A1/A2 (30HX units). 12. The compressor is held in place using four M14 x 2 studs through the suction nozzle of the cooler. Connect the switch to the second high pressure port using a standard 1/4-in. Install the 4 lock washers and nuts finger-tight. Remove the 4 lockwashers and nuts securing the compressor to the suction flange of the cooler. wires. 21. 22. Remove the four M14 bolts securing the discharge line flange to the compressor.6 N-m (60 to 100 ft-lb). remove the compressor junction box and rotate it 180 degrees. 14. Reset the reverse rotation low pressure switch. Do NOT overtighten as damage may result to O-ring.HXC units. Thread packing nut onto fitting and tighten finger tight. Make sure the loader solenoids are installed on the correct number loader. 23. Thread the studs all the way back into the compressor.4 to 135. A2 (30GXN. ‘OS. holddown bolt securing the foot at the discharge end of the compressor to the mounting bracket on the cooler. Compressor seals are made using O-rings. Mark motor temperature leads (2 blue wires) and remove from quick connect terminals in the junction box. 11. Tighten discharge line bolts in a crossing pattern to a range of 81. Remove loader (mark solenoids no. if studs hit the cooler insulation. See Fig. Make sure compressor is properly rigged before unbolting.) MOTOR SIDE MINIMUM 384 mm (15. Remove the 2 bolts securing the motor cooling/economizer line flange to the compressor. Install oil line straight into fitting until ferrule seats against fitting. leave them in place — they will not interfere with compressor removal or installation. Repair any leaks found. Restore main and control power to the machine. 10.A1’. 5. 16.A1’. Using the Navigator under the Service Test mode. 7. etc. After checking to ensure all lines.). If possible. 9. Leak check compressor and refrigerant lines with nitrogen.) NOTE: Locate strap from center of gravity lifting ring and support motor casing to provide 3-point level rigging. Refer to the Refrigerant Charging/Adding Charge and Oil Charging/Low Oil Recharging sections on pages 55 and 56 for recharging procedures. Remove nitrogen from system. 19.5 N-m (5 to 7 ft-lb). Do NOT overtighten as damage may result to O-rings. 1 and 2 for replacement) and oil solenoids and high-pressure switch from compressor. The next steps involve compressor unbolting and removal. Fig. high-pressure switch. Reconnect conduits back into compressor junction box. These will all be reconnected to the replacement compressor. place back into grooves and install flange bolts. 31 — Compressor Lifting Diagrams 58 . The switch will not reset until 10 psig of pressure is present on the switch.1 in.R units). are free and out of the way. Put the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch in the Enable position. Remove the 3/8-in. Be sure that an appropriate lifting cart or hoist is used to avoid injury. Tighten bolts in a crossing pattern to a range of 81. New O-rings are provided with the replacement compressor. Temporarily wire the reverse rotation low pressure switch in series with the compressor’s high pressure switch as shown in Fig.4 to 108.4 to 135. Using 2 wrenches.). Tighten motor cooling/economizer bolts to a range of 81. LIFTING LUGS BOTH OUTSIDE EDGES EQUIDISTANT FROM GEAR COVER END COMPRESSOR LIFTING MECHANISM CENTER OF GRAVITY OF COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR SIDE MINIMUM 300 mm (11. Temporarily install the reverse rotation low pressure switch that is supplied with the replacement compressor. Two of the bolts also secure the mounting bracket for the external oil filter. test each compressor’s oil and motor cooling solenoids (items ‘MC. A foot bracket will be mounted to the replacement compressor. Reinstall the loader and oil solenoids. etc.R281-350 units) compressor. 32. turn the TEST sub-mode ‘On’. remove compressor from cooler. carefully remove the oil pressure transducer from the compressor. Do not overtighten. Support the oil line to prevent damage to the line while the compressor is being changed. Apply a light film of O-ring grease to new O-ring and place back into groove in mounting flange of compressor. 15. Save all the hardware as it will be needed to install the replacement compressor. on left hand side when reaching over compressor to far side on 30GXN.5 N-m (60 to 80 ft-lb). remove studs. Repair any leaks found. Reconnect all wiring that was removed in Steps 4. Remove suction cover plate and bolts from new compressor and set compressor on unit flange. Install and tighten holddown bolt in mounting foot. etc. Apply a light film of O-ring grease to motor cooling/ economizer and discharge line O-rings. The 06N screw compressors weigh approximately 920 lb (417 kg). The studs have an E-12 external Torx drive head. service hose. Use a backup wrench to finish tightening the nut. NOTE: Some oil will leak out of the transducer fitting when the transducer is removed.6 N-m (60 to 100 ft-lb). Next. Apply minimal tension to hold the compressor while the remaining bolts are removed. Move lifting apparatus into place and attach to the 2 lifting rings on the compressor. place temporary protection over coils to prevent fin and tube damage. It is important that the loaders are located properly (loader 1 on right hand side when viewed from side opposite control box on 30HXA. Under the OUTS sub-mode. 8. and 7.6.8 in. See Fig. 17. The A1 and A2 compressors are on the right side of the unit when facing the unit control box. Remove motor cooling/economizer and discharge line cover plates from new compressor. 18.

34.R only) for field charging. A special AMP crimping tool. Perform periodic acid checks on the circuit and change the filter drier core in the liquid line as necessary. Liquid Line Service Valve — This valve is located ahead of the filter drier and provides a 1/4-in. do not allow the prelube pump to operate “dry. Disconnect the hose from the external oil filter service valve.” 2.A1’. LOCATION — General location of thermistor sensors and terminal connections in the control box are listed in Table 3. Pressurize the circuit to force out most of the oil in the separator. 33. 25. part no. is needed if new connectors are used. that bubbles in the sight glass do not necessarily indicate insufficient charge. Secure thermistor to well body with a wire tie to prevent thermistor from working its way out of the well. To dilute and remove any residual oil left in the separator. 1. BURNOUT CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE — If a screw compressor motor burns out on a 30GX. Cleanable strainers have been installed in each circuit’s liquid line to aid in removal of system contaminants and debris. and then ENTER again. Insert new thermistor in well body to its full depth. each circuit can be pumped down into the high side for servicing.R) or on the discharge line (30HXA. Refer to Carrier Standards Service Technique Manual. The reverse rotation low pressure switch can now be removed from the compressor and high pressure switch circuit. 6. Run the hose to a container(s) that can hold up to 5 to 6 gallons (19 to 20 L) of oil. Use the Carrier Standard Service Techniques Manual as a source of reference. IMPORTANT: Unit must in operation for at least 12 hours before moisture indicator can give an accurate reading.HX chiller. Yellow-green (chartreuse) — 80 to 225 ppm (caution). The following procedure provides the minimum steps to be taken before restarting the circuit. The wells are under refrigerant pressure (cooler EWT and LWT are under waterside pressure) and do not need to be removed to replace a faulty thermistor. replace filter drier core. T3. Schrader connection (30GXN. Leak check. 10.B’ in the OUTS sub-mode). the pre-lube pump can be run in the Service Test mode from the Navigator. Leaving Water.P. These six thermistors use insulation displacement connectors.Moisture-Liquid Indicator — Clear flow of liquid HPS RRS LEGEND HPS — High-Pressure Switch RRS — Reverse Rotation Switch (HK01CB002) Fig. Yellow (wet) — above 225 ppm. To prevent wear to the pump components. This can be facilitated by connecting a hose to the port located on the service valve entering the external oil filter. Measure in the amount of Castrol SW 220 Polyolester oil as specified on the nameplate of the chiller. See Fig. THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT All thermistors are installed in wells and will slide out of the wells easily. Press ENTER . but should be replaced with a standard filter drier core during the next filter replacement. To Replace Thermistors T1. Thermistors are friction-fit thermistors and will slip back into well located at the cooler head (T1. . Filter Drier — Whenever moisture-liquid indicator shows presence of moisture. Clean out any debris which may have collected in the oil catch pan. New thermistors should be spliced to existing wiring close to the connector unless new connectors are required. T2. followed by to change the value to On. Thermistors T1 and T2 are connected to MBB-J8 and thermistors T3 through T6 are connected to EXV-J5. Discharge Gas Temperature) — Disconnect appropriate connector from the Main Base Board (MBB) or Screw Compressor Board (SCB). Let the circuit stabilize with both loaders energized. 9. Refer to the Refrigerant Charging/Adding Charge and Oil Charging/ Low Oil Recharging sections of this document for recharging procedures and performance criteria. Once proper rotation has been verified. Locate the appropriate compressor item (‘CC. a simple cleanup should be performed. To remove the remaining oil. With the unit running. etc. resistances at various temperatures are listed for all thermistors (except motor thermistors) in Tables 38A-39B. Once the compressor is removed access the oil catch pan through the cooler-compressor mounting flange. Enable the desired pump (either item ‘OL. 4. 58580-1. Change filter drier at the first sign of moisture in the system. Note. T2) or at the top of each compressor discharge line (T3 through T6).There is one industry standard drier core in each strainer. Moisture in the system is measured in parts per million (ppm). Remove the failed compressor following the Compressor Changeout Sequence procedure on page 57. Remove the oil from the oil separator. or T6 (Entering.P. 7. 3. energize both loaders one at a time. 32 — Reverse Rotation Switch Wiring 24. 59 refrigerant indicates sufficient charge in the system. a burnout (activated carbon) core may be used. See Fig. Remove and discard original thermistor from well. the indicating element must be in contact with liquid refrigerant to give true reading. Install a new compressor. for details on servicing filter driers. 8.A’ or ‘OL. Remove thermistor cable from harness. Thermistors — To aid in verifying thermistor performance. pump approximately 1/2 gallon (2 L) of compressor oil into the oil separator using the Schrader port located on top of the separator (30GXN.HXC) and remove using the pre-lube pump described in Step 1. See Table 40 for motor thermistor values. 5. T5. Install a new filter drier core and compressor external oil filter. changes of color of indicator are: Green — moisture is below 80 ppm. disconnect and lock out the power to the chiller. If desired. evacuate and recharge the machine as described in this manual with the amount of R-134a stated on the chiller nameplate. Chapter 1. T4. Refrigerants. Add a small amount of thermal conductive grease to thermistor probe and well. In combination with compressor discharge service valve. Once the compressor has successfully started.) under the COMP sub-mode and start the compressor. however.

33 — Filter Drier THERMISTOR JACKETED CABLE SENSOR TUBE BEND SLIGHTLY BEFORE WELL INSERTION THERMISTOR WELL 4 in. See Table 40 for motor thermistor temperature and resistance values. S2. Motor temperature is measured by leads connected to one of the S terminals and the C terminal. Fig. and C. If one of the thermistors fails. The thermistors are not serviceable in the field. There are 3 terminals for the thermistors: S1. compressor replacement is required. 34 — Thermistor Replacement (T1 through T6) 60 .To Service Compressor Motor Thermistors — Two thermistors are factory installed in each compressor. If both of the compressor motor thermistors fail. verify that there is a true short or open circuit at these terminals. Connections for the thermistors are located in the compressor junction box. If a compressor motor thermistor failure occurs. DRIER CORE STRAINER SCREENS Fig. 3/16 in. disconnect and relocate the wire on one of the S terminals to the other S terminal (S1 to S2 or S2 to S1).

Table 38A — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs Resistance/Voltage
VOLTAGE DROP (V) 3.699 3.689 3.679 3.668 3.658 3.647 3.636 3.624 3.613 3.601 3.588 3.576 3.563 3.550 3.536 3.523 3.509 3.494 3.480 3.465 3.450 3.434 3.418 3.402 3.386 3.369 3.352 3.335 3.317 3.299 3.281 3.262 3.243 3.224 3.205 3.185 3.165 3.145 3.124 3.103 3.082 3.060 3.038 3.016 2.994 2.972 2.949 2.926 2.903 2.879 2.856 2.832 2.808 2.784 2.759 2.735 2.710 2.685 2.660 2.634 2.609 2.583 2.558 2.532 2.506 2.480 2.454 2.428 2.402 2.376 2.349 2.323 2.296 2.270 2.244 2.217 2.191 2.165 2.138 2.112 2.086 2.060 2.034 2.008 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.982 1.956 1.930 1.905 1.879 1.854 1.829 1.804 1.779 1.754 1.729 1.705 1.681 1.656 1.632 1.609 1.585 1.562 1.538 1.516 1.493 1.470 1.448 1.426 1.404 1.382 1.361 1.340 1.319 1.298 1.278 1.257 1.237 1.217 1.198 1.179 1.160 1.141 1.122 1.104 1.086 1.068 1.051 1.033 1.016 0.999 0.983 0.966 0.950 0.934 0.918 0.903 0.888 0.873 0.858 0.843 0.829 0.815 0.801 0.787 0.774 0.761 0.748 0.735 0.723 0.710 0.698 0.686 0.674 0.663 0.651 0.640 0.629 0.618 0.608 0.597 0.587 0.577 0.567 0.557 0.548 0.538 0.529 0.520 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.511 0.502 0.494 0.485 0.477 0.469 0.461 0.453 0.445 0.438 0.430 0.423 0.416 0.408 0.402 0.395 0.388 0.381 0.375 0.369 0.362 0.356 0.350 0.344 0.339 0.333 0.327 0.322 0.317 0.311 0.306 0.301 0.296 0.291 0.286 0.282 0.277 0.272 0.268 0.264 0.259 0.255 0.251 0.247 0.243 0.239 0.235 0.231 0.228 0.224 0.220 0.217 0.213 0.210 0.206 0.203 0.200 0.197 0.194 0.191 0.188 0.185 0.182 0.179 0.176 0.173 0.171 0.168 0.165 0.163 0.160 0.158 0.155 0.153 0.151 0.148 0.146 0.144 0.142 0.140 0.138 0.135 0.133

TEMP (F) –25 –24 –23 –22 –21 –20 –19 –18 –17 –16 –15 –14 –13 –12 –11 –10 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

RESISTANCE (Ohms) 98,010 94,707 91,522 88,449 85,486 82,627 79,871 77,212 74,648 72,175 69,790 67,490 65,272 63,133 61,070 59,081 57,162 55,311 53,526 51,804 50,143 48,541 46,996 45,505 44,066 42,679 41,339 40,047 38,800 37,596 36,435 35,313 34,231 33,185 32,176 31,202 30,260 29,351 28,473 27,624 26,804 26,011 25,245 24,505 23,789 23,096 22,427 21,779 21,153 20,547 19,960 19,393 18,843 18,311 17,796 17,297 16,814 16,346 15,892 15,453 15,027 14,614 14,214 13,826 13,449 13,084 12,730 12,387 12,053 11,730 11,416 11,112 10,816 10,529 10,250 9,979 9,717 9,461 9,213 8,973 8,739 8,511 8,291 8,076

TEMP (F) 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142

RESISTANCE (Ohms) 7,686 7,665 7,468 7,277 7,091 6,911 6,735 6,564 6,399 6,238 6,081 5,929 5,781 5,637 5,497 5,361 5,229 5,101 4,976 4,855 4,737 4,622 4,511 4,403 4,298 4,196 4,096 4,000 3,906 3,814 3,726 3,640 3,556 3,474 3,395 3,318 3,243 3,170 3,099 3,031 2,964 2,898 2,835 2,773 2,713 2,655 2,597 2,542 2,488 2,436 2,385 2,335 2,286 2,239 2,192 2,147 2,103 2,060 2,018 1,977 1,937 1,898 1,860 1,822 1,786 1,750 1,715 1,680 1,647 1,614 1,582 1,550 1,519 1,489 1,459 1,430 1,401 1,373 1,345 1,318 1,291 1,265 1,240 1,214

TEMP (F) 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225

RESISTANCE (Ohms) 1,190 1,165 1,141 1,118 1,095 1,072 1,050 1,029 1,007 986 965 945 925 906 887 868 850 832 815 798 782 765 750 734 719 705 690 677 663 650 638 626 614 602 591 581 570 561 551 542 533 524 516 508 501 494 487 480 473 467 461 456 450 445 439 434 429 424 419 415 410 405 401 396 391 386 382 377 372 367 361 356 350 344 338 332 325 318 311 304 297 289 282

61

Table 38B — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs Resistance/Voltage
TEMP (C) –32 –31 –30 –29 –28 –27 –26 –25 –24 –23 –22 –21 –20 –19 –18 –17 –16 –15 –14 –13 –12 –11 –10 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 3.705 3.687 3.668 3.649 3.629 3.608 3.586 3.563 3.539 3.514 3.489 3.462 3.434 3.406 3.376 3.345 3.313 3.281 3.247 3.212 3.177 3.140 3.103 3.065 3.025 2.985 2.945 2.903 2.860 2.817 2.774 2.730 2.685 2.639 2.593 2.547 2.500 2.454 2.407 2.360 2.312 2.265 2.217 2.170 2.123 2.076 2.029 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 100,260 94,165 88,480 83,170 78,125 73,580 69,250 65,205 61,420 57,875 54,555 51,450 48,536 45,807 43,247 40,845 38,592 38,476 34,489 32,621 30,866 29,216 27,633 26,202 24,827 23,532 22,313 21,163 20,079 19,058 18,094 17,184 16,325 15,515 14,749 14,026 13,342 12,696 12,085 11,506 10,959 10,441 9,949 9,485 9,044 8,627 8,231 TEMP (C) 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.982 1.935 1.889 1.844 1.799 1.754 1.710 1.666 1.623 1.580 1.538 1.497 1.457 1.417 1.378 1.340 1.302 1.265 1.229 1.194 1.160 1.126 1.093 1.061 1.030 0.999 0.969 0.940 0.912 0.885 0.858 0.832 0.807 0.782 0.758 0.735 0.713 0.691 0.669 0.649 0.629 0.610 0.591 0.573 0.555 0.538 0.522 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 7,855 7,499 7,161 6,840 6,536 6,246 5,971 5,710 5,461 5,225 5,000 4,786 4,583 4,389 4,204 4,028 3,861 3,701 3,549 3,404 3,266 3,134 3,008 2,888 2,773 2,663 2,559 2,459 2,363 2,272 2,184 2,101 2,021 1,944 1,871 1,801 1,734 1,670 1,609 1,550 1,493 1,439 1,387 1,337 1,290 1,244 1,200 TEMP (C) 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.506 0.490 0.475 0.461 0.447 0.433 0.420 0.407 0.395 0.383 0.371 0.360 0.349 0.339 0.329 0.319 0.309 0.300 0.291 0.283 0.274 0.266 0.258 0.251 0.244 0.237 0.230 0.223 0.217 0.211 0.204 0.199 0.193 0.188 0.182 0.177 0.172 0.168 0.163 0.158 0.154 0.150 0.146 0.142 0.138 0.134 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 1,158 1,118 1,079 1,041 1,006 971 938 906 876 836 805 775 747 719 693 669 645 623 602 583 564 547 531 516 502 489 477 466 456 446 436 427 419 410 402 393 385 376 367 357 346 335 324 312 299 285

62

Table 39A — 10K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs Resistance/Voltage Drop (For Thermistor T10)
TEMP (F) –25 –24 –23 –22 –21 –20 –19 –18 –17 –16 –15 –14 –13 –12 –11 –10 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 4.758 4.750 4.741 4.733 4.724 4.715 4.705 4.696 4.686 4.676 4.665 4.655 4.644 4.633 4.621 4.609 4.597 4.585 4.572 4.560 4.546 4.533 4.519 4.505 4.490 4.476 4.461 4.445 4.429 4.413 4.397 4.380 4.363 4.346 4.328 4.310 4.292 4.273 4.254 4.235 4.215 4.195 4.174 4.153 4.132 4.111 4.089 4.067 4.044 4.021 3.998 3.975 3.951 3.927 3.903 3.878 3.853 3.828 3.802 3.776 3.750 3.723 3.697 3.670 3.654 3.615 3.587 3.559 3.531 3.503 3.474 3.445 3.416 3.387 3.357 3.328 3.298 3.268 3.238 3.208 3.178 3.147 3.117 3.086 3.056 3.025 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 196,453 189,692 183,300 177,000 171,079 165,238 159,717 154,344 149,194 144,250 139,443 134,891 130,402 126,183 122,018 118,076 114,236 110,549 107,006 103,558 100,287 97,060 94,020 91,019 88,171 85,396 82,729 80,162 77,662 75,286 72,940 70,727 68,542 66,465 64,439 62,491 60,612 58,781 57,039 55,319 53,693 52,086 50,557 49,065 47,627 46,240 44,888 43,598 42,324 41,118 39,926 38,790 37,681 36,610 35,577 34,569 33,606 32,654 31,752 30,860 30,009 29,177 28,373 27,597 26,838 26,113 25,396 24,715 24,042 23,399 22,770 22,161 21,573 20,998 20,447 19,903 19,386 18,874 18,384 17,904 17,441 16,991 16,552 16,131 15,714 15,317 TEMP (F) 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 2.994 2.963 2.932 2.901 2.870 2.839 2.808 2.777 2.746 2.715 2.684 2.653 2.622 2.592 2.561 2.530 2.500 2.470 2.439 2.409 2.379 2.349 2.319 2.290 2.260 2.231 2.202 2.173 2.144 2.115 2.087 2.059 2.030 2.003 1.975 1.948 1.921 1.894 1.867 1.841 1.815 1.789 1.763 1.738 1.713 1.688 1.663 1.639 1.615 1.591 1.567 1.544 1.521 1.498 1.475 1.453 1.431 1.409 1.387 1.366 1.345 1.324 1.304 1.284 1.264 1.244 1.225 1.206 1.187 1.168 1.150 1.132 1.114 1.096 1.079 1.062 1.045 1.028 1.012 0.996 0.980 0.965 0.949 0.934 0.919 0.905 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 14,925 14,549 14,180 13,824 13,478 13,139 12,814 12,493 12,187 11,884 11,593 11,308 11,031 10,764 10,501 10,249 10,000 9,762 9,526 9,300 9,078 8,862 8,653 8,448 8,251 8,056 7,869 7,685 7,507 7,333 7,165 6,999 6,838 6,683 6,530 6,383 6,238 6,098 5,961 5,827 5,698 5,571 5,449 5,327 5,210 5,095 4,984 4,876 4,769 4,666 4,564 4,467 4,370 4,277 4.185 4,096 4,008 3,923 3,840 3,759 3,681 3,603 3,529 3,455 3,383 3,313 3,244 3,178 3,112 3,049 2,986 2,926 2,866 2,809 2,752 2,697 2,643 2,590 2,539 2,488 2,439 2,391 2,343 2,297 2,253 2,209 TEMP (F) 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.890 0.876 0.862 0.848 0.835 0.821 0.808 0.795 0.782 0.770 0.758 0.745 0.733 0.722 0.710 0.699 0.687 0.676 0.666 0.655 0.645 0.634 0.624 0.614 0.604 0.595 0.585 0.576 0.567 0.558 0.549 0.540 0.532 0.523 0.515 0.507 0.499 0.491 0.483 0.476 0.468 0.461 0.454 0.447 0.440 0.433 0.426 0.419 0.413 0.407 0.400 0.394 0.388 0.382 0.376 0.370 0.365 0.359 0.354 0.349 0.343 0.338 0.333 0.328 0.323 0.318 0.314 0.309 0.305 0.300 0.296 0.292 0.288 0.284 0.279 0.275 0.272 0.268 0.264 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 2,166 2,124 2,083 2,043 2,003 1,966 1,928 1,891 1,855 1,820 1,786 1,752 1,719 1,687 1,656 1,625 1,594 1,565 1,536 1,508 1,480 1,453 1,426 1,400 1,375 1,350 1,326 1,302 1,278 1,255 1,233 1,211 1,190 1,169 1,148 1,128 1,108 1,089 1,070 1,052 1,033 1,016 998 981 964 947 931 915 900 885 870 855 841 827 814 800 787 774 762 749 737 725 714 702 691 680 670 659 649 639 629 620 610 601 592 583 574 566 557

63

252 1.056 3.645 0.724 0.279 0.096 6.370 4.083 2.9 457.889 3.480 1.288 1.734 3.324 40.624 4.537 3.580 4.777 2.582 1.342 156.243.433 3.1 1.813 1.150 1.355 0.918 4.457 0.752 1.0 21.521 1.774 5.109 36.000 2.182 34.318 0.203 4.385 1.784 1.075 2.837 0.171 23.030 29.498 28.117 1.400 1.265.917 3.165 3.878 2.042 3.640 47.162 4.488 2.3 293.404 147.217 1.968 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 15.807 115.324 1.5 7.862 0.721 2.445 2.887 0. Voltage drop cannot be used.579 2.605 1.5 6.183 1.117 4.345 0.396 0.876 1.Table 39B — 10K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs Resistance/Voltage Drop (For Thermistor T10) TEMP (C) –32 –31 –30 –29 –28 –27 –26 –25 –24 –23 –22 –21 –20 –19 –18 –17 –16 –15 –14 –13 –12 –11 –10 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 4.686 3.4 3.557 4.327 0.419 0.833 2.199 4.075 102.052 26.644 4.546 5.957 65.4 875.426 4.391 2.530 1.469 3.790 0.408 0.493 11.918 20.0 16.975 1.037 1.710 109.774 2.0 12.996 0.297 1.0 27.217 3.340 177.294 0.396 24.696.602 4.587 3.070 1.266 6.921 10.700 4.8 NOTE: Motor temperature thermistor values must be verified using resistance.762 4.367 4.806 6.903 18.767 0.562 1.8 739.231 2.666 2.325.060 91.153 38.000 166.431 0.418 10.0 65.362 1.681 13.397 4.654 31.177 1.402 122.591 0. Motor Temperature Thermistors TEMP (F) –22 –13 –4 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 149 158 167 176 185 194 203 212 221 230 239 248 TEMP (C) –30 –25 –20 –15 –10 –5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 88.972 18.140 1.610 2.813 0.733 4.400 TEMP (C) 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.720 7.455 4.269 4.041.2 1.828 3.111 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 200.099 2.365 0.512 0.686 25.0 36.508 4.961 3.163.431 1.340 1.319 52.716 4.480 1.003 3.617 42.883 19.011 1.662 77.127 2.942 11.255 16.868 97.873 3.500 2.555 2.482 130.000 14.2 2.536.855.571 9.134 138.000 9.013 21.0 48.157 2.284 2.303 4.637 3.711 58.205.375 0.485 3.3 339.714 15.544 4.463 81.558 0.510 188.940 0.9 1.703 0.055 1.542 0.878 1.7 627.219 61.608 0.178 2.482 4.926 1.533 4.7 393.776 8.184.663 4.255 1.444 0.949.310 0.265 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 2.727 4.626 0.683 0.104 1.470 0.085 4.530 6.944 2.943 1.315 2.449 10.6 534.407 8.913 0.302 0.025 1.2 1.220 3.124 4.323 13.0 9.781 3.692 1.274 3.574 0.056 7.439 1.889 2.340 3.940 68.164 8.738 1.328 3.493.246.527 0.014 5.8 255.028.337 2.071 12.336 0.0 4.162 72.052 44.392 49.483 0.745 0.986 2.663 0.272 0.675 2.603 3.025 0.327 5.497 0.588 86.693 1.386 0.648 1.480.6 194.743 3.663.005 974 944 915 889 861 836 811 787 764 742 721 700 680 661 643 626 609 592 576 561 Table 40 — Thermistor Temperature vs Resistance.381 3.748 4.0 5.000.830 1.090 17.637 1.235 4.663.682 4. 64 .215 1.086 1.474 TEMP (C) 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 3.401 7.3 222.367 32.235 2.044 4.476.287 0.335 4.415 55.801.7 2.

If the measured flow rate through the cooler agrees with the system requirements. If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring. For the case of VFD controlled pumps. calculate the cooler flow and compare this to the system requirements. verify operation of the flow switch relay.Pressure Transducers — Discrete high and low pressure transducers are used for pressure sensing on all 30GXN. Each successive green LED indicates greater flow. Increasing flow above the amber LED output indication illuminates the first green LED. valves are open and pumps are running. Low pressure transducers suction and economizer pressures should be within ± 2 psig.GXR. minor fluctuations in water flow may cause nuisance alarms. EPT-B SPT-A SPT-B DPT-A DPT-B Fig. check continuity of flow sensor cable. The discharge and oil pressure transducers are high pressure transducers. replace pressure transducer. If power is not present. If supply voltage is correct. FLOW SENSOR — Figure 36 shows a typical view of the flow sensor as attached to a victaulic nozzle. which is generated by the Main Base Board (MBB) for suction and discharge pressure transducers and by the Screw Compressor Board (SCB) for the oil and economizer pressure transducers. The warm-up period may take up EPT-A OPT-A1 OPT-B1 to 30 seconds. If the 2 pressure readings are not reasonably close. The transducers operate on a 5 vdc supply. Supply voltage should be 5 vdc ± . first check supply voltage to transducer. This is not an indication of minimum flow. the right-most green LED is lit and turned off as each LED to the left is successively lit until the left-most red LED is lit. 35A35C for pressure transducer locations. the amber LED illuminates indicating the output has closed. 35A — 30HX Pressure Transducer Locations (2-Compressor Unit) LEGEND FOR FIG. When the switch determines flow is present. Discharge and oil pressures should be within ± 5 psig. check for power at the flow switch relay (FSR) coil. a red LED at the far left will be illuminated. The switch closure does not indicate minimum flow for the machine. Additional green LEDs indicate higher flow rates. compare pressure reading displayed on keypad and display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure gage. Refer to Fig. and the suction and economizer pressure transducers are low pressure transducers (white dot). and can avoid the nuisance alarms. Check to confirm that all strainers are clean. With one green LED lit. successive red LEDs illuminate. TROUBLESHOOTING — If transducer is suspected of being faulty. With increasing flow. It also shows the connector pin orientation of the sensor. 1. 35A-35C DPT EPT EXV OPT SPT — — — — — Discharge Pressure Transducer Economizer Pressure Transducer Electronic Expansion Valve Oil Pressure Transducer Suction Pressure Transducer 65 . No pressure transducer calibration is required. 2.2 v. a warm-up period is initiated. If the contacts do not close while two green LEDs are lit. Refer to Fig. 4. 37. 3. the sensor has failed and must be replaced. During this period. When some flow is detected but not enough for machine operation. Without changing fluid flow through the cooler.HX chillers. ensure that the minimum speed setting has not been changed. If the sensor cable is not shorted or open when correct flow has been confirmed and the green sensor LEDs are lit. At least 2 green LEDs should be lit. See unit wiring labels for specific MBB and SCB pressure transducer power and signal connections. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler and using Appendix E on pages 95-100. follow the steps below to correct the situation: When power is supplied to the device.

R Pressure Transducer Locations (Top View) 66 . 35B — 30HX Pressure Transducer Locations (3-Compressor Unit) OPT-A SPT-A EPT-A OPT-B SPT-B EPT-B DPT-B DPT-A Fig. 35C — 30GXN.OPT-A2 OPT-A1 OPT-B1 EPT-B SPT-A EPT-A SPT-B DPT-A DPT-B Fig.

36 — 30GXN. o.38 [35] WIRING DIAGRAM *And associated modular units.36 [60] M12 x 4 PIN MALE 1 2 3 3.61 [41] 2. 138-178. 135)* FLOW SWITCH LOCATION STANDARD 2-PASS (UNIT SIZES 118.6] L1 24VAC N BRN BLK BLU EXTERNAL RELAY COIL 2/4 1/4 NPT 4 1. 125.83 [72] 2. 204-350)* 1.305 [7. 37 — Chilled Water Flow Switch LED Display 67 .FLOW SWITCH LOCATION STANDARD 3-PASS (UNIT SIZES 080-119.25 [82.R Flow Sensor RED AMBER GREEN FLOW BELOW SET POINT OUTPUT ENERGIZED FLOW ABOVE SET POINT Fig. 128.47 [12] Fig.75] .

All 30HXA. These valves are designed to relieve if an abnormal pressure condition arises. The configuration of these headers defines the Must Trip Amps (MTA) at which the CCP will turn the compressors off.HX chillers contain many safety devices and protection logic built into the electronic control. If wiring is correct. check the Main Base Board instance jumper (should be set to ‘1’). Refer to Table 42 for control troubleshooting information. These valves are designed to relieve at 350 psig (2413 kPa). Pressure relief valves located on cooler and condenser shells and 30HXA oil separator shells have 3/4-in. The control will allow the chiller to attempt to start with the heaters energized and will keep the heaters on. Each CCP board also reads the status of each compressor’s high-pressure switch. Communications between all modules is accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus called the Local Equipment Network (LEN). male flare connections.R oil separators have 1/2-in. until the discharge gas temperature reaches 110 F (43. SCREW COMPRESSOR BOARD (SCB). If the green LED is not blinking. J3/J4 for SCB. the module should be replaced. This ensures safety and prevents damage to controller.3 C). PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES — Valves are installed in each circuit and are located on all coolers. Only the MBB is designed to communication on the CCN bus. See Table 41. Off continuously indicates power should be checked. The machine operator communicates with the MBB through the Navigator. a manual reset is required to restart the compressor. EXV. EMM and J10/J11 for CCP1 and CCP2) are correct. IMPORTANT: If the unit is installed in an area where ambient temperatures fall below 32 F (0° C). These valves should not be capped.1 C) for water or more than 8° F (4. RED LED — All module red LEDs will blink in unison at a 1 to 2 second rate when communicating and functioning properly. GREEN LED — Each module has a green LED that should always be blinking when power is on. NPT connections for relief. the compressor will be shut down. Each module's green LED will be blinking at different rates. Relief Devices — Fusible plugs are located in each circuit (30GXN. COOLER PROTECTION Low Water Temperature — Microprocessor is programmed to shut the chiller down if the leaving fluid temperature drops below 34 F (1. For CCP2.4° C) below set point for brine units.R only) between the condenser and the liquid line shutoff valve. These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module. Do not bypass the current transducers or make any changes to the factory-installed and configured 8-pin headers. EMM and SCB module address switches should all be set to ON. check fuses. control modules are powered by 24 vac power sources protected by circuit breakers. Relief valves on all coolers and 30HXC condensers relieve at 220 psi (1517 kPa). even when running.3 and 4 should be On and switch 2 should be Off. HXC units with factoryinstalled suction service valves also have a relief valve in each compressor discharge line. Remote terminal strip (TB3) connections are made to the Main Base Board at plug MBB-J5. Refer to the 24-v wiring schematic located on the chiller for detailed information. The majority of the system operating intelligence resides in the MBB. Separate power sources are used for the CCP modules. Following is a description of the major safeties. Table 41 — High-pressure Switch Settings UNIT 30GX 30HXA 30HXC SWITCH SETTING psig kPa 303 ±7 2089 ±48 275 ±7 1896 ±48 191 ±7 1317 ±48 not replaced. MAIN BASE BOARD (MBB). Note that the oil heaters are deenergized if the oil level switch is open. EXPANSION VALVE BOARD (EXV).R and 30HXA oil separators relieve at 320 psi (2206 kPa). The 30GXN. Lighted continuously indicates a problem requiring replacement of module. Control Modules Turn controller power off before servicing controls. Relief valves on 30GXN. All other modules (including the Navigator) are designed to communicate only on the LEN bus. When the fluid temperature rises 6° F (3. check for shorted secondary of transformer. If the red LED is normal. The CCP will reset automatically when the switch closes. If a valve relieves. verify that all communication connections (J3 for MBB. For all models. Oil heaters are energized when the discharge gas temperature falls below 105 F (40.6 C). check the red LED. Proper operation and communication of these modules is indicated by LEDs on the surface of each module (all except the Navigator that displays ‘Communication Failure’ when it occurs). The suspect board(s) should be downloaded using the SmartLoader program. Both circuits’ oil separators on 30GXN. The heaters are deenergized when the discharge gas temperature rises above 110 F (43. If there is no input power. YELLOW LED — The Main Base Board (MBB) has a yellow LED. switch 1 should be On and switches 2. Determine the cause for trouble and correct the problem before resetting the CCP. If fuse is bad. The heater is energized with control circuit power. An LED blinking at a rate of twice per second indicates potential loss of program. COMPRESSOR PROTECTION Motor Overload — The compressor protection modules (CCP) protect each compressor against overcurrent. switches 1. it should be replaced. it may relieve at a lower pressure. This is a normal condition. 3 and 4 should be Off.R and 30HXA units have factory-installed relief valves as well. This connection allows conformance to this requirement. If this is not successful. For CCP1. however. COMFORTLINK™ COMPRESSOR PROTECTION BOARDS (CCP) AND THE NAVIGATOR — All of the ComfortLink modules perform continuous diagnostic evaluations of the condition of the hardware. OIL SEPARATOR HEATERS (30GX) — Each oil separator circuit has a heater mounted on the underside of the vessel.Safety Devices — The 30GX. See Appendix A for setting of MTAs and configuration headers. Reset is automatic as long as this is the first occurrence of the day. This light will blink whenever CCN (Carrier Comfort Network) communications are in progress. If the valve is 68 . the safety resets and the chiller restarts. All compressors have factory-installed high-pressure switches.3° C) above the leaving fluid set point. tripped circuit breaker or bad module. One relief valve is also installed on each 30HXC condenser. cooler heaters and inhibited ethylene glycol or other suitable solution must be used in the chilled fluid circuit. however each individual module does have its own operating software. Some local building codes require that relieved gases be removed. The EXV.3 C). or leak due to trapped dirt from the system which may prevent resealing. If the switch opens during operation. ENERGY MANAGEMENT MODULE (EMM).

The positive pin of each system element communication connector must be wired to the positive pins of each system element. Add refrigerant. The replacement modules will be downloaded with the basic software. NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gage) minimum stranded. Teflon. Belden (8772). At each system element. The connector is for field connection of a laptop computer running Service Tool or ComfortVIEW™ software programs. 69 . PVC/nylon. A short in one section of the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the bus. Add refrigerant. Check line voltage. the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a ground at one point only. Find and repair leak. Check loader solenoid valves. Support piping as required. If conditions return to normal. the shields of its communication bus cables must be tied together. 6 conductor) connector. oil pressure transducer. Determine location of voltage drop and remedy deficiency. specify the replacement part number (located on each module front or back). IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some routines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. Replace compressor. Replace compressor (worn bearings). Replace compressor. Open valve or remove restriction. Evaluate load requirements. Check wiring. If the Main Base Board (MBB) has been replaced. when ordering any replacement module. disconnect the CCN bus. Check oil pump operation. chrome vinyl. Check motor winding for open or short. or Columbia (02525) meets the above mentioned requirements. Replace or repair. The system elements are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. Repair leak and recharge. Check for plugged liquid line strainer. Any additional field installed accessories or options (sub-mode RSET. Replace fuse. Repair leak and recharge. Check for loose compressor bolts securing compressor to cooler. Open valve or replace if defective. Run new cable if necessary. Repair or replace valve if defective. check the CCN connections and cable. It is recommended that red be used for the signal positive. Replace switch. Replace control. Therefore. Check control circuit for ground or short. Replace if necessary. verify oil solenoid valve operation. For temporary CCN connection to the chiller. vinyl. there is also an RJ-11 (6 position.SLCT) should also be verified. Replace compressor if necessary. 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed in the field. It is important when connecting to a CCN communication bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network to simplify the installation. tinned copper. The unit model and serial numbers are printed on the unit nameplate located on an exterior corner post (30GX) or the corner of the control box (30HX). Check connections from CCP to contactor Check wiring and rewire. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different colored wires. Replacing Defective Modules — The ComfortLink™ replacement modules are shown in Table 43. verify that all configuration data is correct. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC. If the communication bus cable exits from one building and enters another. Consult CCN Contractor's Manual for further information. Replace transducer. Replace coil. Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface — The 30GX. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413 or 5463). Remove and clean strainer. Clean or replace.HX chiller units can be connected to the CCN if desired. the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). Repair/replace as needed. There are four terminals (including shield) located at TB3 for permanent CCN connection. Add refrigerant. Clean condenser. Use Navigator to reset current alarms. Rewire correctly. Repair or replace motor(s) if defective.Table 42 — Compressor Control Troubleshooting SYMPTOMS COMPRESSOR DOES NOT RUN CAUSE Power line open Control fuse open High-Pressure Switch (HPS) tripped Loose terminal connection Improperly wired controls Low line voltage Compressor motor defective Seized compressor Pre-lubrication not successful COMPRESSOR CYCLES Loss of charge OFF ON LOW SATURATED SUCTION Bad transducer TEMPERATURE Low refrigerant charge Failed expansion device Partially plugged or plugged strainer COMPRESSOR SHUTS High-pressure switch erratic in action DOWN ON HIGH PRESSURE Compressor discharge valve partially closed CONTROL Condenser fan(s) not operating (air cooled units) Condenser coil plugged or dirty (air cooled units) Condenser water valve not operating (water cooled units) Circuit overcharged UNIT OPERATES LONG OR Low refrigerant charge CONTINUOUSLY Control contacts fused Partially plugged or plugged strainer Defective insulation Service load exceeding design capacity Inefficient compressor SYSTEM NOISES Piping vibration Expansion valve hissing Compressor noisy COMPRESSOR LOSES OIL HOT LIQUID LINE FROSTED LIQUID LINE COMPRESSOR LOADERS NOT WORKING PROPERLY Leak in system Mechanical damage to rotors Shortage of refrigerant due to leak Shutoff valve partially closed or restricted Burned out coil Defective loader solenoid valve Miswired solenoid REMEDY Check main disconnect. or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of –20 C to 60 C is required. or polyethylene. full unit model number and serial number. If abnormal conditions occur. PVC/nylon. The basic software and unit configuration data is factory installed by Carrier in the replacement module. black for the signal negative. OPT1 and OPT2 are correct. The communication bus wiring is a shielded. and white for the signal ground. Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC. Wiring connections for CCN can be made at terminal block TB3. Check wiring. Clean coil. Follow the Configuration mode table and verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT. If the communication bus is entirely within one building. American (A22503). Replace valve.

ROUTINE (as conditions dictate) 30GX machines with E-coat condenser coils: • Check condenser coils for debris. 1. make sure the plug is installed at TB3 in the LEN connector. This information is needed later in this procedure. • Check all refrigerant strainers and filter driers for pressure drops. CCP2) REPLACEMENT REPLACEMENT PART NUMBER PART NUMBER (Without (With Software) Software) 30GX506748 HK50AA029 30HX515217 30HX501316 HK50AA033 30HX515218 HN67LM103 HK50AA026 HK50AA032 N/A HK50AA028 N/A 2. replace as necessary. 5. • Check chilled water flow switch operation. EVERY 3 MONTHS All machines: • Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks.3° C) below the expected low ambient conditions (5 gallon [19 L] minimum). clean as necessary • Periodic clean water rinse. Save the screws. Winter Shutdown Preparation — At the end of each cooling season the fluid should be drained from the system. 3.HX Liquid Chillers (completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder. 4. MONTHLY 30GX machines with E-coat Condenser Coils: • Check condenser coils for debris. Leave the cooler filled with the antifreeze solution for the winter. 9. Sub-mode SERV) to YES. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switches (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the defective module. Use an approved method of disposal when removing the antifreeze solution. setpoints and schedules. clean as necessary. However. clean as necessary • Coil cleaning with Carrier approved coil cleaner. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking and that the Navigator is communicating correctly. Restore control power. • Check condenser fan operation. Isolate the cooler from the rest of the system with water shut off valves. settings. 7. Disconnect all electrical power before servicing. Check that all power to unit is off. Maintenance RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — The following are only recommended guidelines. If cooler heaters have been installed. 6. Package the defective module in the carton of the new module for return to Carrier. YEARLY: All machines: • Check all electrical connections. or when there is no liquid in the system. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.DNE Winterization Performed (Configuration Mode. when draining. Return the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to normal operation position. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring power. 8. 10. replace/clean as necessary • Check chilled water strainers. especially in coastal and industrial applications. due to the cooler circuiting. • Clean cooler tubes if appropriate. some fluid will remain in the cooler after draining. • Obtain and test an oil sample. • Check to be sure that the proper amount of inhibitor is present in the chilled water loop. Remove the screw securing the communication drain wire (CCP modules only). change as necessary. 1. If the checklist does not exist. Save the screws later use. To prevent freeze-up damage to the cooler tubes perform the following procedure. Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 30GXN. • Check oil filter pressure drops. Be sure to deenergize heaters (if installed) as explained in Step 1 to prevent damage. Drain the fluid from the system.Table 43 — Replacement Module Part Number MODULE Main Base Board (MBB) Expansion Valve Board (EXV) Screw Compressor Board (SCB) Navigator Display Energy Management Module (EMM) ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Boards (CCP1. repair as necessary. fill out the current information in the Configuration mode on a new checklist. Reinstall all module connectors and communication drain wire (CCP modules only). clean as necessary 30GX machines: • Check cooler heater operation • Check condenser fan blades to insure they are securely fastened to the motor shaft and their condition. 4. Job site conditions may dictate that maintenance schedules be performed more frequently than listed here. remove the screw securing the cable clamp near TB3. replace as necessary.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer. Remove Fuse 1 to deenergize the heaters. • Check accuracy of thermistors.GXR. and removing the module from the control box. 30GX machines: • Check condenser coils for debris. Verify all configuration information. Tailor the various options and configurations as needed for this particular installation. • Check accuracy of all transducers for each circuit. or drain if desired. For Navigator replacement. Remove the defective module by removing its mounting screws with a Phillips screwdriver. For Navigator replacement. Winterization is complete. replace if greater than ± 2° F (1. Carefully disconnect all wires from the defective module by unplugging its connectors. 5. Update item W. Completely fill the cooler with an appropriate amount of inhibited ethylene glycol solution (or other suitable corrosion-inhibitive antifreeze) for 15° F (8. • Check to be sure that the proper concentration of antifreeze is present in the chilled water loop. deenergize the heaters to prevent damage and possible safety hazards 70 . Verify the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch is in the OFF position. Verify that all module red LEDs blink in unison. Tighten as necessary. • Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrigerant loss and presence of moisture. 3. 2. Electrical shock can cause personal injury.

Proper phasing has already been checked at the factory. Both shutoff valves are in-line ball type and are open when stem is parallel with the refrigerant flow. Rotating the valve handle clockwise will close valve and counterclockwise will open valve. Check condenser water pump for proper operation (30HXC). open the suction service valves in each circuit.I). or if reset is being used. If there is not sufficient pressure. complete the Start-Up Checklist for the 30GX. Tighten the jam nut. or other equipment to which the chiller supplies liquid. Switch Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to Enable or Remote Contact. time. Before filling the system with fluid following a winter shutdown. Loosen the jam nut. 3. Operating Sequence — The chiller is started by switching the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to either Enable or Remote Contact position. Caution: loosen stem locknut (L. If cooler pump control is enabled. compressors. valves. Higher than atmospheric pressure could be the result of a refrigerant leak in the cooler. pumps. IMPORTANT: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE CHILLER UNTIL THE FOLLOWING CHECKS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. Open condenser water valves. 6. be sure all are properly installed and wired correctly. On a command for cooling. Doing so will cause permanent damage to the compressor and will require compressor replacement. Check all field configuration data and set points. A flow switch is factory installed on all models with two or more pass coolers. After 20 seconds. To operate the valve. For single pass cooler models. 2. Provided there is a load on the chiller. If the unit has field-installed accessories. Verify that the leaving fluid temperature agrees with the cooling set point (1 or 2). Check all auxiliary components such as the chilled fluid circulating pump. 10. and operating schedule(s). 71 START-UP AND OPERATION Actual Start-Up — Actual start-up should be done only under supervision of a qualified refrigeration mechanic and qualified Carrier Comfort Network personnel. Check the cooler flow switch for proper operation (item ‘FLOW’. system information and operation at initial start-up. Inputs mode under sub-mode GEN. Consult the manufacturer’s instructions. Use a back-up wrench on the packing gland to prevent loosening while removing cap. 4. 9. the modified set point. Open the oil shutoff valves located by the oil pre-filter. 7. If condenser pump control (30HXC) is enabled. air-handling equipment. the cooler pump is started. fans. 12. thread) before opening Fig. No cooling range adjustment is necessary. SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW Fig. • Clean condenser tubes if appropriate. The checklist should be removed from the manual and kept with the job file for future reference. the condenser pump is started. Start chilled fluid pump and condenser pump (30HXC) if not controlled by unit. Service valve is located below the compressor in the cooler suction connection flange. 2. the oil solenoid is opened and the control reads the oil pressure from the transducer and determines if sufficient pressure has been built up. the linkage arm must swing past center of the actuator shaft cam to seat and prevent accidental opening of the valve. an alarm is generated after the second attempt and the compressor is not started. 4. When closing the valve. check the chilled water loop for pressure. 5. Verify operation of solenoids. and the ball valve to each compressor. Check to ensure the unit is level per the installation instructions. Chiller is controlling to the Control Point (item ‘CTPT’) displayed on the Navigator. 39 — Suction Valve Handle Details 8. Check incoming power supply for proper nameplate voltage. etc. Check the tightness of all electrical connections.H. Open the discharge and liquid valves in each circuit. 11. • Check condenser water strainers. 1. allow the machine to operate and confirm that everything is functioning properly.HX Liquid Chillers on pages CL-1 to CL-10. 3. This Checklist assures proper start-up of the chiller. if equipped. See Fig.30HXC machines: • Check Condenser Water Regulating Valve operation. 38 — Suction Valve Detail JAM NUT BRASS CAP VALVE HANDLE DO NOT make any changes to the factory-installed compressor power wiring in the control box or at the compressor junction box. application requirements. first remove the cap. Ensure sensor contacts close when the pump is on and open when the pump is turned off. and provides a record of unit condition. the oil pump is turned on to start the pre-lubrication process. Enter correct date. C open O C O close . Refer to the unit wiring diagrams. Set leaving fluid temperature. If factory-installed suction service valves are installed. 38 and 39. as listed in the Start-Up Checklist. the flow switch is factory supplied for field installation with factory-supplied victaulic nozzles. clean as necessary PRE-START-UP PROCEDURE IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or StartUp. System Check 1.

the compressor starts and comes up to full speed within 1 to 3 seconds. For across-the-line (XL) start chillers. 41 — Remote Alarm Relay Accessory Wiring.Upon building pressure. Convenience Outlet Accessory Wiring 72 . LEGEND FOR FIG. 40-54 ALM CFR CMP CNFS CNPI CNP-R CWP EMM EWT FIOP FSR FU GFI-CO GND LLSV LWT MBB MLV NEC OAT SCB SPT SW TB — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Alarm Condenser Fan Relay Chiller Water Pump Condenser Flow Switch Condenser Pump Interlock Condenser Pump Relay Chilled Water Pump Energy Management Module Entering Water Thermistor Factory-Installed Option Flow Switch Relay Fuse Ground Fault Interrupter Convenience Outlet Ground Liquid Line Solenoid Valve Leaving Water Thermistor Main Base Board Minimum Load Valve National Electrical Code Outdoor-Air Thermistor Screw Compressor Board Space Temperature Sensor Switch Terminal Block Field-Wired Factory Wired NEC FUSED DISCONNECT 115 V CONTROL CIRCUITS USE 30 AMP MAXIMUM FROM SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY FIELD CONTROL POWER SUPPLY 230 V CONTROL CIRCUITS USE 15 AMP MAXIMUM FROM SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY 2 1 GND TB4 Fig. FIELD WIRING Field wiring is shown in Fig. 115 or 230 V* Fig. MBB Fig. 40-54. 43 — Optional Ground Fault Interrupter. 115 or 230 V* MBB Fig. This method reduces the locked rotor current requirements by approximately 60% while maintaining enough torque to bring the compressor up to full speed. All Models. 40 — Power Supply Wiring * Dependant on control circuit power supply voltage. All Models. contactors 1M and S (starter contactor assembly) are closed and the compressor is started in a Wye configuration. 42 — Chilled Water Pump Relay Wiring. For Wye-Delta start chillers. the compressor is allowed to start (after 15 seconds).

46 — Chilled Water Interlock and Flow Switch Input Wiring Fig.R Minimum Load Valve Accessory Wiring. 47 — Remote On/Off Switch Input Wiring 73 . 30HXC and Remote Condenser Fan/Liquid Line Solenoid Valve Wiring. 115 or 230 V* Fig.Fig. 45 — Condenser Pump Relay Wiring. 44B — 30HX Minimum Load Valve Accessory Wiring. 115 or 230 V* MBB Fig. 30HXA 115 or 230 V* MBB MBB 1 3 Fig. 44A — 30GXN.

Field Supplied BLK RED BLK RED NOTE: Use signal converter for input types other than 4-20 mA. Fig.SCB MBB SEE NOTE MBB SEE NOTE NOTE: Install a 500 Ω resistor across output terminals to convert output signal to 2-10 vdc. 52 — Field-Supplied Head Pressure Device Wiring. 30GX Units MBB Fig. 48 — Condenser Flow Switch Interlock and Entering/Leaving Water Thermistor Wiring. 53 — Service Port Option or Accessory Wiring. 49 — Remote Dual Setpoint Wiring.R Units 74 . 50 — Outdoor-Air Thermistor (5KΩ at 77 F [25 C]) and Space Temperature Sensor (10KΩ at 77 F [25 C]) All Units. All Units Fig. All Units Fig. 30HXC Units MBB MBB Fig. 30GXN. 30HX Units Fig. 51 — Motormaster® Option. Fig. 54 — Energy Management Module Option or Accessory Wiring.

4.5 1.8 1.8 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1.8 1.8 1.4.5.8 1.5.6.4.8 1.R PUNCHOUTS PUNCHOUTS PUNCHOUTS PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP FOR COMP FOR COMP FOR COMP B2 B1 A2 A1 1.3.7.8 1.5 2.5 1.6.3.6 1.6.8 1.2.3.8 1.8 1.7 2.6.8 1.4.4.6.6. equal to ‘A’.2.3.7 2.5.7 1.4.8 1.2.8 1.7 1.6 1.5.3.6.3.8 1.4.7.5 1.7 1.2.6.2.2 1.5.4.7 1.5.6.R (High Ambient Data [Position 10 in model no.2.2.3.3. ‘F’.8 1.8 1.3.3.5.8 1.2.3.3.8 1.4.6.6.3.8 1.8 1.7.7 1.3.2.3.3.3.1 8 APPENDIX A 30GXN.2.8 1.6.4.5.6.4.7 1.5 1.7.7 1.2.2.3.2.4.8 1.2.2.2.4.4.4.7 2.2.5.3.5.8 2.7.2.7.6.4.4.8 1.4.8 1.4.5.2.6.5.7 1.3.7 1.7 1.4.2. All Models) ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps UNIT 30GXN.5.5.5.2.6 1.7 1.4.4.7 1.2.2.2.3.4.4.4.7.5 1.5.5.3.5.3.6.8 1.4.2.7 1.2.5 1.3.7.3.7.8 1.6.5.3.7.3.4.7 1.3.6.8 1.8 1.8 2.6.8 1.5 2.5.2.6.4.2.3.5.5 1.3.4.4.8 1.2.7.5 2. ‘T’.4.8 1.5 2.6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 94 142 232 258 116 248 150 84 128 212 234 106 224 134 116 176 288 314 144 308 186 104 158 260 288 130 268 162 140 212 348 384 174 372 224 128 194 320 354 160 324 202 140 212 348 384 174 128 194 320 354 160 324 202 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 78 118 192 214 96 206 124 70 108 176 196 88 182 110 78 118 192 214 96 206 124 70 108 176 196 88 182 110 78 118 192 214 96 206 124 88 132 220 244 110 228 138 94 142 232 258 116 104 158 262 288 130 278 168 COMP B2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — VOLTS-Hz 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 080 083 090 093 106 108 114 118 75 .6.2.7 1.5 1.6 1.3.7 1.6.4.6.3.3.3.7 1.3.4.7 1.8 1.2.5.4.5 1.8 1.5.2.7 1.3.5.7 1.8 1.6 1.5 2.4.2.2.7.3.3.4.6 1.4 2.8 1.8 1.6.5.6 1.3.2.3.4.7 1.2.5.3.5.3.5.2.4.4.2.8 2.5.3.6.7 1.6.3.5 1.5.3.6.5 1.2.2 1.3.5.3.3.5.2.8 1.6.8 1.4.5.3.4.5.2.5.2.8 1.3.6 1.2.5 1.7.2.6.6.2.4.2.6.7.4.6.4.3.6.7 1.7 1.5 1.3.2.4.2 1.6.6.4.8 1.2.3.3.4.5.2.4.3.4.4.2.5 1.4.3.8 1.2.4.3.7.3. or ‘V’].2.4.8 1.7 2.4.6.2.8 1.3.4.6.4.6.7.8 1.5 1.6.4.6.3.

4.8 1.3.2.5 1.7.4.4.6.5 2.6.3.5.8 1.8 3.3.7.7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1.7 1.7.5 2.7 2.5 2.8 3.7 2.7.3.3.4.3. 418B 160.8 1.5 2.4.4.6. 415B 163.5.5.2.8 2.7.5 2.4.5.5.7 1.8 1.7.6.5.2.6.4.4.3.6.3.8 3.4.6.7.6.2. 373B 150.6.7 1.3.5.3. 303A 174 76 .7 3. equal to ‘A’.4.7 1.8 1.3.8 2.7 1.2.5 2.4.7 1.7 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 128 194 320 354 160 348 210 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 188 286 472 522 236 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 108 164 268 298 134 276 166 104 158 262 288 130 278 168 128 194 320 354 160 324 202 128 194 320 354 160 324 202 188 286 472 522 236 404 246 128 194 320 354 160 348 210 188 286 472 522 236 488 294 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 188 286 472 522 236 COMP B2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 125 128 135. ‘T’.8 1.3.7 2.6.8 2.5.8 2.3.7 1.8 1.8 1.5.3.7 1.5.7 1.8 1.APPENDIX A (cont) 30GXN.4.6 4. 390B 138.7.3.8 2.4. 328B.3.5.4.7 1.7.4.7.8 1.5.4.8 1.4.7 1.8 2.4.2.4.3 1.3.8 1.3.5.4.3.2.6.6.8 1.7.3.8 2.7.5.6.2.4.5.4.3 1.8 1.8 1.6.5.6 4.4.2.6 4.8 1.8 1.7.6.6.7.7.2.6.3.4.8 1.7 1.6.3.5.6.8 1.8 1.8 2.3.6. 303B.4.5 1.7 3.4.5 1.8 2.7.2.7.5.3.7.8 1.7.8 2.3 1.6.5.7.6 4. 393B.4.4.4.8 1.4.3.7 2.5.8 1.5.6 4.7. All Models) ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps UNIT 30GXN.3.8 2.8 1.6.7.8 1.6.2.6.4.3. ‘F’.7 1.6.5. 283A.8 1.3.7 1.2.5.5.3 1.7.8 3.7.7 2.7 1.3.8 2.5 2.5.6.7.2.7. 283B.7.5.8 1.5 1.7.3.3 1.8 1.5.6.2.3.8 1.8 3.6.7.6 1.4.5 2.6 1.4.8 1.3.3.6.5.4.3.2.5 1.5.4.8 3.5.3.3.7.4.7.7 1.3.8 1.8 1.8 2.5.2.6.R VOLTS-Hz 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 PUNCHOUTS PUNCHOUTS PUNCHOUTS PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP FOR COMP FOR COMP FOR COMP A1 A2 B1 B2 1.7.3.R (High Ambient Data [Position 10 in model no.3.7 1.3.6.7.3 1.6.4.2.2.8 2.4.3.7.5.6.8 1.4.4.2.7 1.3.4.2.3.2.3.7 1.7 1.7 1.4.8 2. 370B 153.3. or ‘V’].7 2.6.7.4.7.3.6.6.8 1.7.7 2.6 4.4.7.7 1.7 3.5.8 1.8 2.6 1.8 1.6.6.8 1.7 1.

8 1.8 1.4.8 3.4.7 1. 328A. or ‘V’].3.4.8 1.5.8 1. All Models) ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps UNIT 30GXN.5.3 1.7 1.4.7.3.6.7 1.4.5. 418A.8 1.2.7 3.7.7 3.7.7 1.8 1.5.7 1.7 3.4.6.8 2.7.5. 478A.3.6.3.8 1.6.2.2.4. ‘T’.6.5.3.8 2.4.8 1.5 1.5.3.8 2.6 4.3.6.5.3.8 1.7 1.3.8 1.5.6 4.3 1.7 1.6 1.7 2.3.6.4.7.5.5.6 4.8 1.7.7 3.3.7 1.4.7.3.7 2.3.4.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 188 286 472 522 236 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 188 286 472 522 236 488 294 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 188 286 472 522 236 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 188 286 472 522 236 488 294 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — 90 136 228 252 114 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 108 164 268 298 134 276 166 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 188 286 472 522 236 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 188 286 472 522 236 488 294 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 154 234 388 428 194 128 194 320 354 160 348 210 188 286 472 522 236 488 294 128 194 320 354 160 348 210 154 234 388 428 194 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 188 286 472 522 236 488 294 188 286 472 522 236 484 294 COMP B2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 178.6 1.5.5 2.8 3.5.7 1.3.4.6.6.3.8 1.4.4. 390A.6.6.4.7.7 3.6.3. 453A/B.7 2.6 1.2.6.6.5.5 2.4.6.7 2. 500A/B 253. 353A.7.6.5.7 1.7.8 3.3.7.8 1.4.8 2.5.7.7 1.7.3. ‘F’.4.3.5. 415A.5.8 1.6.3.8 1.7.6.8 1.6 4.5.7 1.5.7.2.7 1.6 4.6.3.5 2.6.4.5.5.6.7 1.5.3.8 1.3.3.6. 478B 249.8 3.7 1.7.6.7 3. 373A.5.8 3. 525A/B 268.6.3.5.8 3.3.3.7.3.7.8 1.4.6.5.3.3.3.6.7.7.8 1.6 4.5.5.7.8 1. 475B 228.7 1.5.7 3.8 3.3.5.3.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B1 1.3 1.4.2.6 4. 370A.7.8 3.6 4.6.8 3.8 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.6.7.5.7 1.7 1.3.4.7.8 1.8 1.6 4.6.3.6 1.7 1.8 2.6.6.2.4.8 3.7.7 1.8 1. equal to ‘A’. 353B 204 208 225.5.6 1.3.3.3.4.8 3.2.8 1.2.5.3.3.5.7 1.7.8 1.2.3.6.8 3.7.8 1.8 1.6 4.5.3.7 1.3.6.7.8 2.3.4.5.5.7.2.4.7 3.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A2 — — — — — — — 1.6 4.7.5.7 2.8 2.7 1.5.8 1.2.8 3.4.5.6.5.8 1.8 3.4. 528A.6.7 1.8 1.4.6.5.6 4.4.4.6.4.3.4.5.3.8 1.8 1. 393A.5.5.7 1.5.7 3.4.8 2.4.6.8 3.7 1.3.6.APPENDIX A (cont) 30GXN.7 1. 475A.5.3 1.7 1.7.5 2.7 1. 450A/B. 503A.8 1.8 1.7 1.8 3.8 2.7.8 1.8 1.7 1.6.6 4.4.8 1.3. 528B 77 .7 3.6.5.7 1.4.7 1.6 4.5.7.8 1.7 1.7.7 1.5.6 4.4.6.5.7 1.8 2.R VOLTS-Hz 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A1 1.7 3.3.2.5.8 1.7 2.8 1.3.3.6.8 2.6.7 1.5.3.2.5. 503B 264.7 1.8 1.5.6 4.7 1.3.3.5.4.7 3.3.8 1.8 2.3.4.3.5.4.5.7.5.7.7.8 1.4.7 3.7.R (High Ambient Data [Position 10 in model no.4.8 1.7.6.5.7.6 1.7.2.2.7.2.5.5.7.7 1.5 1.

3.7 1.8 1.3.8 1.3.4.6.3.4.7 1.5.7.4.3.7 1.3.5.7 1.7 1.3 1.7 1.6.4.4.8 1.3.3.3.8 1.7 1.6.4.7.8 1.2.6.6.3.7.3.7 1.3.5.4.5.3.6.5.3.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B2 1.2.6.6.8 1.3.4.5.5.2.3.6.4.8 1.8 1. equal to ‘A’.2.2.4.2.4.3.3.3 1.6.2.8 COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 188 286 236 294 188 286 236 294 188 286 236 294 188 286 236 294 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 108 164 134 166 128 194 160 202 154 234 194 240 188 286 236 294 COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 188 286 236 294 188 286 236 294 188 286 236 294 188 286 236 294 COMP B2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 108 164 134 166 128 194 160 202 154 234 194 240 188 286 236 294 281 301 325 350 78 .7 1.8 1.7 1.7.4.5 1.5.3.8 1.8 1.3.5.8 1.7.3.6.6.8 1.5.5.4.4.6.7 1.5 1.4.7.5.7 1.3.3.4.8 1.7 1.7 1.5.8 1.2.4.R (High Ambient Data [Position 10 in model no. ‘F’.4.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B1 1.3.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.5.2.7.2. ‘T’.8 1.8 1.3.7 1.7 1.5.2.7 1.6.3.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A2 1. or ‘V’].5.2.5.2.3.7.8 1.4.7 1.7 1.5 1.8 1.7. All Models) ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps UNIT 30GXN.6.7 1.6.6.7.7 1.R VOLTS-Hz 575-60 380-60 460-60 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 460-60 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 460-60 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 460-60 380/415-50 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A1 1.5.8 1.4.8 1.5.8 1.6.8 1.3.3.5.APPENDIX A (cont) 30GXN.5.8 1.8 1.7 1.5.6.8 1.6.7 1.3.8 1.2.7 1.

8 2.8 1.7.4.6 2.3.8 1.6 1. or ‘U’].3.5.8 1.4.6.2.6.6.4.4.7.4.6.8 2.2.8 1.2.7 1.4.3.2.6 1.6.5.2.R (Reduced Ambient Data [Position 10 in model no.7 1.3 1.3.7.5.8 1.2.6 1.6.6 1.4.4.7.5.2.3.5.5.6.4.6 1.5.7 1.2.5.7 1.7 1.3 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B1 1.3.5 1.3.5.3 1.6 1.8 1.3.5.2.4.6 1.7 2.7 1.3.3.5.8 1.7 1.4.4.8 1.8 1.3.7.7.8 1.5.6.4.7.8 1.7 1.7.3.6.2.6.6.6.3.6.4.3 1.8 1.7.7.4.4.8 1.5.8 1.APPENDIX A (cont) 30GXN. Limited Models Only) ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps UNIT 30GXN.5.5.8 1.2.4.6.3.3.6 1.7.3.4.3.2.3.5.3.7 1.5.5.6.7 1.5.4.5.5.2.3.3.6.5.3.4.7.5.2.6 1.2.8 1.2.6.2.8 1.4.7 1.8 1.2.7 2.8 1.4.3.3.4.8 1.3.8 2.4.5.5.3 1.2.5.7.5.4 1.8 1.6.2.5.6.7 1.5.7.3.6 1.8 1.5.4.2.4.7 1.3.3.R VOLTS-Hz 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A1 1.8 1.8 1.5.3 1.3.8 1.4.2.4.3.4.5.6.6.6.2.5.4.2.5.7.8 1.4.2.7.4.8 1.6 1.7.2.8 1.2.3.2.2.6.6 1.8 1.6 1.8 2.3.6 1.6.2.3.5.6 1.4.7 1.8 1.3.4.6 1.6.4.3.3.3.7 2.4.8 1.7.8 1.3.4.7 2.7.3.4.4.3.8 1.6 1.7.7 1.6.8 1.5.2.3.8 1.8 2.5.6.3.5.3.6 2.8 1.2.2.2.8 1.5.4.5.2.2.7.2.3 1.3.7.4 1.5.6.8 1.6.4.7.4 1.7.5.7 1.2.4.3.2.2.3.6.7 1.2.4.7 1.5.3.2.4.3.3.2.4.2.7.2.6.4 1.4.2.2.7.5.5.5.2.7 1.3.4.3.7 1.2.2.6 1.5.2.6.5.2.5.8 1.4.4.4.7.5.3.4.2.8 1.8 1.8 2.3.4.6 1.4.8 1.2.7 1.3.3.3. ‘S’.5.4.2.2.6.8 2.2.7 2.8 1.8 1.3.4.2.7 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 88 134 220 244 110 238 144 74 114 188 208 94 206 126 112 168 276 306 138 294 178 96 144 240 266 120 248 150 138 210 344 382 172 368 222 118 178 316 326 146 316 186 138 210 344 382 172 118 178 316 326 146 316 186 154 234 388 428 194 398 240 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 74 112 184 204 92 200 120 66 102 168 186 84 172 104 74 112 184 204 92 200 120 66 102 168 186 84 172 104 74 112 184 204 92 200 120 80 120 200 222 100 208 126 88 134 220 244 110 94 142 236 260 118 250 152 106 162 264 294 132 272 164 COMP B2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 080 083 090 093 106 108 114 118 125 79 .3.4.3. equal to ‘–’.7 1.6.4.6 1.4 1.2.5.2.6.7.3.5.3.3.3.5.2.5.2.3.7.6 1.4.4.8 2.3. ‘E’.4.2.6 1.4 1.8 1.5.4.8 1.7 1.8 1.4.

7. 478B 253.4.7.6.3.7.5.3.4.8 2.4.4.7.6.6.5.2.8 1.6. 418A.3.5.5.6.6.5. 453A/B.6.4.2.4.8 1.7 3.2.7 1.3.7 1.6.8 2.7 2.7.7 3.5. 373B 153.2.7.3.8 1.6.7.4.6 1.7 1.7.7.8 1.8 1.8 1.3.7 2.7 3.7 3.8 2.6.4.4.2.7 2.8 2.8 1.3.7.5.3.2.8 3.8 1.5.4. 503A/B 268. 373A.7 2.5.8 1.4.7.8 1.5.6.7 3.8 1.4.5.3.4. 283B.4.5.3.2.4.4.6.7.6 1. 478A.5.5.3.2.7.6 1.6 1.8 2.3.8 1.4.4.4.5.3.5.8 2.3.3.7.6.6.7.6.6.8 3.3.5.6 1.5.5.8 1.8 2.3.7. 303A 178.3. or ‘U’].8 1.2.8 2.6. 528A/B 80 .6.8 3.8 3.2. 328B.6.2.7 2.8 1.7.6.3.5.3.4.4.4.8 1.2.4.6.8 1.7.4.4.6 1.5.3.4. 393A.2.4.5.5.8 1.7.6 1.7.2.8 2.7.6 1.7. 393B.6.6 1.5.6.4.3.5.7.5.5.2.5.5.7 2.2.6.2.2.6.4.6 1.8 1.5.7.4.8 3.7.8 1.8 3.4.3.7.4.2.4.4.5.6 1.4.5.6 1.7.8 1.8 2.7.6.4.8 2.4.3.8 1.8 2.7.7.8 2.2.6.7.4.6.4.2.3.3.8 2.4.3.7.8 2.6 1.5.5.6.3.8 1.8 1.3.2.5.8 1.4.4.4.8 2.4.6.6.5.5.8 3.3.5.6.6.7 3.5.8 2.3.8 1.R VOLTS-Hz 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 575-60 380-60 230-60 208/230-60 460-60 230-50 380/415-50 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A1 1.5.4.8 1.4. 328A.8 1.8 2.5.4.7.5.8 1.8 2.4.5.5.6.4.2.7.5.5.8 1.3.6.6.2.8 2.4.2.5.6 1.6.2.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 136 204 338 374 170 354 214 136 204 338 374 170 354 214 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 136 204 338 374 170 354 214 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 136 204 338 374 170 354 214 136 204 338 374 170 354 214 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 94 142 236 260 118 250 152 118 178 316 326 146 316 186 118 178 316 326 146 316 186 136 204 338 374 170 354 214 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 118 178 316 326 146 316 186 118 178 316 326 146 316 186 136 204 338 374 170 354 214 170 258 428 472 214 440 266 COMP B2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 128 138.6.6 1.8 2.5. equal to ‘–’.5.7.8 2.8 1.6.6.2.8 3.5.5.2.4.6.3.4.8 1.8 1.5.6.8 1.7 2.7.6 1.7 2.5.5.6.8 1.6 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.6 1.7.8 1.4. ‘S’. 353A/B 208 228.7.7.5.8 2.3.5.6.7.5.4.4.5.7 2.6 1.8 2.8 3.5.7.4. 283A. ‘E’.6.6 1.8 1.5.6.6.6.4.6.6 1.6 1.8 1.7.4.5.2.6.8 2.8 1.5.7.3.6 1.6.4.3.3.6.8 1.6 1.6.6 1. 418B 163. 303B.7.7.3.4.8 2.7 2.3.7 1.7.8 3.8 2.4.8 1.7.3.8 2.4.3.7 2.7.8 1.6 1.3.5.7 3.5.6.4.APPENDIX A (cont) 30GXN.6.4.8 2.7.3.5.5.3.7.7.4.3.5.4.5.5.8 1.3.4.6 1.6. Limited Models Only) ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps UNIT 30GXN.4.6.3.4.7.6 1.8 2.7.3.7.8 1.5.5.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1.8 1.7 3.3.7.3.5.4.8 1.3.7.5.5.3.5.7.4.3.4.8 1.7.7.3.8 2.8 1.7.7 1.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B1 1.2.2.3.6.6.7.5.6.7 3.5.3.5.6.5.3.3.2.7 3.4.8 1.3.6.7.3.4.2.2.8 1.4.6.4.7.8 2.4.4.2.4.2.6.R (Reduced Ambient Data [Position 10 in model no.7 1.6.8 1.7.6.

8 1.4.2.2.8 1.5.2.4.8 1.3.6.7.7.6.7.3.2.4.5 1.4.4.4.2.4.6 1.3.4.6 1.6.6 1.6.8 1.5.2.5.2.6.3.5.8 1.3.5.8 1.6.2.2.7.5.2.8 1.6.3.7.4 1.3.8 1.6.6.6.6.8 1.5.6.6.4.8 1.8 1.8 1.6.2.7.4.6.2.2.2.4.6 1.7.2.3.4 1.6.5.3.2.3.7 1.8 1.3.7.7 1.8 1.3.8 1.6.8 1.2.3.3.8 1.6 1.4.3.2.6.2.6 1.3.7.3.8 1.4.6.2.5.5.6.3.5 1.2.7.5.6 COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 54 82 136 152 68 142 86 66 100 166 184 82 174 104 80 122 202 224 102 210 126 98 148 246 272 122 252 152 98 148 246 272 122 252 152 98 148 246 272 122 252 152 118 178 294 326 146 306 184 118 178 294 326 146 306 184 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 54 82 136 152 68 142 86 54 82 136 152 68 142 86 54 82 136 152 68 142 86 54 82 136 152 68 142 86 66 100 166 184 82 174 104 80 122 202 224 102 210 126 80 122 202 224 102 210 126 98 148 244 272 122 252 152 076 086 096 106 116 126 136 146 81 .8 1.6.8 2.3.2.3.6 1.4.7.6.6.5.2.7.2.3.3.3.4.6.2.5.8 1.8 1.3.6.2.5.4.3.8 1.4.6.5.5.3.3.8 1.7.3.5.3.2.8 1.7.6.3.4.8 1.8 1.6.APPENDIX A (cont) 30HXC Models ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps UNIT 30HXC VOLTS-Hz 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A1 1.2.8 1.7.4 1.6.5.6.6 1.6.7 1.3.8 1.6 1.2.2.4.5.5.5.3.5.4.4.8 1.4.7 1.8 1.6.4.8 1.4.7.4 1.5.3.3.6.8 1.4.5.6 1.5.2.7 1.5.4.4.4.5.6 1.4.6 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B1 1.4.4.3.5.4.7 1.8 1.5.7.2.6.5.2.8 2.7.2.5.2.3.2.4.6.6 1.2.3.4.4.8 1.7 1.2.2.6 1.7.6.4.7.6.4.8 1.2.5.5.6.8 2.6.7 1.6 1.5.6.4 1.7.8 1.3.8 1.2.7 1.5.2.2.3.2.8 1.8 1.7.5.4.8 2.6.2.6.8 1.3.2.8 1.6 1.3.8 1.6.3.5.4.2.8 1.3.4.6.8 1.7 1.2.5.4.3.2.5.5.6 1.4.3.2.5.2.8 1.2.6.6.5.5.5.4.2.3.7 1.4 1.5.2.2.2.4.7.5.7 1.8 1.7.6.6.4.8 1.2.4.3.3.5.8 1.2.7.7 1.3.7.5.3.8 1.8 1.5.6.8 1.7.4.2.3.6 1.2.5.3.2.4.5.6.2.7.2.5.7.8 1.7.2.5.7 1.5.8 1.7 1.3.6.5.6.5 1.2.4.2.5.2.2.2.6.8 1.2.3.8 1.4.2.4.6 1.3.2.4 1.4.5.8 1.8 1.2.2.7.2.8 1.7 1.5.8 1.3.5.6.3.4.8 1.6.4.2.2.7.5.6.6.2.4.8 1.5.5.5.6.2.8 1.

2.7.4.3.7 1.5.8 2.4.6.2.8 1.8 1.3.4.4.5 2.5 2.4.7.4.7.8 2.5 2.4.6.6 1.7.6.8 1.6.2.3.6.2.4.3.7 1.3.8 1.3.4.4.5 2.8 2.4.6.5 2.4.6.6.4.7 1.3.8 1.6 1.6.7.7 1.2.8 2.8 1.APPENDIX A (cont) 30HXC Models ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps UNIT 30HXC VOLTS-Hz 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A1 1.3.8 2.5 2.4 1.8 1.8 1.5 2.6 1.6.3.4.6 1.8 1.3.2.7 1.8 1.4.8 1.2.6.7.5 2.7.4.6.4.2.5 1.4.4.4.7.2.8 2.3.5 1.6 COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 106 162 266 296 134 272 164 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 106 162 266 296 134 272 164 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 60 90 150 166 74 154 92 88 134 220 244 110 226 136 106 162 266 296 134 272 164 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 88 134 220 244 110 226 136 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 128 194 320 356 160 330 200 161 171 186 206 246 261 271 82 .4.6.7.7 1.2.8 1.4.4.8 1.3.8 2.7.5.6 1.7 1.4.3.6.5 2.2.8 2.3.2.2.2.8 1.6.5 2.3.3.5.2.4.5.2.3.8 1.5 2.4.7.2.5 1.3.6.5 1.4.2.5 2.4.2.2.4.2.5.6.4.4.6 1.4.3.2.6 1.7 1.4.6 1.7 1.7 1.5 2.4.5.3.6.3.3.6 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B1 1.3.4 1.5 1.3.3.7.2.4.3.6.2.5 2.2.5.3.3.7.7.4.8 1.6.6 1.8 1.3.4.6 1.5 2.7.6 1.7.4.6.2.6 1.5.8 2.2.4.2.2.3.3.5 1.8 1.6.6.3.8 1.4.7 1.4.2.7.4.2.4.2.2.3.4.5 1.3.3.2.3.3.4.3.8 1.3.4.4.4.2.2.3.3.5.3.4.4.5 2.3.6.3.6.4.6 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1.6.2.2.3.8 1.8 1.3.7.3.3.4.3.4.6.3.6.4.7.6 1.8 1.8 1.7.5 2.5 2.2.6.3.3.2.7.7.7 1.7.8 1.7.6.4.5 2.4.4.5 2.2.4.2.3.3.7.2.8 1.4.5 1.4.7 1.4.3.7.2.7.6.6.3.4.4.7.7.6.4.5 1.8 1.8 1.3.3.3.5 2.3.5.8 1.7 1.7 1.4.4.6.8 1.3.8 1.7 1.6 1.7.3.3.7 1.5 1.2.4.4.6.2.7.2.3.7 1.3.5 2.6.6.5.2.7 1.3.7.4.3.4.3.4.4.2.6.8 2.2.3.3.3.4.5 1.7.8 1.5 2.7.8 2.3.4 1.5 2.7.7.6 1.8 1.6.3.3.5 1.7 1.3.8 1.7.2.8 2.8 1.7 1.6.6 1.4.6.7.

6 2.3.6.4.5.3.8 1.7.6.4.8 1.2.5.3.6.4 1.8 1.2.8 1.7.7.4.7 1.8 1.7 1.3.5.2.4.8 1.5.7.3.2.7.6.2.4.4.7 1.7 1.3.7.3.2.6.8 1.5.8 1.8 1.4.6.2.5 1.8 1.7 1.5.4.5.5.6.7 1.7.5.2.5 1.7.3.4.7 1.7 1.3.3.3.4.5.5.8 2.5.4.7.5.3.7.4.7.3.6.4.5.7 3.3.5.2.8 1.3.3.7 1.4.8 2.8 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B1 1.7.3.2.6.5.5.6 2.2.7.6.4.5.5.5 1.6 2.6.8 1.6.6.5.6.7 1.7.6.3.6.2.7.3.4.4.6.5.4.5.8 2.8 1.6 3.8 3.8 1.6.8 1.4.2.5.7.4.7.6.5.6.4.6 1.4.2.4 1.4.7.8 1.3.8 2.3.2.5.8 2.2.3.3.4.8 1.6.4.8 2.8 1.6.4.6.8 1.6.7.8 1.4 1.3.7.2.2.3.5.8 1.7.6.3.2.8 1.8 2.3.6.4.6.6.4.8 1.8 1.8 3.6.3.5.7 1.7.8 2.5.5.2.7.6.8 2.3.4.6.3.8 1.4.5.8 1.5.5.8 1.8 1.3.2.5.4.8 1.3.4 1.3.4.3.2.5.3.5.6.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.5.7 3.6.3.4.8 1.6.8 1.6.6.6.8 1.6.4.5.5.8 1.6.8 1.4.2.6.7.6 1.6.4.4.4.5.6.5.5.8 1.4.8 1.8 1.2.2.4.8 1.4.7.6.2.2.6.7.4.4.5 1.6 2.3.6.2.5.3.2.4 1.8 2.3.3.8 1.5.8 1.2.3.3.2.5.2.3.2.3.4.7.2.8 1.6.8 2.2.5.8 2.3.5.3.4.3.5.4.7.5.5 1.8 1.8 1.6.7.8 1.5.2.4.3.4.5.5 1.6 3.5.5.7.8 1.7.8 1.5.4.7.7.8 1.3.6.4.8 1.4.4.6.6.4.5.8 COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 80 122 202 224 100 210 126 96 146 242 268 120 254 154 118 178 294 326 146 308 186 142 216 358 398 178 374 226 142 216 358 398 178 374 226 142 216 358 398 178 374 226 174 264 436 484 218 460 278 174 264 436 484 218 460 278 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 80 122 202 224 100 210 126 80 122 202 224 100 210 126 80 122 202 224 100 210 126 80 122 202 224 100 210 126 96 146 242 268 120 254 154 118 178 294 326 146 308 186 118 178 294 326 146 308 186 142 216 358 398 178 374 226 076 086 096 106 116 126 136 146 83 .3.2.3.5.3.7 1.6.2.2.4.8 1.4.8 1.7 1.4.8 1.4.3.3.6.3.7.7.8 2.5.7 1.4.2.8 1.7.6.APPENDIX A (cont) 30HXA Models ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps UNIT 30HXA VOLTS-Hz 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A1 1.7.4.3.5 1.5.8 2.7.6.8 1.5.3.7.7.8 1.4.

APPENDIX A (cont)
30HXA Models
ComfortLink™ Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps
UNIT 30HXA VOLTS-Hz 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208/230-3-60 460-3-60 230-3-50 380/415-3-50 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A1 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 1,2,5 1,4,5,6,7 2,5,6,7,8 3,4,5,8 1,3,4,7,8 2,5 1,4,5,7 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 1,2,5 1,4,5,6,7 2,5,6,7,8 3,4,5,8 1,3,4,7,8 2,5 1,4,5,7 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP A2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1,2,3,5,7,8 1,2,4,6 1,3,6,7,8 1,4,5,7 1,2,4,5,6,7,8 1,3,7 1,2,4,8 1,2,4,6,7 1,3,4,6 2,3,4,7,8 2,3,8 1,2,6,8 2,3,5,6,8 1,3,4,8 1,2,5 1,4,5,6,7 2,5,6,7,8 3,4,5,8 1,3,4,7,8 2,5 1,4,5,7 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 PUNCHOUTS FOR COMP B1 1,2,4,6,7 1,3,4,6 2,3,4,7,8 2,3,8 1,2,6,8 2,3,5,6,8 1,3,4,8 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 1,3,4,6,7 1,7,8 3,7,8 5 1,4,5,6,8 4,6,8 2,3,4,5,6 COMP A1 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 160 244 402 446 202 416 252 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 160 244 402 446 202 416 252 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 COMP A2 MUST TRIP AMPS SETTING — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 90 136 226 252 114 236 142 132 200 330 366 166 342 206 160 244 402 446 202 416 252 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 COMP B1 MUST TRIP AMP SETTING 132 200 330 366 166 342 206 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 196 298 490 544 246 518 312 196 298 490 544 246 518 312

161

171

186

206

246

261

271

84

APPENDIX B Capacity Loading Sequence Example — The following tables show the loading sequence for a 30HX186 (50/50 split) and a 30HX161 (59/41 split) chiller. Each
compressor has 2 loaders. There is no difference in operation between “Staged” and “Equal” circuit loading on 2 compressor chillers.

STAGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

COMP A1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

STANDARD LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 2-COMPRESSOR UNIT) % TOTAL LOADER LOADER COMP LOADER LOADER CAPACITY A1 A2 B1 B1 B2 (50/50 Split) 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 20.0 1 0 0 0 0 35.0 1 1 0 0 0 50.0 1 0 1 1 0 70.0 1 0 1 1 1 85.0 1 1 1 1 1 100.0

% TOTAL CAPACITY (59/41 Split) 0.0 23.5 41.1 58.8 70.0 82.4 100.0

STAGE 0 1 2 3 3A 3B 4 5 6 LEGEND 0 — Off 1 — On

CLOSE CONTROL LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 2-COMPRESSOR UNIT) % TOTAL COMP LOADER LOADER COMP LOADER LOADER CAPACITY A1 A1 A2 B1 B1 B2 (50/50 Split) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 20.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 35.0 1 1 1 0 0 0 50.0 1 0 0 1 0 0 40.0 1 0 0 1 1 0 55.0 1 0 0 1 1 1 70.0 1 1 0 1 1 1 85.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 100.0

% TOTAL CAPACITY (59/41 Split) 0.0 23.5 41.1 58.8 40.0 52.4 64.7 82.4 100.0

Nominal Tons
COMPRESSOR PART NO. 06N__123 06N__146 06N__174 06N__209 06N__250 06N__300 60 Hz NOM. TONS 39 46 56 66 80 — 50 Hz NOM. TONS — 39 46 56 66 80

NOTES: 1. Stage 3A (and 3B for 59/41 split) is not used by the algorithm when increasing stages. Stage 3 (and 2 for a 59/41 split) is not used when decreasing stages. 2. The % Total Capacities above are calculated based on compressor nominal tons. For the case of the 59/41 split above, the 30HX uses compressors with flow rates of 250 and 174 cfm (from compressor model numbers 06N__250 and 06N__174), which represent nominal tons of 80 and 56 (respectively) at 60 Hz. A factor of 40% is used when no loaders are energized, and a factor of 70% is used when Loader 1 is energized. The capacity shown for Stage 3B above is calculated as follows: % Total Capacity = [(0.40 x 80 + 0.70 x 56)/(80 + 56)] x 100% = 52.4 %

85

APPENDIX B (cont)
The following tables show the loading sequence for 30HX206 (57/43 split) and 30HX271 (67/33 split) chillers.All compressors have two loaders and the chillers are configured for equal circuit loading. See Note 2.

STAGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

COMP A1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

STANDARD LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 3-COMPRESSOR UNIT) % TOTAL LOADER LOADER COMP COMP LOADER LOADER CAPACITY A1 A2 A2 B1 B1 B2 (57/43 Split) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14.3 1 0 0 0 0 0 25.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 35.7 1 0 0 1 1 0 55.2 1 0 0 1 1 1 68.2 1 1 0 1 1 1 78.9 1 0 1 1 1 1 83.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 100.0

% TOTAL CAPACITY (67/33 Split) 0.0 13.3 23.3 33.3 46.7 56.7 66.7 80.0 100.0

STAGE 0 1 2 3 3A 4 5 6 7 7A 8 9 LEGEND 0 — Off 1 — On

CLOSE CONTROL LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 3-COMPRESSOR UNIT) % TOTAL COMP LOADER LOADER COMP COMP LOADER LOADER CAPACITY A1 A1 A2 A2 B1 B1 B2 (57/43 Split) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 14.3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 25.0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 35.7 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 31.6 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 44.5 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 57.5 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 68.2 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 78.9 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 65.9 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 83.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 100.0

% TOTAL CAPACITY (67/33 Split) 0.0 13.3 23.3 33.3 26.7 36.7 46.7 56.7 66.7 60.0 80.0 100.0

NOTES: 1. Stages 3A and 7A are not used by the algorithm when increasing stages. Stages 3 and 7 are not used when decreasing stages. 2. The loading sequence for 30GXN,R204-264 units is the same as those shown for the 30HX206,271 above.

86

7 1 0 1 0 0 0 39. See Note 3. 271 above. All compressors have two loaders and the chiller is configured for staged circuit loading.7 1 1 1 0 0 0 56.0 NOTES: 1.3 46.0 % TOTAL CAPACITY (67/33 Split) 0. The % Total Capacities above are calculated based on compressor nominal tons.7 90. the 30HX uses compressors with flow rates of 209.0 13. and 80 (respectively) at 60 Hz.0 100. and a factor of 70% is used when Loader 1 is energized. 06N_123. and 250 cfm (from compressor model numbers 06N_209.1 1 1 1 1 1 0 87.3 1 0 0 0 0 0 25.0 STAGE 0 1 2 3 3A 4 5 6 7 8 LEGEND 0 — Off 1 — On COMP A1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 % TOTAL CAPACITY (67/33 Split) 0.R204-264 units is the same as those shown for the 30HX206.APPENDIX B (cont) The following tables show the loading sequence for 30HX206 (57/43 split) and 30HX271 (67/33 split) chillers. Stage 3A is not used by the algorithm when increasing stages. STAGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 COMP A1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 STANDARD LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT. 3-COMPRESSOR UNIT) % TOTAL LOADER LOADER COMP COMP LOADER LOADER CAPACITY A1 A2 A2 B1 B1 B2 (57/43 Split) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.7 1 0 1 0 0 0 39.8 1 1 1 1 0 0 74.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14.3 1 0 0 0 0 0 25.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 35. 2.0 1 1 0 0 0 0 35.0 13.7 80. which represent nominal tons of 66. Stage 3 is not used by the algorithm when decreasing stages. 123.3 33.3 23. Loaders A1 on compressors A1 and A2 are energized in parallel.7 66.0 CLOSE CONTROL LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT.0 100.70 x 66 + 0.0 x 80)/(66 + 39 + 80)] x 100% = 39. 39. and 06N_250).7 66.7% 3.7 46. For the case of the 57/43 split above.70 x 39 + 0.3 23.3 33.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14. 3-COMPRESSOR UNIT) % TOTAL LOADER LOADER COMP COMP LOADER LOADER CAPACITY A1 A2 A2 B1 B1 B2 (57/43 Split) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 90.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 100. The capacity shown for Stage 4 above is calculated as follows: % Total Capacity=[(0. 87 . The same is true for Loaders A2 on both compressors A1 and A2. A factor of 40% is used when no loaders are energized.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 100.7 0 0 1 0 0 0 22. The loading sequence for 30GXN.7 1 1 1 0 0 0 56.8 1 1 1 1 1 0 87.3 26.

0 10.0 43.0 60.0 18.0 35. 4-COMPRESSOR UNIT) STAGE 0 1 2 3 3A 4 5 6 7 7A 8 9 10 11 LEGEND 0 — Off 1 — On NOTES: 1.R281-325 units is the same as those shown for the 30GXN.R350 above.0 88 .0 50. Stages 3 and 7 are not used by the algorithm when decreasing stages. STANDARD LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT.R350 chiller. Each compressor has 2 loaders and the chiller is configured for equal circuit loading.APPENDIX B (cont) The following tables show the loading sequence for a 30GXN.0 18.0 25.0 100.0 85. Stages 3A and 7A are not used by the algorithm when increasing stages.0 70.0 60.0 45. 4-COMPRESSOR UNIT) STAGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 COMP A1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER A1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER A2 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 COMP A2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 COMP B1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER B1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER B2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 COMP B2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 % TOTAL CAPACITY (50/50 Split) 0.0 43. The loading sequence for 30GXN. See Note 2.0 70.0 25.0 85.0 CLOSE CONTROL LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT.0 20.0 10.0 28. 2.0 50. COMP A1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER A1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 LOADER A2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 COMP A2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 COMP B1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER B1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER B2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 COMP B2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 % TOTAL CAPACITY (50/50 Split) 0.0 35.0 100.

0 100.0 68.0 18.0 50.0 70. Each compressor has 2 loaders and the chillers are configured for staged circuit loading. 4-COMPRESSOR UNIT) STAGE 0 1 2 3 3A 4 5 6 7 8 8A 9 10 LEGEND 0 — Off 1 — On NOTES: 1.0 75.0 35.0 20.0 85. COMP A1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER A1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER A2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COMP A2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COMP B1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER B1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 LOADER B2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 COMP B2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 % TOTAL CAPACITY (50/50 Split) 0.0 60.0 75.0 100.0 89 . 2. See Note 2.0 68. The loading sequence for 30GXN.0 10.R350 above.0 25. Stages 3 and 8 are not used by the algorithm when decreasing stages. Stages 3A and 8A are not used by the algorithm when increasing stages.0 CLOSE CONTROL LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT.0 18.0 35.APPENDIX B (cont) The following tables show the loading sequence for a 30GXN.0 10. STANDARD LOADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT.R350 chiller.0 50. 4-COMPRESSOR UNIT) STAGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 COMP A1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER A1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOADER A2 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 COMP A2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 COMP B1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 LOADER B1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 LOADER B2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 COMP B2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 % TOTAL CAPACITY (50/50 Split) 0.0 25.R281-325 units is the same as those shown for the 30GXN.0 85.

3-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (20″. 268-350* 30HX All 30GXN. 114.415B (STD) 30GXN.090* 30GXN. 125.128. 1-Pass Cooler no Economizer) Insulation Kit (16″. 2-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (14″.150.R281-350 (–1P) 30GXN.R370A.R153. 1-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (18″.APPENDIX C Available Accessories ACCESSORY PART NUMBER 30GX-900---001 30GX-900---002 30GX-900---003 30GX-900---013 30GX-900---024 30GX-900---009 30GX-900---010 30GX-900---034 30GX-900---048 30GX-900---049 30GX-900---015 30GX-900---016 30GX-900---017 30GX-900---018 30GX-900---019 30GX-900---020 30GX-900---030 30GX-900---039 30GX-900---023 30GX-900---035 30HX-900---010 30GX-900---027 30GX-900---032 30GX-900---036 30GX-900---038 30GX-900---045 30GX-900---046 30GX-900---047 30GX-900---067 30GX-900---068 30GX-900---069 30GX-900---070 30HX-900---017 30HX-900---018 30HX-900---020 30HX-900---021 30HX-900---023 30HX-900---024 UNITS 30GXN. 160* 30GXN. 1-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (18″. 4-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (16″.R108.328A/B.R160-178 (–1P). 3-Pass Cooler. 2-Pass Cooler. 150. no Economizer) COMMENTS Both circuits Both circuits Header end only One side per package One side per package One side per package One side per package One side per package One side per package One side per package Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads *And associated modular sizes.R208.R303A.R249. 093.135 (+1P) 30GXN.370B. 225* 30GXN.083. 1-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (16″.R080. 4-Pass Cooler.138.114 (+1P).393B. 1-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (16″.138. 281-350 30GXN. 30HX076-096 (+1P) 30HX116-146 (–1P) 30GXN.R208. LEGEND (STD) — Chillers with standard number of cooler passes (–1P) — Chillers with minus one pass cooler option (+1P) — Chillers with plus one pass cooler option 90 . 30GXN. 268.R253. 125. 204.503A/B. 178* 30GXN. 178. 228* 30GXN. 1-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (16″. 30HX206-271 (+1P) 30GXN.R204-268 (+1P).R253.R118. 281-350* 30GXN.528A/B (STD) 30GXN.R281-350 (+1P) 30GXN. 453A/B.R106. 160* 30GXN.R083. 264* 30GXN.R118. 106. 093. 106. 174.303B.R083. 135* 30GXN.475A/B.153 (STD) 30GXN.163. with Economizer) Insulation Kit (14″.R163. 1-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (14″. 204.150.R080.500A/B.R118.128. 225* 30GXN. 30HX161-186 (+1P) 30GXN.R and 30HX (230 V Control) 30GXN.373B. 478A/B. 228* 30GXN. 30HX161-186 (–1P) 30HX206-271 (–1P) 30GXN.R253.R163.390A. 450A/B.418B (STD) 30GXN.153 (–1P) 30GXN.178. 264* 30GXN. 128.373A. 525A/B.150.393A. 30HX106 (+1P) DESCRIPTION OF ACCESSORY Condenser Grille Package Condenser Grille Package Condenser Grille Package Condenser Grille Package Condenser Grille Package Condenser Grille Package Condenser Grille Package Condenser Grille Package Minimum Load Valve Minimum Load Valve Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Vibration Isolation Pads Vibration Isolation Pads Vibration Isolation Pads Insulation Kit (14″.418A.R and 30HX (115 V Control) 30GXN.125.R080-350 30GXN.093 (+1P).R118. 4-Pass Cooler.135 (STD).415A. 3-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (20″.125. no Economizer) Insulation Kit (14″.R080-228.090* 30GXN. 249.390B. 264* 30GXN. 108.174. 174.090. with Economizer) Insulation Kit (20″. 268. 3-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (14″.R108. 108.R118.R204-268 (–1P). 128. 138. 30GXN.R283A/B.R281-350 (STD) 30GXN.R160. 114. 353A/B.153 (+1P) 30GXN. 135* 30GXN.R153. 1-Pass Cooler with Economizer) Insulation Kit (18″.R080.128. 138. 150.138.

160* 30GX-900---074 30GXN. 30HX-900---040 30HX106 (–1P) 30HX-900---001 30HX116-271 30HX-900---011 30HX076-106 30HX-900---004 30HX076-146 30HX-900---005 30HX161-186 30HX-900---015 30HX206-271 30HX-900---032 30GXN.R (575 V) 30GX-900---057 30GXN.R and 30HX All 30GT-911---057 30GXN.178.090.163.093.R All *And associated modular sizes. 30HX-900---039 30HX206-271 (STD) 30GXN.R (230 V.R153. 460 V) 30GX-900---051 30GXN.) Energy Management Module Control Transformer Control Transformer Control Transformer (080-178*) Control Transformer (080-178*) Control Transformer (080-178*) Control Transformer (204-350*) Control Transformer (204-350*) Control Transformer (204-350*) Duplex Trim Kit Motormaster® V Control (575 V) Motormaster V Control (208/230 V) Motormaster V Control (380/460 V) Motormaster V Control (575 V) Motormaster V Control (208/230 V) Motormaster V Control (380/460 V) Chillervisor System Manager III DataLink Control Panel DataPort Control Panel Remote Enhanced Display GFI Convenience Outlet (60 Hz only) Unit Control Display Window Remote Service Port COMMENTS Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads Tubesheets and heads 30GXN.R and 30HX All 30HX-900---033 30HX (230 V.R All 30GT-911---063 30GXN. 30HX-900---038 30GXN.114 (STD) 30HX-900---036 30HX106 (STD) 30GXN.R and 30HX All CRLIDASY001A00 30GXN.R080-150.R106. 160* 30GX-900---073 30GXN.174.R (230 V. 3-Pass Cooler.114 (–1P). no Economizer) Insulation Kit (16″.135 (–1P).163-350* 30GX-900---075 30GXN.R (208 V) 30GX-900---058 30GXN.) Victaulic Condenser Connections (20 in.R106.R108.R and 30HX All CPNLDPT-01 30GXN.125. with Economizer) Insulation Kit (16″.30HX161-186 (STD) 30GXN.R204-268 (STD).083. 30HX076-096 (STD) 30HX-900---035 30HX116-146 (+1P) 30GXN. 2-Pass Cooler.083.093. 30HX-900---037 30HX116-146 (STD) 30GXN. no Economizer) Insulation Kit (14″. 160* 30GX-900---072 30GXN.R (575 V) 30GX-900---052 30GXN.APPENDIX C (cont) Available Accessories (cont) ACCESSORY PART NUMBER UNITS DESCRIPTION OF ACCESSORY Insulation Kit (14″. 2-Pass Cooler.R160. with Economizer) Insulation Kit (18″. no Economizer) Sound Enclosure Panels Sound Enclosure Panels Victaulic Condenser Connections (18 in. no Economizer) Insulation Kit (16″. 30HX076-096 (–1P).090.R and 30HX All CPNLDLK-01 30GXN.R080-150. 3-Pass Cooler.R (208 V) 30GX-900---055 30GXN.R080.R153. 460 V) 30GX-900---056 30GXN.R080-150.R153.) Victaulic Condenser Connections (22 in.R080. LEGEND (STD) — Chillers with standard number of cooler passes (–1P) — Chillers with minus one pass cooler option (+1P) — Chillers with plus one pass cooler option Single controller Single controller Single controller Two controllers Two controllers Two controllers 91 .163-350* CEPL130322-02 30GXN.R and 30HX All 30GT-911---049 30GXN. 2-Pass Cooler.163-350* 30GX-900---076 30GXN. 460 V) 30HX-900---034 30HX (575 V) 30GX-900---050 30GXN.R220-528 Duplex 30GX-900---071 30GXN. 2-Pass Cooler.

n nnn.1) snnn.n nnn. or DataLINK™ devices.n nnn. Circuit Running Current Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure Economizer Pressure Discharge Superheat Temp Discharge Gas Temp Discharge Gas Temp – A1 Discharge Gas Temp – A2 Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Suction Temp EXV% Open Variable Head Press Pct.n Enable/Emstop 00:00 to 15:00 Heat/Cool Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Close/Open 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 1200 nnn. BacLink functions as a gateway between a CCN and a BACnet system to facilitate the passing of data from the CCN to BACnet.n 0 to 100 0 to 100 nnn.HX chiller can be interfaced with multi-vendor control systems through 3 levels of inter-operability using BacLink.n snnn.n nnn. The Carrier DataLINK device is an interface device that allows other HVAC control systems to read and change (“read/write”) values in system elements connected to a CCN bus.n nnn. A2 Oil Pressure A2 Motor Temperature Comp A2 Running Current Comp A2 % Must Trip Amps % % °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) Minutes OCC CHIL_S_S ALM DEM_LIM MODE CAP_T SP CTRL_PNT EWT LWT EMSTOP MIN_LEFT HEATCOOL K_A1_RLY K_A2_RLY LOADR_A1 LOADR_A2 MLV OILA_HTR MTRCL_A1 MTRCL_A2 OILPMP_A OILSL_A1 OILSL_A2 K_A1_FBK K_A2_FBK OILA_SW CAPA_T CAPA_A A_CURR DP_A SP_A ECNP_A SH_A DISTMP_A DISTMPA1 DISTMPA2 TMP_SCTA TMP_SSTA EXV_A VHPA DOP_A1 OP_A1 TMTR_A1 A1_CURR A1_MTA DOP_A2 OP_A2 TMTR_A2 A2_CURR A2_MTA RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RW RO RW RO RO RO RW RO RO RW RO RW RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RW RO RW NA RO NA RW RO RO RW NA RW RO RO NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RO RO NA RO RO NA RO NA RO RO NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA CIRCA_AN 92 .n 0 to 600 0 to 100 % % Amps PSIG (KPA) PSIG (KPA) PSIG (KPA) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) % % PSIG (KPA) PSIG (KPA) °F (°C) Amps % PSIG (KPA) PSIG (KPA) °F (°C) Amps % Units Point STAT DataPort RO DataLink RO BAClink RO A_UNIT CIRCADIO Occupied CCN Chiller Alarm State Active Demand Limit Override Modes In Effect Percent Total Capacity Active Setpoint Control Point Entering Fluid Temp Leaving Fluid Temp Emergency Stop Minutes Left for Start Heat/Cool Select CIRC.n nnn.GXR. DataPort™. COMP A1 ANALOG VALUES A1 Oil Pressure Diff. Object Definitions 30GXN/GXR/HXA/HXC Series 6 with Software Version 1.8 to 21. The Carrier DataPort is an interface device that allows other HVAC control systems to “read only” values in system elements connected to a CCN communication bus. Both DataPort and DataLINK devices request data from a specified CCN system element and translate this data into ASCII characters off network.n snnn.n nnn.APPENDIX D Building Interface — The 30GXN.8 to 21.n nnn.n 0 to 600 0 to 100 nnn.n snnn. A1 Oil Pressure A1 Motor Temperature Comp A1 Running Current Comp A1 % Must Trip Amps COMP A2 ANALOG VALUES A2 Oil Pressure Diff.HX chiller control to support interface are listed in the following tables. A DISCRETE INPUTS Compressor A1 Feedback Compressor A2 Feedback Oil Level Switch CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES Percent Total Capacity Percent Available Cap.GXR.1) -20 to 70 (-28.1 and later CCN Table Name Description GENERAL PARAMETERS Control Mode Status 0 = Service Test 1 = OFF Local 2 = OFF CCN 3 = OFF Clock 4 = OFF Emergency 5 = ON Local 6 = ON CCN 7 = ON Clock No/Yes Start/Stop Normal/Alert/Alarm 0 to 100 No/Yes 0 to 100 -20 to 70 (-28.n snnn. Information from the 30GXN. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor A1 Relay Compressor A2 Relay Loader A1 Relay Loader A2 Relay Minimum Load Valve Oil Heater Motor Cooling A1 Solenoid Motor Cooling A2 Solenoid Oil Pump Oil Solenoid A1 Oil Solenoid A2 CIRC.n nnn.

n °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) % % Amps PSIG (KPA) PSIG (KPA) PSIG (KPA) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) % % PSIG (KPA) PSIG (KPA) °F (°C) Amps % PSIG (KPA) PSIG (KPA) °F (°C) Amps % Status Units Point K_B1_RLY K_B2_RLY LOADR_B1 LOADR_B2 MLV OILB_HTR MTRCL_B1 MTRCL_B2 OILPMP_B OILSL_B1 OILSL_B2 K_B1_FBK K_B2_FBK OILB_SW CAPB_T CAPB_A B_CURR DP_B SP_B ECNP_B SH_B DISTMP_B DISTMPB1 DISTMPB2 TMP_SCTB TMP_SSTB EXV_B VHPB DOP_B1 OP_B1 TMTR_B1 B1_CURR B1_MTA DOP_B2 OP_B2 TMTR_B2 B2_CURR B2_MTA FAN_1 FAN_2 FAN_3 FAN_4 COOL_EWT COOL_LWT COND_EWT COND_LWT DUAL_LWT DataPort RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO DataLink RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO BAClink RO RO NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RO RO NA RO RO NA RO NA RO RO NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO NA CIRCBDIO CIRCB_AN 93 .n snnn.n snnn.n nnn. Circuit Running Current Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure Economizer Pressure Discharge Superheat Temp Discharge Gas Temp Discharge Gas Temp – B1 Discharge Gas Temp .n snnn.B2 Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Suction Temp EXV% Open Variable Head Press Pct.n snnn.n 0 to 600 0 to 100 Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On snnn.n nnn.n nn.n snnn. B1 Oil Pressure B1 Motor Temperature Comp B1 Running Current Comp B1 % Must Trip Amps COMP B2 ANALOG VALUES B2 Oil Pressure Diff.n snnn.APPENDIX D (cont) Object Definitions (cont) 30GXN/GXR/HXA/HXC Series 6 with Software Version 1. B DISCRETE INPUTS Compressor B1 Feedback Compressor B2 Feedback Oil Level Switch CIRCUIT B ANALOG VALUES Percent Total Capacity Percent Available Cap.n 0 to 600 0 to 100 nnn.n snnn.n nnn.1 and later CCN Table Name Description CIRC.n nnn.n 0 to 100 0 to 100 nnn.n snnn.n nnn.n nnn. B2 Oil Pressure B2 Motor Temperature Comp B2 Running Current Comp B2 % Must Trip Amps FANS Fan 1 Relay * Fan 2 Relay † Fan 3 Relay Fan 4 Relay UNIT ANALOG VALUES Cooler Entering Fluid Cooler Leaving Fluid Condenser Entering Fluid Condenser Leaving Fluid Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid OPTIONS TEMPERATURE RESET 4-20 mA Reset Signal Outside Air Temperature Space Temperature DEMAND LIMIT 4-20 mA Demand Signal Demand Limit Switch 1 Demand Limit Switch 2 CCN Loadshed Signal nn.n nnn.n nnn. COMP B1 ANALOG VALUES B1 Oil Pressure Diff.n nnn.n Off/On Off/On 0 = Normal 1 = Redline 2 = Loadshed mA °F (°C) °F (°C) mA RST_MA OAT SPT LMT_MA DMD_SW1 DMD_SW2 DL_STAT RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RW RW RO RO RO RO RO NA NA RO NA NA RO Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Close/Open 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 1200 nnn.n snnn. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor B1 Relay Compressor B2 Relay Loader B1 Relay Loader B2 Relay Minimum Load Valve Oil Heater Motor Cooling B1 Solenoid Motor Cooling B2 Solenoid Oil Pump Oil Solenoid B1 Oil Solenoid B2 CIRC.

8 to 21. Line Solenoid Valve Dual Chiller Size Dual Chiller Pct Total Cap Dual Chiller Tons Avail Dual Chiller Pct Avail Cap COOLING Cooling Setpoint 1 Cooling Setpoint 2 ICE Setpoint HEATING Heating Setpoint 1 Heating Setpoint 2 SETPOINT RAMP LOADING Cooling Ramp Loading Heating Ramp Loading HEAD PRESSURE Head Pressure Setpoint A Head Pressure Setpoint B Approach Setpoint Timed Override Hours Period 1 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied Time Unoccupied Time Period 2 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied Time Unoccupied Time Period 3 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied Time Unoccupied Time Period 4 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied Time OCCPC01S Unoccupied Time Period 5 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied Time Unoccupied Time Period 6 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied Time Unoccupied Time Period 7 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied Time Unoccupied Time Period 8 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied Time Unoccupied Time °C °F NA RO RW — — — — — LEGEND Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Not Available Read Only Read/Write Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On Off/On No/Yes Off/On nn.n Open/Close nnn 0-100 nnn 0-100 -20 to 70 (-28.0 (0.0) 0.7 to 60. 94 .1) -20 to 32 (-28. †Circuit B Condenser Fan Output (30HXA only).0 (0.1 and later CCN Table Name Description PUMPS Cooler Pump Relay Condenser Pump Relay MISCELLANEOUS Dual Setpoint Switch Cooler Flow Switch Condenser Flow Switch Ice Done Cooler Heater 4-20 mA Cooling Setpoint 4-20 mA Heating Setpoint Liq.1 to 1.2 to 2.7 to 60.8 to 0.7 to 60.7 to 60.1 to 1.0) 80 to 140 (26.1) 80 to 140 (26.8 to 21.APPENDIX D (cont) Object Definitions (cont) 30GXN/GXR/HXA/HXC Series 6 with Software Version 1.2 to 2.0) 0.0) 80 to 140 (26.1) -20 to 70 (-28.1 to 20.1) 0.0) 80 to 140 (26.0 0 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) Hours Status Units Point COOL_PMP COND_PMP DUAL_IN COOLFLOW CONDFLOW ICE COOL_HTR CSP_IN HSP_IN LLSV SIZE_DPX CAPT_DPX SIZEADPX CAPA_DPX CSP1 CSP2 CSP3 HSP1 HSP2 CRAMP HRAMP HSP_A HSP_B APRCH_SP OVR-EXT DOW1 OCCTOD1 UNOCTOD1 DOW2 OCCTOD2 UNOCTOD2 DOW3 OCCTOD3 UNOCTOD3 DOW4 OCCTOD4 UNOCTOD4 DOW5 OCCTOD5 UNOCTOD5 DOW6 OCCTOD6 UNOCTOD6 DOW7 OCCTOD7 UNOCTOD7 DOW8 OCCTOD8 UNOCTOD8 DataPort RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA DataLink RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW BAClink RO RO NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RW NA NA RW NA NA NA NA NA NA RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW OPTIONS (cont) mA mA Tons % Tons % °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) *Circuit A Condenser Fan Output (30HXA only).n nn.

171 186 206 246-271 10 1 100 COOLER FLOW RATE (GPM) 1000 Unit Size Range NOTE: Ft of water = 2. 146 161. 126 106 PRESSURE DROP (KPA) 100 076. 126 076. 086 096 PRESSURE DROP (FT WG) 106 136. 146 161. 171 186 206 246-271 10 1 1 10 COOLER FLOW RATE (L/S) 100 Unit Size Range 30HX COOLER PRESSURE DROP — SI 95 .APPENDIX E The following charts list pressure drops for coolers and condensers. 30HX COOLER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH 1000 116. 100 116.31 x psig. 086 096 136.

30HX CONDENSER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH Unit Size Range 30HX CONDENSER PRESSURE DROP — SI 96 .31 x psig.APPENDIX E (cont) Unit Size Range NOTE: Ft of water = 2.

R204-268 COOLER PRESSURE DROP — SI 30GXN. 253. 10 09 11 8. 22 5 25 3. .R080-178 COOLER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH 30GXN. 0. 268 10 225.APPENDIX E (cont) 50 40 30 200 0. 16 15 3. 6 5 4 3 40 30 2 20 1 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 10 10 20 30 40 COOLER FLOW RATE (GPM) NOTE: Ft of water = 2. COOLER FLOW RATE (L/s) 30GXN.R080-178 COOLER PRESSURE DROP — SI 100 1000 PRESSURE DROP (kpa) 100 PRESSURE DROP (ft wg) 204. 13 13 8. 3 8 . 09 .1 13 3 8. 10 09 6. 0.31 x psig. 2 . 0. 08 3.1 11 12 4 25 8. 08 0. 11 4 70 0. 12 5. 17 4 17 8 08 09 8. 20 8 26 8 1 10 COOLER FLOW RATE (L/s) 100 1 100 COOLER FLOW RATE (GPM) 1000 30GXN. 3 17 17 8 4 20 PRESSURE DROP (ft wg) 100 90 80 PRESSURE DROP (kPa) 3 3. 208 249.R204-268 COOLER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH 97 12 7 8. 5 15 16 0. 264. 228 10 24 9. 16 15 5 0. 50 08 10 10 9 8 6. 15 16 3 3. 04 22 8 26 4. 10 60 11 8.

APPENDIX E (cont) 100 PRESSURE DROP (ft wg) 10 1 100 COOLER FLOW RATE (GPM) 10000 30GXN.R281-350 COOLER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH NOTE: Ft of water = 2.31 x psig.R281-350 COOLER PRESSURE DROP — SI 98 . 1000 PRESSURE DROP (kpa) 100 10 1 10 COOLER FLOW RATE (L/s) 100 30GXN.

475. 418-528 DUPLEX COOLER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH 99 .APPENDIX E (cont) 100 303 283 370 415 PRESSURE DROP (ft wg) 390 10 1 100 1000 COOLER FLOW RATE (GPM) 10000 30GXN. 453.R283. 415 DUPLEX COOLER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH 100 328. 373 393. 303. 528 450. 393. 353. 478 1 100 1000 COOLER FLOW RATE (GPM) 10000 30GXN. 418 PRESSURE DROP (ft wg) 10 500. 525.R328. 390. 373. 353. 370. 503.

373 393. 415 DUPLEX COOLER PRESSURE DROP — SI 100 328. 393. 303. 418 PRESSURE DROP (kPa) 500. 528 450. 390.R283. 418-528 DUPLEX COOLER PRESSURE DROP — SI 100 . 503.APPENDIX E (cont) 1000 303 PRESSURE DROP (kPa) 100 283 370 415 390 10 1 10 COOLER FLOW RATE (L/s) 100 30GXN. 475. 370. 478 10 1 10 COOLER FLOW RATE (L/s) 100 30GXN.R328. 373. 525. 353. 453. 353.

Without Economizer .Condenser Fans Condenser Fans Condenser Coil Condenser Coil Liquid Line Service Valve Discharge Service Valve Back Pressure Valve Equalizer Line Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2 Relief Valve 2 Discharge Service Valve Condenser Coil Condenser Coil Liquid Line Service Valve Strainer/ Filter Drier Equalizer Line Oil Heater Oil Heater 6 Loader 2 Loader 1 5 Oil Filter (External) Oil Filter (External) Oil Pump Loader 1 Loader 2 Oil Pump Check Valve Check Valve Oil Level Switch Oil Level Switch EXV 1 Strainer/ 2 Filter Drier 3 4 5 6 7 8 — — — — — — — — — LEGEND Electronic Expansion Valve Suction Pressure Transducer Discharge Pressure Transducer Economizer Pressure Transducer Oil Pressure Transducer High Pressure Switch Discharge Gas Thermistor Entering Water Thermistor Leaving Water Thermistor — Refrigerant Access Fitting — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port 6 Muffler Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve Muffler Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option) APPENDIX F 101 4 Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 1 4 1 Suction Service Valve (Option) Suction Service Valve (Option) 5 — Fusible Plug — Device Connection 3 3 Oil Filter (Internal) Oil Filter (Internal) Relief Valve Relief Valve 8 7 EXV EXV Flow Switch Cooler Heater (Option) Sightglass Dry Eye Sightglass Dry Eye Cooler Heater (Option) Typical System Components. 30GXN.114.GXR080-106.

Condenser Fans Condenser Fans Condenser Coil Condenser Coil Liquid Line Service Valve Discharge Service Valve Back Pressure Valve Equalizer Line Strainer/ Filter Drier Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2 Relief Valve 2 Discharge Service Valve Condenser Coil Condenser Coil Strainer/ Filter Drier Equalizer Line LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer — Oil Pressure Transducer Liquid Line 4 — High Pressure Switch Service Valve 5 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Water Thermistor — Refrigerant Access Fitting — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection Oil Heater Oil Heater 6 Loader 2 Loader 1 Muffler 5 Oil Filter (External) Oil Filter (External) Oil Pump Oil Level Switch Oil Level Switch 6 Muffler Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve APPENDIX F (cont) Check Valve Check Valve Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option) Oil Pump 3 Econo. 3 Valve (SSV Oil Filter Option) (Internal) 4 Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 4 Econo.125-178. Serv. With Economizer . Valve (SSV Oil Filter Option) (Internal) 1 Relief Valve Economizer 1 Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve Economizer TXV TXV Solenoid Valve Loader 1 Loader 2 102 Suction Service Valve (Option) Suction Service Valve (Option) 5 TXV Solenoid Valve Economizer TXV Relief Valve Economizer 8 7 EXV EXV Flow Switch Cooler Heater (Option) Sightglass Dry Eye Sightglass Dry Eye Cooler Heater (Option) Typical System Components.GXR108. 30GXN. Serv.

Condenser Fans Condenser Fans Condenser Coil Condenser Coil Liquid Line Service Valve Equalizer Line Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2 Discharge Service Valve Condenser Coil Condenser Coil LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer 4 — Oil Pressure Transducer 5 — High Pressure Switch 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Water Thermistor — Refrigerant Access Fitting — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection Strainer/ Filter Drier Oil Level Switch Oil Heater Muffler Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve 6 Muffler 5 TXV Solenoid Economizer Valve TXV Loader 1 Loader 2 5 Check Valve Oil Pump OIl Filter (External) Loader 2 Loader 1 6 Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option) Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) Econ. Solenoid APPENDIX F (cont) 103 Oil Filter (Internal) 4 4 Oil Filter (Internal) 1 Relief Valve Suction Service Valve (Option) Suction Service Valve (Option) Econ. Serv.GXR204-268 Circuit A. 30GXN.GXR281-350 Circuit A and B. Valve (SSV Option) 8 7 EXV Flow Switch Cooler Heater (Option) Sightglass Dry Eye Cooler Heater (Option) Typical System Components. 30GXN. Solenoid 3 Economizer Econo. With Economizer .

Serv.GXR204-268 Circuit B.Condenser Fans Condenser Fans Condenser Coil Condenser Coil Condenser Coil Condenser Coil Liquid Line Service Valve Equalizer Line Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2 Strainer/ Filter Drier LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer 4 — Oil Pressure Transducer 5 — High Pressure Switch 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Water Thermistor — Refrigerant Access Fitting — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection Discharge Service Valve Oil Level Switch Oil Heater 6 Loader 2 Loader 1 Muffler 5 Oil Filter (External) Oil Pump Motor Cooling Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option) APPENDIX F (cont) Check Valve 3 Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 4 1 Relief Valve Oil Filter (Internal) Economizer 8 Solenoid Valve 104 Suction Service Valve (Option) TXV Solenoid Valve Economizer TXV Econo. With Economizer . Valve (SSV Option) 7 EXV Flow Switch Cooler Heater (Option) Sightglass Dry Eye Cooler Heater (Option) Typical System Components. 30GXN.

10 2 Relief Valve Relief Valve 2 Oil Level Switch & Oil Level Indicating Sightglasses Oil Level Switch & Oil Level Indicating Sightglasses 9 EXV SSV 1 2 3 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve (Brine Option) — — — — — — — — — — Liquid Line Solenoid Valve (Brine Option) Check Valve Oil Pump Check Valve Oil Pump (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) Muffler Filter Drier Sightglass Dry Eye Liquid Line Service Valve Discharge Service Valve Strainer Oil Filter (External) Oil Filter (External) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Strainer Liquid Line Service Valve Discharge Service Valve — — Sightglass Dry Eye Filter Drier (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) LEGEND Electronic Expansion Valve Suction Service Valve Suction Pressure Transducer Discharge Pressure Transducer Economizer Pressure Transducer Oil Pressure Transducer High Pressure Switch Discharge Gas Thermistor Entering Chilled Water Thermistor Leaving Chilled Water Thermistor Entering Condenser Water Thermistor (Option) Leaving Condenser Water Thermistor (Option) — Refrigerant Access Fitting Muffler Loader 1 Loader 2 5 Loader 2 Loader 1 6 Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve APPENDIX F (cont) Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option) 105 3 4 Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 1 4 3 1 Suction Service Valve (Option) Suction Service Valve (Option) 6 — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection 5 Oil Filter (Internal) Oil Filter (Internal) Relief Valve Relief Valve 8 7 EXV EXV Flow Switch Sightglass Dry Eye Sightglass Dry Eye Typical System Components. 30HXC076-146. Without Economizer .

With Economizer . 30HXC161-186.10 2 Relief Valve Relief Valve 2 Oil Level Switch & Oil Level Indicating Sightglasses Oil Level Switch & Oil Level Indicating Sightglasses 9 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve (Brine Option) Strainer/ Filter Drier Oil Filter (External) Oil Filter (External) Strainer/ Filter Drier Liquid Line Solenoid Valve (Brine Option) LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer 4 — Oil Pressure Transducer 5 — High Pressure Switch 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Chilled Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Chilled Water Thermistor 9 — Entering Condenser Water Thermistor (Option) 10 — Leaving Condenser Water Thermistor (Option) — Refrigerant Access Fitting Liquid Line Service Valve Oil Pump Check Valve Muffler (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) Discharge Service Valve Oil Pump Check Valve Discharge Service Valve Liquid Line Service Valve (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection Economizer TXV Muffler Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve 5 6 APPENDIX F (cont) Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option) 106 Loader 2 Loader 1 3 4 Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 1 4 3 Oil Filter (Internal) 1 Suction Service Valve (Option) Suction Service Valve (Option) Economizer TXV Loader 1 Loader 2 6 5 Oil Filter (Internal) Economizer Relief Valve Relief Valve Economizer 8 7 EXV EXV Flow Switch Service Valve (SSV Option) Sightglass Dry Eye Sightglass Dry Eye Service Valve (SSV Option) Typical System Components.

10 2 Relief Valve Oil Level Switch Oil Level Indicating Sightglasses 9 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve (Brine Option) Strainer/ Filter Drier OIl Filter (External) Liquid Line Service Valve (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) Muffler Loader 2 Loader 1 5 6 Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve Loader 1 Loader 2 5 Discharge Service Valve Oil Pump Check Valve Discharge Service Valve LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer 4 — Oil Pressure Transducer 5 — High Pressure Switch 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Chilled Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Chilled Water Thermistor 9 — Entering Condenser Water Thermistor (Option) 10 — Leaving Condenser Water Thermistor (Option) — Refrigerant Access Fitting — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection Economizer TXV APPENDIX F (cont) Econ. (Internal) Solenoid Muffler 107 1 Suction Service Valve (Option) Suction Service Valve (Option) Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option) Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 8 Economizer Relief Valve 7 EXV Flow Switch Sightglass Dry Eye Service Valve (SSV Option) Typical System Components. With Economizer . Solenoid Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve 6 3 Oil Filter (Internal) 4 4 Oil Filter Econ. 30HXC206-271 Circuit A.

10 2 Relief Valve

Oil Level Switch & Oil Level Indicating Sightglasses

9

Oil Filter (External) Strainer/ Filter Drier Liquid Line Solenoid Valve (Brine Option)

LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer 4 — Oil Pressure Transducer 5 — High Pressure Switch 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Chilled Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Chilled Water Thermistor — Refrigerant Access Fitting

Check Valve Oil Pump (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) Muffler

Discharge Service Valve Liquid Line Service Valve

— High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection

APPENDIX F (cont)

Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option)

Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 3 4 Oil Filter (Internal)

1 Relief Valve

Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve

108
Loader 2 Loader 1 6 5 Economizer 8 Suction Service Valve (Option) EXV Service Valve (SSV Option)

Economizer TXV

7

Flow Switch Sightglass Dry Eye

Typical System Components, 30HXC206-271 Circuit B, With Economizer

Liquid Line Servive Valve To Condenser To Condenser From Condenser

Liquid Line Service Valve Equalizer Line (Field Supplied/Connected) Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2 Discharge Service Valve Strainer

From Condenser

Equalizer Line (Field Supplied/Connected) Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2

Strainer Oil Level Switch Oil Level Switch (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) Muffler Oil Filter (External) Loader 2 Loader 1 6 5 Oil Pump Filter Drier

Discharge Service Valve

LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer 4 — Oil Pressure Transducer 5 — High Pressure Switch 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Water Thermistor — Refrigerant Access Fitting — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection

Filter Drier Oil Filter (External) Oil Pump Check Valve Check Valve

(w/o SSV Option)

Relief Valve (SSV Option)

Muffler

Loader 1 Loader 2

Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve

Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option)

APPENDIX F (cont)

3

3

Oil Filter (Internal) 4

Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 1

4

Oil Filter (Internal) 1 Relief Valve Economizer 8

Relief Valve

7

Suction Service Valve (Option)

Suction Service Valve (Option) EXV

EXV

Flow Switch Sightglass Dry Eye

Sightglass Dry Eye

Typical System Components, 30HXA076-146, Without Economizer

Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve

6 5

109

From Condenser To Condenser To Condenser

From Condenser

Strainer/Filter Drier Equalizer Line (Field Supplied/Connected) Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2 Discharge Service Valve Liquid Line Service Valve Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2

Equalizer Line (Field Supplied/Connected)

Strainer/ Filter Drier

Liquid Line Service Valve Oil Level Switch Oil Level Switch (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option)

Discharge Service Valve

LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer 4 — Oil Pressure Transducer 5 — High Pressure Switch 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Water Thermistor — Refrigerant Access Fitting

(w/o SSV Option)

Relief Valve (SSV Option) Oil Filter (External) Oil Filter (External) Loader 2 Loader 1 6 5 Oil Pump

— High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection
Economizer TXV Muffler Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve

Muffler

Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve

Economizer TXV Oil Pump Check Valve Check Valve

Loader 1 Loader 2

Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option)

APPENDIX F (cont)

6 5

110
3 4 Oil Filter (Internal) 1 4 Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 1 Suction Service Valve (Option) Suction Service Valve (Option)

3

Oil Filter (Internal)

Economizer

Relief Valve

Relief Valve

Economizer 8

7

EXV

EXV

Flow Switch Sightglass Dry Eye

Sightglass Dry Eye Service Valve (SSV Option)

Service Valve (SSV Option)

Typical System Components, 30HXA161-186, With Economizer

30HXA206-271 Circuit A.From Condenser To Condenser Strainer/Filter Drier Equalizer Line (Field Supplied/Connected) Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2 Discharge Service Valve Oil Level Switch Oil Level Switch Back Pressure Valve Discharge Service Valve Liquid Line Service Valve LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer 4 — Oil Pressure Transducer 5 — High Pressure Switch 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Water Thermistor — Refrigerant Access Fitting (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) Oil Filter (External) Muffler Loader 1 Loader 2 5 Check Valve Oil Pump 5 Loader 2 Loader 1 (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug 6 Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve Economizer Solenoid Economizer TXV 6 Muffler Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve APPENDIX F (cont) 3 Oil Filter (Internal) 4 Economizer Solenoid Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 4 Oil Filter (Internal) Economizer 1 Relief Valve Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option) — Device Connection 111 Suction Service Valve (Option) Suction Service Valve (Option) 8 7 EXV Flow Switch Sightglass Dry Eye Service Valve (SSV Option) Typical System Components. With Economizer .

30HXA206-271 Circuit B. With Economizer .From Condenser To Condenser Equalizer Line (Field Supplied/Connected) Back Pressure Valve Relief Valve 2 Discharge Service Valve Liquid Line Service Valve Strainer/ Filter Drier Oil Level Switch (w/o SSV Option) Relief Valve (SSV Option) Muffler Oil Filter (External) Loader 2 Loader 1 6 5 Oil Pump Economizer TXV LEGEND EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SSV — Suction Service Valve TXV — Thermostatic Expansion Valve 1 — Suction Pressure Transducer 2 — Discharge Pressure Transducer 3 — Economizer Pressure Transducer 4 — Oil Pressure Transducer 5 — High Pressure Switch 6 — Discharge Gas Thermistor 7 — Entering Water Thermistor 8 — Leaving Water Thermistor — Refrigerant Access Fitting — High Flow Schrader Valve — Backseating Service Valve with Refrigerant Port — Fusible Plug — Device Connection Minimum Load Control Solenoid (Option) Check Valve APPENDIX F (cont) Minimum Load Control Valve (Option) 3 4 Oil Filter (Internal) 1 Relief Valve Motor Cooling Solenoid Valve 112 Economizer 8 Suction Service Valve (Option) EXV Service Valve (SSV Option) 7 Flow Switch Sightglass Dry Eye Typical System Components.

A2 Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Suction Temp EXV % Open Variable Head Press.n snnn.Clock Yes/No Start/Stop 0 = Normal 1 = Alarm 2 = Alert 0 .n nnn.600 0 .n nnn.n 0 .n nnn.100 UNITS % % AMPS PSIG PSIG PSIG °F °F °F °F °F °F % % POINT CAPA_T CAPA_A A_CURR DP_A SP_A ECNP_A SH_A DISTMP_A DISTMPA1 DISTMPA2 TMP_SCTA TMP_SSTA EXV_A VHPA FORCIBLE N N N N N N N N N N N N N N nnn.n 0 .n nnn.A1 Discharge Gas Temp .n nnn.n snnn. A DISCRETE INPUTS Compressor A1 Feedback Compressor A2 Feedback Oil Level Switch STATUS On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off POINT K_A1_RLY K_A2_RLY LOADR_A1 LOADR_A2 MLV OILA_HTR MTRCL_A1 MTRCL_A2 OILPMP_A OILSL_A1 OILSL_A2 FORCIBLE N N N N N N N N N N N On/Off On/Off Close/Open K_A1_FBK K_A2_FBK OILA_SW N N N CIRCA_AN (Circuit A Analog Parameters): Status Display DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES Percent Total Capacity Percent Available Cap Circuit Running Current Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure Economizer Pressure Discharge Superheat Temp Discharge Gas Temp Discharge Gas Temp .1200 nnn.100 0 .Local 6 = On .100 PSIG PSIG °F AMPS % DOP_A1 OP_A1 TMTR_A1 A1_CURR A1_MTA N N N N N nnn. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor A1 Relay Compressor A2 Relay Loader A1 Relay Loader A2 Relay Minimum Load Valve Oil Heater Motor Cooling A1 Solenoid Motor Cooling A2 Solenoid Oil Pump Oil Solenoid A1 Oil Solenoid A2 CIRC.100 0 . A1 Oil Pressure A1 Motor Temperature Comp A1 Running Current Comp A1 % Must Trip Amps COMP A2 ANALOG VALUES A2 Oil Pressure Diff.600 0 .n nnn.100 PSIG PSIG °F AMPS % DOP_A2 OP_A2 TMTR_A2 A2_CURR A2_MTA N N N N N 113 .100 0 .n nnn.100 snnn.100 Yes/No 0 . PCT COMP A1 ANALOG VALUES A1 Oil Pressure Diff.APPENDIX G A_UNIT (Unit Operation): Status Display DESCRIPTION Control Mode STATUS 0 = Service Test 1 = Off .n snnn.n nnn. A2 Oil Pressure A2 Motor Temperature Comp A2 Running Current Comp A2 % Must Trip Amps STATUS 0 .CCN 3 = Off .n Enable/Emstop 00:00-15:00 Heat/Cool UNITS POINT STAT FORCIBLE N Occupied CCN Chiller Alarm State Active Demand Limit Override Modes in Effect Percent Total Capacity Active Setpoint Control Point Entering Fluid Temp Leaving Fluid Temp Emergency Stop Minutes Left for Start Heat Cool Select OCC CHIL_S_S ALM % % °F °F °F °F min DEM_LIM MODE CAP_T SP CTRL_PNT EWT LWT EMSTOP MIN_LEFT HEATCOOL N Y N Y N N N Y N N Y N N CIRCADIO (Circuit A Discrete Inputs/Outputs): Status Display DESCRIPTION CIRC.n 0 .Clock 4 = Off Emergency 5 = On .n snn.n nnn.n snnn.Local 2 = Off .CCN 7 = On .n snnn.

n nnn.APPENDIX G (cont) CIRCBDIO: (Circuit B Discrete Inputs/Outputs) Status Display DESCRIPTION CIRC. B DISCRETE INPUTS Compressor B1 Feedback Compressor B2 Feedback Oil Level Switch STATUS On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off POINT K_B1_RLY K_B2_RLY LOADR_B1 LOADR_B2 MLV OILB_HTR MTRCL_B1 MTRCL_B2 OILPMP_B OILSL_B1 OILSL_B2 FORCIBLE N N N N N N N N N N N On/Off On/Off Close/Open K_B1_FBK K_B2_FBK OILB_SW N N N CIRCB_AN: (Circuit B Analog Parameters) Status Display DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT B ANALOG VALUES Percent Total Capacity Percent Available Cap Circuit Running Current Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure Economizer Pressure Discharge Superheat Temp Discharge Gas Temp Discharge Gas Temp .600 0 .B1 Discharge Gas Temp .600 0 .100 0 .n nnn. B1 Oil Pressure B1 Motor Temperature Comp B1 Running Current Comp B1 % Must Trip Amps COMP B2 ANALOG VALUES B2 Oil Pressure Diff. B2 Oil Pressure B2 Motor Temperature Comp B2 Running Current Comp B2 % Must Trip Amps STATUS 0 .n snnn.n 0 .100 UNITS % % AMPS PSIG PSIG PSIG °F °F °F °F °F °F % % POINT CAPB_T CAPB_A B_CURR DP_B SP_B ECNP_B SH_B DISTMP_B DISTMPB1 DISTMPB2 TMP_SCTB TMP_SSTB EXV_B VHPB FORCIBLE N N N N N N N N N N N N N N nnn.n snnn.n nnn.100 PSIG PSIG °F AMPS % DOP_B1 OP_B1 TMTR_B1 B1_CURR B1_MTA N N N N N nnn. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor B1 Solenoid Compressor B2 Solenoid Loader B1 Relay Loader B2 Relay Minimum Load Valve Oil Heater Motor Coolng B1 Solenoid Motor Coolng B2 Solenoid Oil Pump Oil Solenoid B1 Oil Solenoid B2 CIRC.100 PSIG PSIG °F AMPS % DOP_B2 OP_B2 TMTR_B2 B2_CURR B2_MTA N N N N N 114 .100 0 .n snnn. PCT COMP B1 ANALOG VALUES B1 Oil Pressure Diff.n 0 .n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.B2 Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Suction Temp EXV % Open Variable Head Press.n nnn.100 0 .n nnn.n nnn.1200 nnn.n 0 .

n snnn.n Open/Close nnn 0-100 nnn 0-100 ma ma DUAL_IN COOLFLOW CONDFLOW ICE COOL_HTR CSP_IN HSP_IN LLSV SIZE_DPX CAPT_DPX SIZEADPX CAPA_DPX N N N N N N N N N N N N Tons % Tons % 7-DAY_OCC: Occupancy Configuration DESCRIPTION Monday Occupied Time Monday Unoccupied Time Tuesday Occupied Time Tuesday Unoccupied Time Wednesday Occupied Time Wednesday Unoccupied Time Thursday Occupied Time Thursday Unoccupied Time Friday Occupied Time Friday Unoccupied Time Saturday Occupied Time Saturday Unoccupied Time Sunday Occupied Time Sunday Unoccupied Time STATUS 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 POINT MON_OCC MON_UNC TUE_OCC TUE_UNC WED_OCC WED_UNC THU_OCC THU_UNC FRI_OCC FRI_UNC SAT_OCC SAT_UNC SUN_OCC SUN_UNC 115 .20 ma Reset Signal Outdoor Air Temperature Space Temperature DEMAND LIMIT 4 .n On/Off On/Off 0 = Normal 1 = Redline 2 = Loadshed ma LMT_MA DMD_SW1 DMD_SW2 DL_STAT N N N N PUMPS Cooler Pump Relay Condenser Pump Relay MISCELLANEOUS Dual Setpoint Switch Cooler Flow Switch Condenser Flow Switch Ice Done Cooler Heater 4-20 ma Cooling Setpoint 4-20 ma Heating Setpoint Liq.n snnn.n snnn.20 ma Demand Signal Demand Limit Switch 1 Demand Limit Switch 2 CCN Loadshed Signal STATUS On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off UNITS POINT FAN_1 FAN_2 FAN_3 FAN_4 FORCIBLE N N N N snnn.n snnn.n snnn.n °F °F °F °F °F COOL_EWT COOL_LWT COND_EWT COND_LWT DUAL_LWT N N N N N nn.n ma °F °F RST_MA OAT SPT N Y Y nn. Line Solenoid Valve Dual Chiller Size Dual Chiller Pct Total Cap Dual Chiller Tons Avail Dual Chiller Pct Avail Cap On/Off On/Off COOL_PMP COND_PMP N N On/Off On/Off On/Off Yes/No On/Off nn.n nn.APPENDIX G (cont) OPTIONS: Status Display DESCRIPTION FANS Fan 1 Relay Fan 2 Relay Fan 3 Relay Fan 4 Relay UNIT ANALOG VALUES Cooler Entering Fluid Cooler Leaving Fluid Condenser Entering Fluid Condenser Leaving Fluid Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid TEMPERATURE RESET 4 .n snnn.

APPENDIX G (cont) ALARMDEF: Alarm Configuration DESCRIPTION Alarm Routing Control Equipment Priority Comm Failure Retry Time Re-alarm Time Alarm System Name STATUS 00000000 0 to 7 1 to 240 1 to 255 XXXXXXXX DEFAULT 00000000 4 10 30 CHILLER UNITS POINT ALRM_CNT EQP_TYPE RETRY_TM RE-ALARM ALRM_NAM min min BRODEFS: Broadcast Configuration DESCRIPTION CCN Time/Date Broadcast CCN OAT Broadcast Global Schedule Broadcast Broadcast Acknowledger Daylight Savings Start: Month Week Day Minutes to Add Daylight Savings Stop Month Week Day Minutes to Subtract STATUS Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No 1 to 12 1 to 5 1 to 7 0 to 99 1 to 12 1 to 5 1 to 7 0 to 99 DEFAULT No No No No 4 1 7 60 10 5 7 60 UNITS POINT CCNBC OATBC GSBC CCNBCACK STARTM STARTW STARTD MINADD STOPM STOPW STOPD MINSUB min min DISPLAY: Navigator Configuration DESCRIPTION Service Password Password Enable Metric Display Language Selection STATUS nnnn Enable/Disable Off/On 0 = ENGLISH 1 = FRANCAIS 2 = ESPANOL 3 = PORTUGUES DEFAULT 1111 Enable Off 0 UNITS POINT PASSWORD PASS_EBL DISPUNIT LANGUAGE 116 .

APPENDIX G (cont) EXV_CONF: Configuration DESCRIPTION EXVA Stepper Type EXVA Steps in Range EXVA Steps Per Second EXVA Fail Position in % EXVA Minimum Steps EXVA Maximum Steps EXVA Overrun Steps EXVB Stepper Type EXVB Steps in Range EXVB Steps Per Second EXVB Fail Position in % EXVB Minimum Steps EXVB Maximum Steps EXVB Overrun Steps STATUS 0=1500 Step 1=15000 Step Type 0=1500 Type 1=15000 Type 0=30 Type 1=300 DEFAULT 1 15000 300 0 0 15000 1000 1 15000 300 0 0 15000 1000 % STEPS STEPS STEPS STEPS % STEPS STEPS STEPS UNITS POINT EXVATYPE EXVARANG EXVARATE EXVAPOSF EXVAMINS EXVAMAXS EXVAOVRS EXVBTYPE EXVBRANG EXVBRATE EXVBPOSF EXVBMINS EXVBMAXS EXVBOVRS STEPS Type 0=1500 Type 1=15000 Type 0=100 Type 1=1000 0=1500 Step 1=15000 Step Type 0=1500 Type 1=15000 Type 0=30 Type 1=300 Type 0=1500 Type 1=15000 Type 0=100 Type 1=1000 OCCPC01S: Occupancy Configuration DESCRIPTION Timed Override Hours Period 1 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied from Occupied to Period 2 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied from Occupied to Period 3 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied from Occupied to Period 4 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied from Occupied to Period 5 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied from Occupied to Period 6 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied from Occupied to Period 7 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied from Occupied to Period 8 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied from Occupied to STATUS 0 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 00000000 00:00 00:00 UNITS hours POINT OVR-EXT DOW1 OCCTOD1 UNOCTOD1 DOW2 OCCTOD2 UNOCTOD2 DOW3 OCCTOD3 UNOCTOD3 DOW4 OCCTOD4 UNOCTOD4 DOW5 OCCTOD5 UNOCTOD5 DOW6 OCCTOD6 UNOCTOD6 DOW7 OCCTOD7 UNOCTOD7 DOW8 OCCTOD8 UNOCTOD8 117 .

0 Disable Disable 10 Enable Enable 0 ∆F min % RAMP_EBL HEATCOOL LCW_LMT DELAY Z_GAIN CLS_CTRL ICE_CNFG CUR_TRIP NOFLOWEN WINTMSC ALRMCNFG 118 .0 Disable/Enable Disable/Enable 10 to 25 Disable/Enable Disable/Enable 0 = Alerts and Alarms 1 = Alarms Only 2 = Off DEFAULT 0 UNITS POINT CONTROL Loading Sequence Select Lead/Lag Sequence Select Compressor Sequence Cooling Setpoint Select 1 1 1 0 SEQ_TYPE LEAD_TYP COMP_SEQ CLSP_TYP Heating Setpoint Select 0 HTSP_TYP Ramp Load Select Heat Cool Select High LCW Alert Limit Minutes off time Deadband Multiplier Close Control Select Ice Mode Enable Current Unbalance SetPnt Enable Noflow Detection Winterize Alert Config Alarm Relay Usage Enable Cool 60. CCN occupancy controlled 4 = 4-20 mA input 0 = Single 1 = Dual.APPENDIX G (cont) OPTIONS1: Options Configuration DESCRIPTION Cooler Fluid Min. Brine 3 = Low Brine No/Yes 0 = None 1 = Air Cooled 2 = Water Cooled 3 = Common Condenser 4 = Independent Condenser 0 = None 1 = 4-20 mA 2 = 0-20 mA 3 = 20-0 mA No/Yes Off/On Off/On 0 = Not Controlled 1 = On when STATE is On 2 = On when compressors are On No/Yes No/Yes DEFAULT 1 No 0 POINT FLUIDTYP MLV_FLG HEAD_TYP Var Head Pressure Select 0 VHPTYPE Pressure Transducers Cooler Pump Control Condenser Pump Interlock Condenser Pump Control Condenser Fluid Sensors EMM Module Installed Yes Off Off 0 No No PRESS_TY CPC CND_LOCK CNPC CD_TEMP EMM_BRD OPTIONS2: Options Configuration DESCRIPTION Control Method STATUS 0 = Switch 1 = 7 day sched. remote switch controlled 2 = Dual. Load Valve Select Head Press. remote switch controlled 2 = Dual. 7 day clock controlled 3 = Dual. Control Type STATUS 1 = Water 2 = Med.0 to 4.0 0 2. 2 = Occupancy 3 = CCN 1 = Equal loading 2 = Staged loading 1 = Automatic 2 = Circuit A leads 3 = Circuit B leads 1 = Automatic 2 = Compressor 1 Leads 3 = Compressor 2 Leads 0 = Single 1 = Dual. CCN occupancy controlled 4 = 4-20 mA input Enable/Disable Cool 2 to 60 0 to 15 1. 7 day clock controlled 3 = Dual.

APPENDIX G (cont) RESETCON: Options Configuration DESCRIPTION COOLING RESET Cooling Reset Type STATUS 0 = No Reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA Input 2 = External Temp — OAT 3 = Return Fluid 4 = External Temp — SPT –30 to +30 0 to 125 0 to 125 –30 to +30 0 to 30 0 to 10 –30 to +30 0 = No Reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA Input 2 = External Temp — OAT 3 = Return Fluid 4 = External Temp — SPT –30 to +30 0 to 125 0 to 125 –30 to +30 0 to 10 0 to 30 –30 to +30 0 = None 1 = External Switch Input 2 = 4 to 20 mA Input 3 = Loadshed 0 to 100 0 to 99 0 to 60 0 to 120 0 to 100 0 to 100 Disable/Enable Slave/Master 0 to 239 0 = Master Leads 1 = Slave Leads 2 = Automatic 40 to 400 0 to 30 Yes/No DEFAULT 0 UNITS POINT CRST_TYP 4-20 MA RESET 4-20 — Degrees Reset REMOTE RESET Remote — No Reset Temp Remote — Full Reset Temp Remote — Degrees Reset RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET Return — No Reset Temp Return — Full Reset Temp Return — Degrees Reset HEATING RESET Heating Reset Type 0 125 0 0 10 0 0 0 ^F dF dF ^F ^F ^F ^F C420_DEG CREM_NO CREM_FUL CREM_DEG CRTN_NO CRTN_FUL CRTN_DEG HRST_TYP 4-20 MA RESET 4-20 — Degrees Reset REMOTE RESET Remote — No Reset Temp Remote — Full Reset Temp Remote — Degrees Reset RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET Return — No Reset Temp Return — Full Reset Temp Return — Degrees Reset DEMAND LIMIT Demand Limit Select 0 50 80 0 10 0 0 0 ^F dF dF ^F ^F ^F ^F H420_DEG HREM_NO HREM_FUL HREM_DEG HRTN_NO HRTN_FUL HRTN_DEG DMD_CTRL Demand Limit at 20 mA Loadshed Group Number Loadshed Demand Delta Maximum Loadshed Time Demand Limit Switch 1 Demand Limit Switch 2 LEAD/LAG Lead/Lag Chiller Enable Master/Slave Select Slave Address Lead/Lag Balance Select Lead/Lag Balance Delta Lag Start Delay Parallel Configuration 100 0 0 60 80 50 Disable Master 2 0 168 5 No % % min % % DMT20MA SHED_NUM SHED_DEL SHED_TIM DLSWSP1 DLSWSP2 LL_ENA MS_SEL SLV_ADDR LL_BAL hours min LL_BAL_D LL_DELAY PARALLEL SCHEDOVR: Schedule and Timed Override Configuration DESCRIPTION Schedule Number Override Time Limit Timed Override Hours Timed Override STATUS 0 .99 0-4 0-4 Yes/No DEFAULT 0 0 0 No UNITS hours hours POINT SCHEDNUM OTL OVR_EXT TIMEOVER 119 .

0 113 113 3. Cond.0 0. HXA = 145 F. 76 50 1 1 22.2 to 2. B Min Position Fan Staging Select Compr. Setpoint EXV Circ. Passes Circuit with LWT Sensor *See Table 7.0 °F °F °F HSP_A HSP_B APRCH_SP UNIT: Base Unit Configuration DESCRIPTION Unit Type STATUS 1 = Air Cooled 2 = Water Cooled 3 = Split System 4 = Heat Machine 5 = Air Cooled Heat Reclaim 76 to 350 0 to 100 1 to 2 0 to 2 10 to 40 0 to 100 0 to 100 1 to 8 10 to 560 10 to 560 10 to 560 10 to 560 No/Yes 1 to 4 A/B DEFAULT 1 UNITS POINT UNIT_TYP Unit Size Circuit A % Capacity Number Circ A Compressor Number Circ B Compressor Discharge Super.0 to 240.0 to +20.0 –20.0 0.0 –20.0 1* 0† 0† 0† 0† Yes 2 A TONS % °F % % SIZE CIRCACAP NUMCA NUMCB DSH_SP EXVAMINP EXVBMINP FAN_TYPE CA1_MTA CA2_MTA CB1_MTA CB2_MTA ECON_SEL EVAPPASS LWTCKT SERVICE: Configuration DESCRIPTION PID GAINS Head Pressure P Gain Head Pressure I Gain Head Pressure D Gain Water Valve Minimum Pos.0 8. B1 Must Trip Amps Compr. A Min Position EXV Circ.1 0.0 0 to 100 DEFAULT 1. B2 Must Trip Amps Economized? Number of Evap. Temp Setpoint EXVA Start Position EXVB Start Position COMPRESSOR ENABLE Enable Compressor A1 Enable Compressor A2 Enable Compressor B1 Enable Compressor B2 STATUS –20.R. = 152 F. †See Appendix A.0 °F °F HSP1 HSP2 0.1 to 20.0 to 34.0 34. A1 Must Trip Amps Compr.0 20 UNITS POINT HD_PGAIN HD_IGAIN HD_DGAIN HD_MIN % 120. A2 Must Trip Amps Compr.0 44.0 1.2 to 2. MISCELLANEOUS Motor Temp Setpoint Brine Freeze Point Max. HXC = 118 F 120 .0 CRAMP HRAMP 80 to 140 80 to 140 0.0 100.0 to +20.0 100 to Default 0 to 40 0 to 40 200.APPENDIX G (cont) SETPOINT: Configuration DESCRIPTION COOLING Cool Setpoint 1 Cool Setpoint 2 Ice Setpoint HEATING Heat Setpoint 1 Heat Setpoint 2 RAMP LOADING Cooling Ramp Loading Heating Ramp Loading HEAD PRESSURE Head Pressure Setpoint A Head Pressure Setpoint B Approach Setpoint STATUS –20 to 70 –20 to 70 –20 to 32 DEFAULT 44.0 to +20.0 * 20 20 °F °F °F % % MTR_T_SP BRN_FRZ MCT_SP EXVSPOSA EXVSPOSB Enable/Dsable Enable/Dsable Enable/Dsable Enable/Dsable Enable Enable Enable Enable ENABLEA1 ENABLEA2 ENABLEB1 ENABLEB2 * GXN.0 UNITS °F °F °F POINT CSP1 CSP2 CSP3 80 to 140 80 to 140 100.0 8.0 32.0 1.0 –20.

B CKT A Off Ref Flow Delay CKT B Off Ref Flow Delay Circuit A — Pumping out Circuit B — Pumpout out Unit Off: No Water Flow STATUS ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF POINT MODE_1 MODE_2 MODE_3 MODE_4 MODE_5 MODE_6 MODE_7 MODE_8 MODE_9 MODE_10 MODE_11 MODE_12 MODE_13 MODE_14 MODE_15 MODE_16 MODE_17 MODE_18 MODE_19 MODE_20 MODE_21 MODE_22 MODE_23 MODE_24 MODE_25 MODE_26 MODE_27 MODE_28 MODE_29 121 . A High Motor Current Cir.APPENDIX G (cont) ALARMS: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION Active Alarm #1 Active Alarm #2 Active Alarm #3 Active Alarm #4 Active Alarm #5 Active Alarm #6 Active Alarm #7 Active Alarm #8 Active Alarm #9 Active Alarm #10 Active Alarm #11 Active Alarm #12 Active Alarm #13 Active Alarm #14 Active Alarm #15 Active Alarm #16 Active Alarm #17 Active Alarm #18 Active Alarm #19 Active Alarm #20 Active Alarm #21 Active Alarm #22 Active Alarm #23 Active Alarm #24 Active Alarm #25 STATUS Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx POINT ALARM01C ALARM02C ALARM03C ALARM04C ALARM05C ALARM06C ALARM07C ALARM08C ALARM09C ALARM10C ALARM11C ALARM12C ALARM13C ALARM14C ALARM15C ALARM16C ALARM17C ALARM18C ALARM19C ALARM20C ALARM21C ALARM22C ALARM23C ALARM24C ALARM25C CURRMODS: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION CSM controlling Chiller WSM controlling Chiller Master/Slave control Low Source Protection Ramp Load Limited Timed Override in effect Low Cooler Suction TempA Low Cooler Suction TempB Slow Change Override Minimum OFF time active Low Discharge Superheat A Low Discharge Superheat B Dual Setpoint Temperature Reset Demand Limit in effect Cooler Freeze Prevention Lo Tmp Cool/Hi Tmp Heat Hi Tmp Cool/Lo Tmp Heat Making ICE Storing ICE High SCT Circuit A High SCT Circuit B High Motor Current Cir.

n snnn.n snnn.n snnn. A Pumpout Failure Count.SMZ Clear Commanded Lag Commanded Off? Dual Chill Lead CapLimit Dual Chill Lag CapLimit STATUS Yes/No STAND ALONE.n snnn.APPENDIX G (cont) DUALCHIL: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION Dual Chiller Link Good? Master Chiller Role Slave Chiller Role Lead Chiller Ctrl Point Lag Chiller Ctrl Point Control Point Cool Entering Fluid-Slave Cool Leaving Fluid-Slave Cooler Entering Fluid Cooler Leaving Fluid Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid Percent Avail.n snnn.Capacity Percent Avail.n snnn. SCB AN10 Options Current 1 Options Current 2 Pumpout Failure Count.n n UNITS % °F °F POINT SMZ CTRL_PNT LWT Z_CALC CAP_TRAN MISCDATA: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION MISCELLANEOUS Options Temp 1. Lead Chiller. Lead Chiller.) Current Occup. SCB AN9 Options Temp 4.n Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No 0-100 0-100 UNITS POINT DC_LINK MC_ROLE SC_ROLE LEAD_CP LAG_CP CTRL_PNT COOLEWTS COOLLWTS COOL_EWT COOL_LWT DUAL_LWT CAP_A CAP_A_S LAGDELAY SMZ SMZSLAVE LEADSMZC LAG_SMZC LAG_OFF DCLDCAPL DCLGCAPL dF dF dF dF dF dF dF dF % % % % LOADFACT: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION CAPACITY CONTROL Load/Unload Factor Control Point Leaving Fluid Temp Calculated Z factor Capacity Trans. EXV AN1 Options Temp 3.1 0-8 Yes/No 0-4 hours hh:mm hh:mm hh:mm hh:mm hh:mm POINT MODE PER-NO OVERLAST OVR_HRS STRTTIME ENDTIME NXTOCDAY NXTOCTIM NXTUNDAY NXTUNTIM PRVUNDAY PRVUNTIM 122 .n snnn.n snnn.n nnn nnn No/Yes UNITS °F °F °F °F ma ma — — — POINT OPT_TMP1 OPT_TMP2 OPT_TMP3 OPT_TMP4 OPT_CUR1 OPT_CUR2 PFAIL_A PFAIL_B BRN_LOCK OCCDEFM: Occupancy Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION Current Mode (1=Occup.n nn.n snnn.Slave Lag Start Delay Time Load/Unload Factor Load/Unload Factor-Slave Lead SMZ Clear Commanded Lag. Lag Chiller snnn. Period # Timed-Override in Effect Time-Override Duration Current Occupied Time Current Unoccupied Time Next Occupied Day Next Occupied Time Next Unoccupied Day Next Unoccupied Time Previous Unoccupied Day Previous Unoccupied Time STATUS 0.n nn.n 0-100 0-100 hh:mm snnn. Lag Chiller STAND ALONE.n snnn.n snnn.n snnn.Cap. EXV AN2 Options Temp 2. B HXC Brine Config Lock STATUS snnn.n n. State STATUS snnn.n snnn.

n PSI PSI PSI PSI OIL_SPA1 OIL_SPA2 OIL_SPB1 OIL_SPB2 nn.APPENDIX G (cont) OILPRESS: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION A1 Oil Pressure A2 Oil Pressure B1 Oil Pressure B2 Oil Pressure A1 Oil Filter Diff.n nnn. Press A2 Oil Filter Diff. Press OIL PRESSURE SETPOINTS Calculated Oil Press A1 Calculated Oil Press A2 Calculated Oil Press B1 Calculated Oil Press B2 MAX OPERATING PRESSURE Calculated MOP Circuit A Calculated MOP Circuit B STATUS snnn.n nnn. Press B2 Oil Filter Diff.n snnn.n nn.n nnn.n nnn. Press B1 Oil Filter Diff.n snnn.n snnn.n nn.n nn.n UNITS PSIG PSIG PSIG PSIG PSI PSI PSI PSI POINT OP_A1 OP_A2 OP_B1 OP_B2 FLTP_A1 FLTP_A2 FLTP_B1 FLTP_B2 nn.n nn.n °F °F MOP_SPA MOP_SPB STRTABS: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION Machine Operating Hours Machine Starts Circuit A Run Hours Compressor A1 Run Hours Compressor A2 Run Hours Circuit B Run Hours Compressor B1 Run Hours Compressor B2 Run Hours Circuit A Starts Compressor A1 Starts Compressor A2 Starts Circuit B Starts Compressor B1 Starts Compressor B2 Starts STATUS nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn UNITS hours hours hours hours hours hours hours POINT ABS_HRM ABS_CYM ABS_HRA1 ABS_HRA2 ABS_HRB ABS_HRB1 ABS_HRB2 ABS_CYA ABS_CYA1 ABS_CYA2 ABS_CYB ABS_CYB1 ABS_CYB2 STRTHOUR: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION Machine Operating Hours Machine Starts Circuit A Run Hours Compressor A1 Run Hours Compressor A2 Run Hours Circuit B Run Hours Compressor B1 Run Hours Compressor B2 Run Hours Circuit A Starts Compressor A1 Starts Compressor A2 Starts Circuit B Starts Compressor B1 Starts Compressor B2 Starts STATUS nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn UNITS hours POINT HR_MACH CY_MACH HR_CIRA HR_A1 HR_A2 HR_CIRB HR_B1 HR_B2 CY_CIRA CY_A1 CY_A2 CY_CIRB CY_B1 CY_B2 hours hours hours hours hours hours 123 .

APPENDIX G (cont) TESTMODE: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION Service Test Mode Manual Control Override Compressor A1 Relay Compressor A2 Relay Compressor B1 Relay Compressor B2 Relay Loader A1 Relay Loader A2 Relay Loader B1 Relay Loader B2 Relay Oil Solenoid A1 Oil Solenoid A2 Oil Solenoid B1 Oil Solenoid B2 Motor Coolng A1 Solenoid Motor Coolng A2 Solenoid Motor Coolng B1 Solenoid Motor Coolng B2 Solenoid FAN 1 Relay FAN 2 Relay FAN 3 Relay FAN 4 Relay Oil Heater Oil Heater Oil Pump Oil Pump Cooler Pump Relay Condenser Pump Relay Minimum Load Valve Cooler Heater Remote Alarm Relay EXV % OPEN EXV % OPEN Var Head Press % Var Head Press % Liq. Line Solenoid Valve STATUS On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off 0-100 0-100 0-100 0-100 Open/Close UNITS POINT MAN_CTRL FAC_CTRL S_A1_RLY S_A2_RLY S_B1_RLY S_B2_RLY S_LDR_A1 S_LDR_A2 S_LDR_B1 S_LDR_B2 S_OSL_A1 S_OSL_A2 S_OSL_B1 S_OSL_B2 S_MCS_A1 S_MCS_A2 S_MCS_B1 S_MCS_B2 S_FAN_1 S_FAN_2 S_FAN_3 S_FAN_4 S_OHTR_A S_OHTR_B S_OPMP_A S_OPMP_B S_CL_PMP S_CN_PMP S_MLV S_CHTR S_ALRM S_EXV_A S_EXV_B S_VHPA S_VHPB S_LLSV % % % % VERSIONS: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION MBB EXV EMM SCB TI CCP 1 TI CCP 2 NAVIGATOR VERSION CESR131344CESR131172CESR131174CESR131226100233-1R3100233-1R3CESR130227STATUS nn-nn nn-nn nn-nn nn-nn nn-nn nn-nn nn-nn 124 .

n °F On/Off Enable/Disable/None nn.APPENDIX G (cont) WINTLOG: Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION Winterization Performed Date Winterized Date Winterized Date Winterized Date Winterized Date Winterized Date Winterize Alerted Date Winterize Alerted Date Winterize Alerted Date Winterize Alerted Date Winterize Alerted Date Winter Configured Date Winter Unconfigured Date Winter Configured Date Winter Unconfigured Date Winter Configured Date Winter Unconfigured STATUS No 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 00/00/00 00:00 POINT WINTDONE WMSG00 WMSG01 WMSG02 WMSG03 WMSG04 WALRT00 WALRT01 WALRT02 WALRT03 WALRT04 WCONF00 WUCONF00 WCONF01 WUCONF01 WCONF02 WUCONF02 WSMDEFME: WSM Maintenance Display DESCRIPTION WSM Active? Chilled water temp Equipment status Commanded state CHW setpoint reset value Current CHW setpoint STATUS Yes/No snn.n °F POINT WSMSTAT CHWTEMP CHLRST CHLRENA CHWRVAL CHWSTPT 125 .n ^F snn.

R Duplex Combinations SIZE 283 303 328 353 370 373 390 393 415 418 450 453 475 478 500 503 525 528 MODULE A 153 163 178 178 225 253 264 253 264 268 225 228 249 253 249 253 264 268 MODULE B 138 138 153 178 150 138 135 153 160 153 225 228 225 228 249 253 264 268 126 .APPENDIX H 30GXN.

Drive Programming: It is strongly recommended that the user NOT change any programming without consulting Carrier service personnel. See Table 1 below for proper inputs. To enter the PROGRAM mode to access the parameters. Once the desired parameter number is found. Use the and buttons to scroll to the desired parameter number. The display will read “00” and the upper right-hand decimal point will be blinking. It should not be removed with power applied to the VFD. To reset factory defaults: change P48 to one of the 4 operating modes (5-8) and then cycle power. NOTE: If the display flashes “Er”. After two minutes. the password must be entered in order to access the parameters again. 30GXN. and the process to enter the password must be repeated. 127 . Use and to scroll to the desired parameter number.APPENDIX I: MOTORMASTER® V OPERATION INSTRUCTION Motormaster V (MMV) is a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) that varies the condenser fan speed. Once the correct password value is entered. To enter password and change program values: Press Mode. Use and to change setting. The upper right-hand decimal point will begin blinking. the MMV follows a 4 to 20 mA speed reference signal present on terminals 25 (+) and 2 (–). If the Mode key is pressed within two minutes of exiting the PROGRAM mode. EPM chip: This drive uses a removable EPM chip to store program parameters. Pressing the Mode will store the new setting and also exit the PROGRAM mode. Once the drive is powered. The MMV output speed is displayed in Hz. Display reads “00”. Table 1: Configuration Tables NOMINAL VOLTAGE 208/230/460/575* 208/380 230 380/415 MODE 5 6 7 8 Hz 60 60 50 50 CONTROL INPUT (pins 25. Use the and buttons to scroll to the password value (the factory default password is “111”) and press the Mode button. Upper right decimal point blinks. To change another parameter. The speed varies in proportion to a 4 to 20 mA signal produced by the ComfortLink™ controls. Upper right decimal point blinks. Press Mode to store new setting. Configuration: The MMV is configured for 1 of 12 operation modes based on the inputs to the control terminal block. Table 2 shows all program parameters for each of the 4 operating modes.R units use operating modes 5-8. press the Mode button to display the present parameter setting. and that it can be changed by using the up and down buttons. To change password: first enter the current password then change parameter P44 to the desired password. the password is not required access the parameters. it will change to the mode selected according to the inputs. In these configurations.” which indicates that the PROGRAM mode has been accessed at the beginning of the parameter menu (P01 is the first parameter). the display will read “P01. indicating that the present parameter setting is being displayed. press the Mode button. the password was incorrect. 2) External control 4-20 mA External control 4-20 mA External control 4-20 mA External control 4-20 mA START CONTACTS TB1-TB2 TB13A-TB2 TB13B-TB2 TB13C-TB2 *208 v can run in mode 5 or 6. One additional jumper is required to configure the drive for 50/60 Hz operation and input voltage. No additional programming is required. Unit damage may occur from improper programming. This will activate the PASSWORD prompt (if the password has not been disabled). press the Mode key again to re-enter the PROGRAM mode (the parameter menu will be accessed at the parameter that was last viewed or changed before exiting). Press Mode to display present parameter setting.

03 = reverse only Acceleration time: 10 sec Deceleration time: 10 sec Dc brake time: 0 DC BRAKE VOLTAGE 0% Min freq = 8 hz ∼ 100 – 160 rpm Max freq Current limit: Motor overload: 100 Base freq: 60 or 50 Hz Fixed boost: 0.2 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Troubleshooting: Troubleshooting the Motormaster® V control requires a combination of observing system operation and VFD display information. 05 = R22.8. Variables VH. (set to 00 to clear) Program selection: Mode 1 . Motormaster V) 8Hz 26Hz 60Hz 128 . 2. The MMV should follow the 4-20 mA signal from the ComfortLink™ controls.PB (ComfortLink) 0% 50% 100% 4-20mA Input (P56. Due to the variable definitions of each controller.R134a setpoint.PA. 0-5V. 06 = R134a TB-14 output: 01 = none TB-30 output: 01 = none TB-31 output: 01 = none TB-13A function sel: 01 = none TB-13B function sel: 01 = none TB-13C function sel: 01 = none TB-15 output: 01 = none Control: 01 = Terminal strip Serial link: 02 = enabled 9600. Table 3 shows a cross-reference: Table 3: Controller Cross-Reference CONTROL SIGNAL 4 ma 12 ma 20 ma VH.5 0.12 PI Mode: 05 = reverse. TB12-2 closed Preset spd 6 default Preset spd 7 default Skip bandwidth Speed scaling Frequency scaling 50 or 60 Hz Load scaling: default (not used so NA) Accel/decel #2: default (not used so NA) Serial address Password:111 Speed at min signal: 8 Hz used when PID disabled and 4-20ma input Speed at max feedback: 60 or 50 Hz.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 60 50 50 200 200 200 200 60 60 60 60 1 1 1 1 111 111 111 111 8 8 8 8 60 60 50 50 01 01 01 01 05 06 07 08 01 01 01 01 0 0 0 0 50 50 50 50 4 4 4 4 .2 PI accel/decel (setpoint change filter) = 5 Min alarm Max alarm OPERATING MODES Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 01 02 01 02 01 01 01 01 06 06 06 06 01 01 01 01 04 04 04 04 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 01 01 01 01 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 8 8 8 60 60 50 50 125 125 110 110 100 100 100 100 60 60 50 50 0. 02 = 6 kHz. Used when PID disabled and 4-20ma input Clear history? 01 = maintain.6 12. VH. The speed command from the ComfortLink controls can be monitored in 2 ways: 1.2 .0 18.2 .5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 57 57 47 47 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18. 03 = 8 kHz Startup mode: flying restart Stop mode: coast to stop Standard Speed source: 04 = 4-20 ma. TB12-2 open Preset spd 5 default .5 0. P56 in Motormaster V shows 4-20 mA input in percent of maximum input.0 12. VH.2 w/timer Units editing: 02 = whole units Rotation: 01 = forward only. 01 = no PID Min feedback = 0 (0V *10) Max feedback = 50 (5V * 10) Proportional gain = 4% Integral gain = .0 18. Motormaster V) 20% 60% 100% VFD Speed (P71.N.PB in the “outputs” submenu of ComfortLink control — given as a percentage of 4 to 20 mA range.2 .APPENDIX I (cont) Table 2: Program Parameters for the 4 Operating Modes: PARAMETER NUMBER P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39 P40 P41 P42 P43 P44 P45 P46 P47 P48 P61 P62 P63 P64 P65 P66 P67 P68 DESCRIPTION Line Voltage: 01 = low line.5 0.5 % at low frequencies Accel boost: 0% Slip compensation: 0% Preset spd #1: 0 Preset spd #2: 0 Preset spd #3: 0 Preset spd 4 default .6 12.6 12.PA.0 18.R22 setpoint. 02 = high line Carrier Freq: 01 = 4 kHz.

If all three restart attempts are unsuccessful. See configuration section (Step 5). • P50 FAULT HISTORY — Last 8 faults • P51: SOFTWARE version • P52: DC BUS VOLTAGE — in percent of nominal. the drive will trip into Table 4: Fault Codes FAULT CODE AF CF cF GF HF JF LF OF PF SF F1 F2-F9. replace drive. GF. Serial Fault: The watchdog timer has timed out. Then set P48 to desired mode to restore all defaults for that mode. Data Fault: User data and OEM defaults in the EPM are corrupted. Current Overload Fault: VFD is undersized for the application. Failed three restart attempts. or Fo faults). replace EPM. Failed output transistor .6 and 47 Hz in modes 7. To provide manual start/stop control: Remove start command jumper and install a switch between the appropriate start terminals.-” LC DESCRIPTION High Temperature Fault: Ambient temperature is too high. Usually rated input voltage x 1. Saturated condensing temperature is below setpoint in ComfortLink controls. Control Fault: A blank EPM. Table 5: Status Indication FAULT CODE CL Er GE LC SP FAULT NAME CURRENT LIMIT ERROR GE FAULT LOCKOUT START PENDING DESCRIPTION The output has exceeded the CURRENT LIMIT setting (Parameter 25) and the drive is reducing the output frequency to reduce the output current. Start contact is not closed. 100% = 20 mA FAULT LOCKOUT (LC). Fault lockout — 3 or more unsuccessful starts SOLUTION Check cooling fan operation Perform a factory reset using Parameter 48 — PROGRAM SELECTION. Check auxiliary contact for proper operation and configuration. Ensure unit is well grounded to eliminate ground currents along communication lines. F2-F9. Cooling fan has failed (if equipped). • P53: MOTOR VOLTAGE — in percent of rated output voltage • P54: LOAD — in percent of drives rated output current rating • P55: VDC INPUT — in percent of maximum input: 50 will indicate full scale which is 5 v • P56: 4-20 mA INPUT — in percent of maximum input: 20% = 4 mA.R) check wiring from unit controls J8 for 4-20 mA signal. See configuration section (Step 2). If the drive remains in CURRENT LIMIT for too long. See Programming Notes (Step 6). Restore factory defaults by toggling P48 to another mode. indicating that the serial link has been lost. If unsuccessful. Low DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too low. which requires a manual reset. F1.. View PSD: Fault History to determine. “GE” will be displayed if an attempt is made to change the OEM default settings when the drive is operating in the OEM mode (see Parameter 48). Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately Check for dirty coils Check for motor bearing failure Check input power phasing Consult factory.0 Hz even though fan should be running faster VFD flashes 57 (or 47) and LCS VFD flashes “LCS and . Start contact is not closed. EPM Fault: The EPM is missing or damaged. To disable external control mode (5-8) and enter manual speed control mode: Change P05 to ‘01-key pad’ Push and arrow key to set manual speed. Invalid data has been entered. Output Transistor Fault: Phase to phase or phase to ground short circuit on the output. Requires a manual reset. Resetting requires cycling start command (or power). order a signal isolator/repeater (CEAS420876-2) and power supplies (CEAS221045-01. Acceleration rate is too fast. Mechanical problem with the driven equipment.8. Boost settings are too high. The collective group is displayed through para-meters 50-56 and all values are read only. Drive will operate at 57 (or 47) Hz until reset or loss of start command.4. Check auxiliary contact for proper operation and configuration. Fault codes: The drive is programmed to automatically restart after a fault and will attempt to restart three times after a fault (the drive will not restart after CF. Either remove the EPM or perform a factory reset (Parameter 48) to change the parameter version of the EPM to match the parameter version of the drive. Control signal is at 4 mA Speed signal lost. See Tables 4 and 5. Deceleration rate is too fast. cF. Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately Check serial connection (computer) Check settings for P15 Check settings in communication software to match P15 Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately Reduce boost or increase acceleration values. High DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too high. If communications are lost only while Motormaster V control is in operation. 129 . Fo Drive display = ‘---’ even though drive should be running Drive display = 8. or an EPM with corrupted data has been installed. Single-phase Fault: Single-phase input power has been applied to a three-phase drive. See configuration section (Step 5). Internal Faults: The control board has sensed a problem. it can trip into a CURRENT OVERLOAD fault (PF). This is displayed during the first 15 second interval between restart attempts.The MMV also provides real time monitoring of key inputs and outputs. Overhauling load. 2 required) for the CCN communication line. Loss of CCN communications: CCN communications with external control systems can be affected by high frequency electrical noise generated by Motormaster V control. If that does not work. Incompatibility Fault: An EPM with an incompatible parameter version has been installed. In stand-alone mode: In external control mode (30GXN. Drive runs at 57 Hz in modes 5.

Temp EXV Pos Discharge Pressure Pressure Sat.H-9T Pg 130 1-04 Replaces: New Book 2 Tab 5c ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ . __________________________ COOLER Refrigerant Motor Temp. Air Cooled Oil Discharge Oil No.30 Series Screw Liquid Chiller Maintenance Data Log CHILLER MODEL NO. Water Refrigerant Water Cooled CONDENSER COMPRESSOR PLANT _____________________ CHILLER SERIAL NO. Press. operating hours. Form 30G. 533-00052 Printed in U. In A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 A1 A2 B1 B2 Out In Out In Out In Out Outside Air Temp Sat. Pressure Temp. Suct. ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue. oil or refrigerant added or removed (include amounts). PC 903 Catalog No. Gas Oil Pressure Pressure Temp. Cond. __________________________ Operator Initials Circuit Copyright 2004 Carrier Corporation Date/ Time % Capacity Per Circuit Suction Pressure A B A B A B A APPENDIX J B A B A B A B REMARKS: Indicate start counts. shutdowns on safety controls. repairs made. or change at any time. Econ. Temp Temp. Diff.A. specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.S.

H-9T Pg CL-1 1-04 Replaces: New Book 2 Tab 5c . Form 30G.D. PC 903 Catalog No. or change at any time.HX LIQUID CHILLER I.S. 533-00052 Printed in U.CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30GX. Ambient Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue.A. Project Information Job Name _______________________________________________________________________ Address ________________________________________________________________________ City ______________________________________________State __________ Zip __________ Installing Contractor _______________________________________________________________ Sales Office _____________________________________________________________________ Start-up Performed By _____________________________________________________________ Design Information Capacity Cooler Condenser Equipment Model ____________________________________ Compressors A1) Model _________________________________ A2) Model _________________________________ B1) Model _________________________________ B2) Model _________________________________ Condenser (30HXA only) Circuit A Model ____________________________________ Serial ____________________________________ Model ____________________________________ Serial ____________________________________ Circuit B Model _______________________________ Serial ________________________________ Model _______________________________ Serial ________________________________ Serial ________________________________ Serial ________________________________ Serial ________________________________ Serial ________________________________ Serial ________________________________ EWT LWT Fluid Type Flow Rate P. specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Chilled Water System Check 1. Relief valve vent piping installed per local codes. Chilled water pump controlled by chiller. All terminals are tight. 10. 11. 6. Chilled water pump starter interlocked with chiller. Refer to Installation Instructions for proper cooler winterization procedure. 3. Wind baffles installed (30GX. Correct control voltage ________vac. Power supply agrees with the unit nameplate. 2. Unit is properly grounded. 7. 2. All thermistors are fully inserted into wells. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No Antifreeze type__________________ Concentration _________%. Outdoor piping wrapped with electric heater tape. 8. Electrical circuit protection has been sized and installed properly. 09DX).II.2 m/s) or greater are anticipated at outdoor ambient temperatures below 32 F (0° C). Proper loop freeze protection provided to ____ °F (°C). 4. 9. Chilled water pump is operating with the correct rotation. 6. All cables and thermistors have been inspected for crossed wires. Electrical power wiring is installed properly. All chilled water valves are open. NOTE: Required for unit operation where winds of 5 mph (2. 11. Inlet piping to cooler includes a 20 mesh strainer. All plug assemblies are tight. 7. 5. (Chilled water pump will start automatically to circulate water through cooler during potential freezing conditions. 3. (If antifreeze solution is not utilized on 30GX machines and the minimum outdoor ambient is below 32 F (0° C) then items 9-12 have to be completed to provide cooler freeze protection to 0° F.) CL-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No . 12. 10. Mechanical room maintained above 50 F (10 C) (30HX only). Preliminary Equipment Check (to be completed by installing contractor) Is there any physical damage? Yes No Description _________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ 1. All piping is connected properly. Cooler heaters installed and operational (30GX Only). (Branch circuit fused or HACR breaker) 5. 8. 4. 13. Cooler heads and tube sheets are insulated.) 9. 12. Unit is installed level as per the installation instructions. Water loop volume greater than 3 gal/ton for air conditioning or 6 gal/ton for process cooling and low ambient operation. All air has been purged from the system.

(Separate control power required.334 m/psi = _______ m of water Maximum cooler flow rate _____ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure Drop Curve) Minimum cooler flow rate _____ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure Drop Curve) CL-3 No Yes No . Chilled water flow switch is operational. repair and report any refrigerant leaks. 2.31 ft/psi = _______ ft of water Kpa x 0. R-134a fan cycling pressure switches installed (09DK). All piping is connected properly.) 8. Contact local Utility for assistance. All liquid line valves are open. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No III. 6. 3. 3. 4. 4. Verify cooler flow rate (maximum and minimum) Pressure entering cooler _______ psig (kpa) Pressure leaving cooler _______ psig (kpa) Cooler pressure drop _______ psig (kpa) Psig x 2. All oil line valves are open. Voltage is within unit nameplate range. Liquid line solenoid valves installed. Equalizer line is installed from motor cooling line to back-pressure valve. Condenser water pump is operating with the correct rotation. Unit Start-Up 1. All air has been purged from the system. 3. Condenser water pump controlled by chiller. 5. Refrigerant piping and condenser have been leak checked and evacuated. Condenser water flow switch configured and operational. 2. All condenser water valves are open. Check voltage imbalance: A-B________ A-C________B-C________ Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No Average voltage = ____________ (A-B + A-C + B-C)/3 Maximum deviation from average voltage = _________ Voltage imbalance = ________% (max. 7. 6. 9. (DO NOT start chiller if voltage imbalance is greater than 2%. deviation/average voltage) x 100 Voltage imbalance less than 2%. 6. Inlet piping to condenser includes a 20 mesh strainer. Locate. Liquid line filter driers installed. Condenser water control valve installed. Condenser water flow switch installed. 5. (Required for 30HXC Brine. 7. 8. 4.CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Condenser Water System Check (30HXC Only) 1.) Yes 9. All discharge valves are open. All suction service valves are open (if equipped). Leak check unit.) Remote Condenser System Check (30HXA Only) 1. 2. 5. All refrigerant piping is connected properly.

334 m/psi = Condenser flow rate _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ Yes No psig (kpa) psig (kpa) psig (kpa) ft of water m of water gpm (l/s) (See Condenser Pressure Drop Curve) Start and operate machine. Unit Start-Up (cont) 9. Record two sets of operational log readings. Check refrigerant and oil charge. Record compressor motor current. Record charge information. Provide operating instructions to owner’s personnel. Complete the following: 1. 3. Yes Yes Yes Yes Instruction time _______ hrs. Verify condenser flow rate. 4. Complete component test. Pressure entering condenser Pressure leaving condenser Condenser pressure drop Psig x 2.31 ft/psi = Kpa x 0. 5. 2.III. No No No No Refrigerant Charge Additional charge required Circuit A__________ __________ Circuit B___________ ___________ Oil Charge Additional charge required Comments: __________ ___________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ Signatures: Start-up Technician__________________________ Customer Representative __________________________ Date____________ Date____________ CL-4 .

A1 MUST TRIP AMPS COMPR.I CNPC CWT.E PASS TYPE TONS CAP.x x xxx AMPS xxx AMPS xxx AMPS xxx AMPS x YES/NO x x YES/NO ON/OFF ON/OFF x YES/NO YES/NO ITEM EXPANSION TEST DISPLAY LED’S METRIC DISPLAY LANGUAGE SELECTION PASSWORD ENABLE SERVICE PASSWORD UNIT TYPE UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT A% CAPACITY NUMBER CIRC A COMPRESSOR NUMBER CIRC B COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE SUPER SETPOINT FAN STAGING SELECT COMPR.A1 CM.A2 CM. B2 MUST TRIP AMPS COOLER FLUID MIN LOAD VALVE SELECT HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL TYPE VAR HEAD PRESSURE SELECT PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS COOLER PUMP CONTROL CONDENSER PUMP INTERLOCK CONDENSER PUMP CONTROL CONDENSER FLUID SENSORS EMM MODULE INSTALLED ENTRY CL-5 .CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Record Software Versions MODE — RUN STATUS SUB-MODE VERS ITEM MBB EXV EMM CP1 CP2 SCB NAVI and ESCAPE DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION CESR131344-__ __-__ __ CESR131172-__ __-__ __ CESR131174-__ __-__ __ 100233-1R3-__ __-__ __ 100233-1R3-__ __-__ __ CESR131226-__ __-__ __ CESR131227-__ __-__ __ (Press ENTER simultaneously to obtain software versions) Record Configuration Information MODE — CONFIGURATION SUB-MODE DISP UNIT OPT1 ITEM TEST METR LANG PAS.S EMM DISPLAY ON/OFF ON/OFF x ENBL/DSBL xxxx x xxx xxx% x x xx. A2 MUST TRIP AMPS COMPR.A CMP.B2 FLUD MLVS HPCT VHPT PRTS CPC CNP.B DIS.S CM.A CMP.S FAN.B1 CM. B1 MUST TRIP AMPS COMPR.

FL W.L DISPLAY x xxx xxx x x x x xx.C ICE.x xxx.x x xxx.S CRMP HRMP HCSW Z.x xxx.MSG ALR.GN BRN.x xx.x YES/NO ITEM EXPANSION CONTROL METHOD CCN ADDRESS CCN BUS NUMBER CCN BAUD RATE LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT LEAD/LAG SEQUENCE SELECT COMPRESSOR SEQUENCE HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT MINUTES OFF TIME CLOSE CONTROL SELECT ICE MODE ENABLE CURRENT UNBALANCE SETPOINT NO REFRIGERANT FLOW ALRM ENABLE WINTERIZE ALERT CONFIG ALARM RELAY USAGE COOLING RESET TYPE NO COOL RESET TEMP FULL COOL RESET TEMP DEGREES COOL RESET HEATING RESET TYPE NO HEAT RESET TEMP FULL HEAT RESET TEMP DEGREES HEAT RESET DEMAND LIMIT SELECT DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1 DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2 LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE MASTER/SLAVE SELECT SLAVE ADDRESS LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA LAG START DELAY PARALLEL CONFIGURATION COOLING SETPOINT SELECT HEATING SETPOINT SELECT RAMP LOAD SELECT COOLING RAMP LOADING HEATING RAMP LOADING HEAT COOL SELECT DEADBAND MULTIPLIER HXC BRINE CONFIG LOCK ENTRY RSET SLCT CL-6 .x x xxx% xxx xxx% xxx xxx% xxx% ENBL/DSBL SLVE/MAST xxx x xxx xxx YES/NO x x ENBL/DSBL x.Record Configuration Information (cont) MODE — CONFIGURATION (cont) SUB-MODE OPT2 ITEM CTRL CCNA CCNB BAUD LOAD LLCS CP.x xx.x COOL/HEAT x.UNB NO.SQ LCWT DELY CLS.M C.x x.x xx ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL xx% ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL x x xxx.C CRST CRT1 CRT2 DGRC HRST HRT1 HRT2 DGRH DMDC DM20 SHNM SHDL SHTM DLS1 DLS2 LLEN MSSL SLVA LLBL LLBD LLDY PARA CLSP HTSP RL.

PASSES CIRCUIT WITH LWT SENSOR APPROACH SETPOINT CCN TIME/DATE BROADCAST CCN OAT BROADCAST GLOBAL SCHEDULE BROADCAST BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER MODE — SETPOINT SUB-MODE COOL ITEM CSP.x xxx.SP EX.x xx.2 HD.x xx. TEMP SETPOINT EXVA START POSITION EXVB START POSITION ENABLE COMPRESSOR A1 ENABLE COMPRESSOR A2 ENABLE COMPRESSOR B1 ENABLE COMPRESSOR B2 WINTERIZATION PERFORMED ECONOMIZED NUMBER OF EVAP.B1 EN.x xxx.SP BR.1 HSP.CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Record Configuration Information MODE — CONFIGURATION (cont) SUB-MODE SERV ITEM H.AK DISPLAY xx.C BC.IGN H.x xxx.x xxx.DNE ECON EVPS LWTC AP.x xxx.DGN H.B DISPLAY xxx. COND.B2 W.B EN.x xxx.B.PGN H.x ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ITEM EXPANSION HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN WATER VALVE MINIMUM POS MOTOR TEMP SETPOINT BRINE FREEZE POINT MAX.A EX.x xx.x xxx.A HD.x xx.S.B.x ITEM EXPANSION COOLING SETPOINT 1 COOLING SETPOINT 2 ICE SETPOINT HEATING SETPOINT 1 HEATING SETPOINT 2 HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINT A HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINT B ENTRY ENTRY BCST HEAT HEAD CL-7 .FZ MC.x xxx.x xxx.3 HSP.A2 EN.2 CSP.x xxx.1 CSP.SP TD.C OAT.x ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL YES/NO YES/NO x A/B xxx.A1 EN.B GS.MIN MT.S.P.P.

A1 OS.B2 FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 CLR.B2 OL. MODE – SERVICE TEST To Enable Service Test Mode.H CND.A2 EXV. Configure TEST to ON.A CC.A2 LD.B1 CC.A2 OS.B1 OS.B1 MC.B VH.B1 LD.B MC.A1 MC.P.H.B2 OS.A MC.A CC.A1 LD.A2 MLV OL.PB OL. SUB-MODE TEST OUTS ITEM EXV. Move Switch to ENABLE.H.Component Test — Complete the following tests to make sure all peripheral components are operational before the compressors are started.A1 CC.P RMT.B2 LD. move Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch to OFF.A VH.PA OL.P.P CLR.B DISPLAY ON/OFF xxx % xxx % ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF xxx % xxx % ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ITEM EXPANSION SERVICE TEST MODE EXV % OPEN VAR HEAD PRESS % OIL PUMP MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID A1 MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID A2 OIL SOLENOID A1 OIL SOLENOID A2 EXV % OPEN VAR HEAD PRESS % OIL PUMP MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID B1 MOTOR COOLING SOLENOID B2 OIL SOLENOID B1 OIL SOLENOID B2 FAN 1 RELAY FAN 2 RELAY FAN 3 RELAY FAN 4 RELAY COOLER PUMP RELAY COOLER HEATER CONDENSER PUMP RELAY REMOTE ALARM RELAY COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY LOADER A1 RELAY LOADER A2 RELAY MINIMUM LOAD VALVE OIL HEATER COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY LOADER B1 RELAY LOADER B2 RELAY OIL HEATER ENTRY COMPLETE COMP CL-8 .

(Comp 1/Comp 2) OIL FILTER DIFF. L1 _____ _____ _____ _____ L2 _____ _____ _____ _____ L3 _____ _____ _____ _____ Compressor A1 Compressor A2 Compressor B1 Compressor B2 Condenser Fan Motor Current L1 _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ L2 _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ L3 _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ Fan Motor 1 Fan Motor 2 Fan Motor 3 Fan Motor 4 Fan Motor 5 Fan Motor 6 Fan Motor 7 Fan Motor 8 Fan Motor 9 Fan Motor 10 Fan Motor 11 Fan Motor 12 Fan Motor 13 Fan Motor 14 Fan Motor 15 Fan Motor 16 CL-9 . (Comp 1/Comp 2) CALCULATED OIL PRESS (Comp 1/Comp 2) Compressor Running Current — All readings taken at full load.CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ALL UNITS: Record the following information from the Pressures and Temperatures Modes when machine is in a stable operation condition. COOLER ENTERING FLUID COOLER LEAVING FLUID OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SPACE TEMPERATURE CONDENSER ENTERING FLUID CONDENSER LEAVING FLUID LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ CIRCUIT A _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ CIRCUIT B ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ SATURATED CONDENSING TEMP SATURATED SUCTION TEMP DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT TEMP (Comp 1/Comp 2) MOTOR TEMPERATURE (Comp 1/Comp 2) DISCHARGE PRESSURE SUCTION PRESSURE ECONOMIZER PRESSURE OIL PRESSURE (Comp 1/Comp 2) OIL PRESSURE DIFF.

Form 30G. 533-00052 Printed in U.S.A. specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. 2 PC 903 Catalog No.H-9T Pg CL-10 3-04A 1-04 Replaces: New 5c .Copyright 2004 Carrier Corporation Book Tab Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue. or change at any time.